Download Carrier 50PD06 Unit installation

®
Irn
to the Expertg
Controls,
Start-Up,
Operation,
Troubleshooting
TABLE
GENERAL
Instructions
OF CONTENTS
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
.........................
.........................................
BASIC CONTROL USAGE
Page
2
3
...........................
Service and
Alarm Output .....................................
11
Economizer Monitoring .............................
11
Economizer Damper Control .........................
11
CONTROLS OPERATION
...........................
11
3
Display Configuration
ComfortLink ,_ Control ..............................
3
Modes ..........................................
12
Scrolling Marquee ..................................
3
Unit Configuration .................................
12
Accessory Navigator Display ..........................
3
General Operating Sequence
13
Operation .........................................
3
Occupancy Determination
System Pilot _ Device ...............................
4
Compressor Operation ..............................
14
CCN Tables and Display
4
Indoor Fan Operation ...............................
14
5
Outdoor Fan Operation
15
5
Economizer Operation ..............................
15
Unit Preparation ....................................
5
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) ............................
16
Compressor Mounting ...............................
5
Cooling Modes
...................................
17
Refrigerant Service Ports .............................
5
Heating Modes ....................................
20
Crankcase Heater(s) .................................
5
Temperature Compensated Start .......................
22
Compressor Rotation ................................
5
Carrier Comfort Network (CCN)® Configuration
.....................................
6
Demand Limit
Internal Wiring .....................................
6
.............................
Conventions Used in This Manual ......................
START-UP .........................................
Power Supply
..............................
11
.........................
...........................
13
.............................
.........
23
....................................
23
Alarm Handling ...................................
24
TROUBLESHOOTING
..............................
24
Evaporator Fan ....................................
6
Condenser Fans and Motors ...........................
6
Complete Unit Stoppage
Return-Air Filters ..................................
6
Restart Procedure ..................................
24
Outdoor-Air
6
Control Module Conmmnication
24
Inlet Screens ............................
............................
24
......................
7
Communication Failures
Orifice Change (48PD Only) ..........................
7
Alarms and Alerts .................................
25
Gas Heat (48PD Only) ...............................
7
Cooling Troubleshooting
30
7
Digital Scroll Controller (DSC) Troubleshooting
7
Economizer Troubleshooting
Standard Unit Control ...............................
7
Heating Troubleshooting
CCN Communication
8
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Troubleshooting
Phase Loss Protection ..............................
Accessory Installation
...............................
CONTROLS QUICK SET-UP
.........................
Control Set Point and Configuration Log
Accessories
................
...............................
.......................................
Programming Operating Schedules ....................
SERVICE TEST ....................................
8
10
10
Independent Outputs ...............................
10
Fan Test .........................................
10
Cooling Test
.....................................
Heating Test ......................................
THIRD PARTY CONTROL
Remote Occupancy
..........................
................................
Fire Shutdown ....................................
............................
25
............................
..........
.........................
31
33
............................
34
........
34
34
Thermistor Troubleshooting
.........................
37
Transducer Troubleshooting
.........................
38
Forcing Inputs and Outputs ..........................
MAJOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS
....................
38
42
11
General
.........................................
42
11
Main Base Board (MBB) ............................
47
11
Economizer Control Board (ECB) .....................
49
11
Modulation Board (AUX1) ..........................
51
11
Digital Scroll Control Board (DSC) ....................
52
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) ......................
53
Recognize
Integrated Gas Control (IGC) Board
54
When you see this symbol on the unit and in instructions
manuals, be alert to the potential for personal iniury.
...................
Low Voltage Terminal Strip (TBI) .....................
55
Scrolling Marquee Display
56
Accessory Navigator
TM
..........................
Display .......................
56
Carrier Comfort Network (CCN)® Interface .............
56
Field-Installed
56
Accessories
..........................
SERVICE .........................................
59
Cleaning ........................................
Lubrication ......................................
60
62
Evaporator Fan Service and Replacement
...............
62
Evaporator Fan Performance Adjustment
...............
62
Evaporator Fan Belt Tension Adjustment
...............
63
safety information.
Condenser-Fan
...........
Adjustment ..........................
Verify Sensor Performance
63
63
..........................
Economizer Operation During Power Failure
Evacuation .......................................
64
............
64
64
Refrigerant Charge .................................
64
Gas Valve Adjustment (48PD Units Only) ...............
65
High Altitude (48PD Units Only) .....................
66
Main Burners (48PD Units Only)
.....................
severe
which
personal iniury or death. WARNING
could result in personal iniury or death.
suggestions
operation.
which will result in enhanced
Protective Devices .................................
66
Failure to follow
damage.
Relief Devices
67
67
67
Replacement Parts .................................
67
Diagnostic LEDs ..................................
APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND
CCN TABLES .....................................
67
APPENDIX B - STARTUP DATA .....................
81
APPENDIX C - ADDITIONAL
STARTUP DATA .........
91
APPENDIX D - ADDITIONAL
STARTUP DATA .......
100
UNIT START-UP CHECKLIST
......................
105
SAFETY
reliability,
Before performing service or maintenance operations
on unit, turn off main power switch to unit and install
lockout tag. Ensure electrical service to rooftop unit
agrees with voltage and amperage listed on the unit
rating plate.
UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD
..............................
installation,
Failure to follow this warning could cause personal
iniury or death.
66
Control Circuit, 24-V
this
caution
may
cause
equipment
This unit uses a microprocessor-based
electronic control
system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out
components or to bypass or otherwise depart from
recommended procedures. Any short-to-ground
of the
control board or accompanying wiring may destroy the
electronic modules or electrical components.
68
CONSIDERATIONS
Installation and servicing of air-conditioning equipment can be
hazardous due to system pressure and electrical components. Only
trained and qualified service personnel should install, repair, or
service air-conditioning
equipment. Untrained personnel can
perform the basic maintenance functions of replacing filters.
Trained service personnel should perform all other operations.
When working on air-conditioning equipment, observe precautions
in the literature, tags and labels attached to the unit, and other
safety precautions that may apply. Follow all safety codes. Wear
safety glasses and work gloves. Use quenching cloth for unbrazing
operations. Have fire extinguishers available for all brazing
operations.
Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves.
Have fire extinguisher
available.
Read these instructions
thoroughly and follow all warnings or cautions attached to the unit.
Consult local building codes and National Electrical Code (NEC)
for special requirements.
or
signifies a hazard
CAUTION
is used
HAZARD
66
Compressor Sound Shield ...........................
/_.
to identify unsafe practices which may result in minor personal
iniury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to highlight
Filter Drier .......................................
....................................
symbol
Understand
the signal
words
DANGER,
WARNING,
and
CAUTION.
These words are used with the safety-alert
symbol.
DANGER
identifies the most serious hazards which will result in
ELECTRICALSHOCK
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Replacement
This is the safety-alert
FIRE,
EXPLOSION
HAZARD
Failure to follow this warning could
iniury, death and/or property damage.
result
in personal
Improper installation,
adjustment,
alteration,
service, or
maintenance
can cause
property
damage,
personal
iniury, or loss of life. Refer to the User's Information
Manual provided with this unit for more details.
Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors
and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance.
What to do if you smell gas:
1. DO NOT try to light any appliance.
2. DO NOT touch any electrical switch, or use any
phone in your building.
3.IMMEDIATELY
call your gas supplier from a
neighbor's
phone. Follow the gas supplier's
instructions.
4. If you cannot
department.
reach your gas supplier,
call the fire
or
• Service Test
GENERAL
This publication
contains
and Troubleshooting
Start-Up,
Controls,
information
Operation,
for the 48/50PD
Service,
rooftop
units.
(See Table 1.) These units are equipped
with ComfortLink
"_
controls version I.X or higher and use Puron ® refrigerant.
The
specific base unit installation
instructions
and/or wiring
label
diagram may also be required in conjunction
with this book as a
guide to a specific unit on the roof. All the units in Table 1 are
Displacement
Ventilation
or Single Zone Variable Airflow units
that provide
stand-alone
or network
Table
operation.
1 -- Rooftop
• Temperatures
• Pressures
• Set points
• Inputs
• Outputs
• Configuration
• Timeclock
• Operating Modes
• Alarms
Units
Through
MODEL
SIZE
NOMINAL
05
48/50PD
ComfortLink
CONTROL
Control
for connection
management
control
is fully communicating
for remote
monitoring
via the Internet.
units can be linked together (and to other
equipped units) using a 3-wire communication
The ComfortLink
control
system
Marquee,
the user
can
access
all of the
and to diagnose
Accessory
Display
accessory
Navigator
hand-held
Navigator
operational
display
problems
can be used
with the
48/50PD
units. (See Fig. 2.) The Navigator
display operates the
same way as the Scrolling Marquee device. The Navigator display
is plugged into the LEN (local equipment
network) port on either
Multiple
ComfortLink
bus.
at start-up commissioning
with the unit.
The
and cable-ready
to the Carrier Comfort Network®
(CCN) building
system.
The
control
provides
high-speed
communications
Scrolling
can be accessed from the display. In addition, through the Scrolling
Marquee, the user can access a built-in test routine that can be used
USAGE
The ComfortLink
control is a comprehensive
unit-management
system. The control system is easy to access, configure, diagnose
and troubleshoot.
The ComfortLink
the
inputs and outputs to check on their values and status, configure
operating
parameters plus evaluate the current decision status for
operating
modes. The control also includes an alarm history which
4
5
06
BASIC
TONS
TBI
or the J3 port on the ECB (economizer
control
board).
control
is easy to access through
the use
of a unit-mounted
display module. There is no need to bring a
separate computer to this unit for start-up. Access to control menus
is simplified
by the ability to quickly select from 11 menus. A
scrolling
readout
information.
Only
provides
detailed
explanations
of control
four, large, easy-to-use
buttons are required to
maneuver through the entire controls menu. The display
designed to be visible even in bright sunlight.
For
added
service
flexibility,
Navigator
module is also available.
TM
readout
is
an
accessory
hand-held
This portable device has an
extended communication
cable that can be plugged into the unit's
communication
network at the main control box. The Navigator
display
provides
the same menu structure,
control access and
display data as is available
display.
at the unit-mounted
Scrolling
Marquee
C06321
Fig. 2 - Accessory
Navigator
Display
Operation
O
0
All units are shipped
AlarmStNus
OT[me
Clock
8o:=
.......
C06320
Fig. 1 - Scrolling
Scrolling
This device
information,
16-segment
display
Marquee
is the keypad
interface
used to access the control
read sensor values, and test the unit. The Scrolling
LED
also contains
(light-emitting
with the Scrolling
Marquee
control box and is standard on all
display
is a 4-key, 4-character,
diode)
display
Both
displays
provide
the
ComfortLink
control system.
user with
an interface
to the
The displays
have up and down
arrow keys, an ESCAPE key and an ENTER key. These keys are
used to navigate
through
the different
levels of the display
Marquee
Marquee is located in the main
units. The Scrolling
Marquee
from the factory
display, which is located in the main control box. (See Fig. 1.) In
addition, the ComfortLink
control also supports
the use of the
handheld Navigator display.
Configuralion
module.
The
an Alarm Status LED. (See Fig. 1.)
The display is easy to operate using 4 buttons and a group
LEDs that indicate the following menu structures:
• Run Status
of 11
structure. The Navigator display and the Scrolling Marquee operate
in the same manner, except that the Navigator display has multiple
lines of display and the Scrolling Marquee has a single line. All
further discussions and examples in this document will be based on
the Scrolling Marquee display. See Table 2 for the menu structure.
The
four keys
structure,
which
are used
is organized
to navigate
in a tiered
through
the display
mode structure.
If the
buttons have not been used for a period, the display will default to
the AUTO
VIEW display category
as shown under the RUN
STATUS
category.
To show the top-level
display,
press the
ESCAPE
key until
a blank
display
is shown.
Then use the up and
1
downarrowkeysto
scroll through the top-level
categories.
These
economizer
commanded
position (EC.CP) is forced, the Navigator
display shows "80F', where the "F' is blinking to signify a force on
the point.
The Scrolling Marquee display shows "80." Where the
are listed in Appendix
A and will be indicated on the Scrolling
Marquee by the LED next to each mode listed on the face of the
display.
When
a specific
mode
or sub-mode
is located,
push
.... is blinking to signify a force on the point. Remove the force by
selecting the point that is forced with the key ENTER and then
pressing the up and down arrow keys simultaneously.
the ENTER
key to enter the mode. Depending
on the mode, there may be
additional
tiers. Continue
to use the up and down keys and the
Depending
field-installed
ENTER keys until the desired display item is found. At any time,
the user can move back a mode level by pressing the ESCAPE key.
Once an item has been selected the display will flash showing the
item, followed
by the item value
and then followed
the four digits
of the
to be entered
There
points
that
can
be
forced
occupant
security
the
Auto
View
of
Run Status
(VIEW)
Software
Version
Numbers
(VERS)
Control
Modes
(MODE)
Cooling
Status
(COOL)
Heating
Status
(HEAT)
Economizer
Status
(ECON)
Component
Run Hours
(HRS)
Component
Starts
(STRT)
Service Test
Mode
(TEST)
Test Independent
Outputs
(INDP)
Test Fans
Test (?ooling
(COOL)
Test Heating
(HEAT)
TEMPERATURES
Air
Temperatures
(AIR.T)
Refrigerant
Temperatures
(REF.T)
SETPOINTS
set points. A
features
for
Pilot device
details.
Scrolling
Marquee
display,
the
menus
in Appendix
A.
Appendix
A is structured
towards
the organization
of the local display (Scrolling
Marquee)
menus.
Because
of the variety of CCN programs
and devices, the CCN
Marquee
and a
For example,
if
PRESSURES
NOT
menus may be different and more items may be displayed in the
CCN tables. Details on the CCN tables are included with the local
tables,
sub-tables,
organization.
SERVICE
TEST
is
user can also access the same information
through the CCN tables
by using the Service tool or other CCN programs/devices.
The
variable names used for the CCN tables and the Scrolling Marquee
be displayed
with a blinking
"." on a Scrolling
blinking "F' on a Navigator
following
its value.
RUN
STATUS
application
and Display
to the unit-mounted
display
Marquee
zoning
users. See Fig. 3 for System
CCN Tables
In addition
Scrolling
2 -- Scrolling
and Touch Pilot device
CCN
communication
can use the System Pilot device to change
feature
is provided
to limit access of
Marquee or the Navigator.
If the user needs to force a variable,
follow the same process as when editing a configuration
parameter.
A forced variable, regardless where the force has come from will
Table
Pilot Devices
the System Pilot device can serve as a wall-mounted
sensor
for space temperature
measurement.
The
unauthorized
the ESCAPE key and
Repeat the process as
from
and Touch
device (33PILOT-01)
can
be
used
as
at this time with the PD products.
Additionally,
temperature
again before
for other items.
are some
TM
Multiple
recommended
in rotating auto-view, press the ENTER key to stop the display at
the desired item. Press the ENTER key again so that the item value
flashes. Use the arrow keys to change the value of state of an item
required
Pilot
IMPORTANT:
Changing
item values or testing outputs is accomplished
in the
same manner. Locate and display the desired item. If the display is
and press the ENTER key to accept it. Press
the item, value or units display will resume.
System
48/50PD's
CCN tables and the units CCN points can be monitored,
forced, or configured.
meaning of each display point. Pressing the ESCAPE and ENTER
keys when the display is blank (MODE LED level) will return the
display to its default menu of rotating AUTO VIEW display items.
need
may not apply.
model,
factory-installed
options
and
some of the items in the various Mode
user-interfaces.
These devices can be put on the CCN bus and
addressed to communicate
with any other device on the network.
Unlike the Scrolling Marquee and Navigator,
these pilots read the
Pressing the ESCAPE
and ENTER keys simultaneously
will scroll
an expanded
text description
across the display indicating the full
will
categories
The System Pilot
(33CNTPILOT)
Items in the Configuration
and Service Test modes are password
protected. The display will flash PASS and WORD when required.
In addition, the password
changes can be made.
the unit
accessories,
by the item
units (if any).
Use the ENTER
and arrow keys to enter
password. The default password is 1111.
on
Mode
and Menu
Display
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
General
Inputs
Fan
Outputs
(GEN.I)
Current
Sensor Inputs
(CS£IN)
Air Quality
Inputs
(AIR.Q)
and
CONFIGURATION
Display
Configuration
(DISP)
Cool
Outputs
Unit
Configuration
(UNIT)
Heat
Outputs
(HEAT)
Cooling
Configuration
Economize
r
Outputs
Heating
Configuration
(ECgN)
Alarm
Relay
(ALRM)
are
referenced
within
that
Structure
(FANS)
(CqOL)
points
(CqOLl
(HEAT)
Economizer
Configuration
TIME
CLOCK
Time of Day
(TIME)
Cool Mode
Diagnostic
(DATE)
(COOL)
Daylight
Savings
Time
Heat }vlode
Economizer
Diagnostic
(SCH.L)
I_al
(HOE.L)
PID
Configuration
(PID)
Sensor
Calibration
(TRIM)
C(_N
Configuration
(CCN/
(HEAT)
(DST)
Air Quality
Cfg.
(ALM.O/
Diagnostic
Local Time
Schedule
Holiday
Schedules
(AI Q
Control
Modes
(MODE)
Month, Date
Day and
Year
(ECpN/
Alarm*Relay
Config.
OPERATIN
G
MODES
(ECON)
Demand
Listing
(DMD.L)
ALARMS
Reset All
Current
Alarms
(R.C_YRR)
Re*set
Alarm
History
(R.HIST)
Currently
Active
Alarms
(CURR)
Alarm
History
(HIST)
/1
Conventions
Used in This Manual
The following
conventions
for discussing
the local display (Scrolling
be used in this manual.
Marquee
configuration
or Navigator
points
T, accessory)
for
will
Point names will be written with the Mode name first, then any
submodes,
then the point name, each separated by an arrow symbol
(-+). Names will also be shown in bold and italics. As an example,
the Fan Status Switch which is located in the Configuration
mode,
and Unit
sub-mode
UNIT-+ FN.S W.
NAVIGATE/_
EXIT
--MODIFY/
SELECT
\
G
be
\
_
D
a configuration
after
setting, an explanation
the
value.
As
PAGE
Open).
The expanded description
is shown in the local display
will not be shown with the path names in text,
N
Pilot _ User Interface
tables but
The CCN point names are also referenced
in the local display
tables for users configuring
the unit with CCN software instead of
See Appendix
A of this manual.
START-UP
Hierarchy
There is a hierarchy in CCN with regards to forcing a point.
Programs and devices write a force at different priority levels. A
higher level (smaller number, 1 being the highest) will override a
lower level force. The Scrolling Marquee uses a Control Force at
level 7. The Navigator writes a Service Force which is level 3.
System Pilots and Touch Pilots write Supervisor Forces at level 4.
Network programs can be set to write different level priority forces.
IMPORTANT:
Generic
Compressor
Status
= 1 (Normal
will be shown in
an
example,
Pressing the ESCAPE
and ENTER keys sinmltaneously
will scroll
an expanded text description
of the point name across the display.
the local display,
Force
Configuration---,
scroll through the modes and sub-modes
using the up and down
keys. The arrow symbol in the path name represents
pressing
ENTER to move into the next level of the menu structure.
represents
parenthesis
(06322
Fig. 3 - System
as
This path name will show the user how to navigate through the
local display to reach the desired configuration.
The user would
Configuration-_UNIT-_FN.SW
SCROLL
written
When a value is included as part of the path name, it will be shown
at the end of the path name after an equals sign. If the value
j--
\
would
Display
Table
Do not
attempt
to start unit,
until all items on the Start-Up
Checklist
following
steps have been completed.
even
(last
momentarily,
page)
and
the
Unit Preparation
Check
that unit
installation
has
been
instructions
installed
in
accordance
and all applicable
these
Mounting
The GENERIC points table allows the service/installer the ability
to create a custom table in which up to 20 points from the 5 CCN
categories (Points, Config, Service-Config,
Set Point, and
Maintenance) may be collected and displayed.
In the Service-Config
table section, there is a table named
"GENERICS." This table contains placeholders for up to 20 CCN
point names and allows the user to decide which points are
displayed in the GENERIC points sub-table under the status
display table. Each one of these placeholders allows the input of an
8-character ASCII string. Using a CCN interface, enter the Edit
mode for the Service-Config table "GENERICS" and enter the
CCN name for each point to be displayed in the custom points
table in the order they will be displayed. When done entering point
names, download the table to the rooftop unit control.
Compressors
are internally
spring mounted.
remove compressor
holddown bolts.
IMPORTANT: The computer system software (ComfortVIEW'_,
Service Tool, etc.) that is used to interact with CCN controls,
always saves a template of items it considers as static (e.g., limits,
units, forcibility, 24-character text strings, and point names) after
the software uploads the tables from a control. Thereafter, the
software is only concerned with run time data like value and
hardware/force status. With this in mind, it is important that any
time a change is made to the Service-Config table "GENERICS"
(which in turn changes the points contained in the GENERIC point
table), that a complete new upload be performed. This requires that
any previous table database be completely removed first. Failure to
do this will not allow the user to display the new points that have
been created and the CCN interface will have a different table
database than the unit control.
start-up.
Refrigerant
with
codes.
Service
Do
not
loosen
or
Ports
Each independent
refrigerant system has a total of 3 Schrader-type
service gauge ports per circuit. One port is located on the suction
line, one on the compressor
discharge line, and one on the liquid
line, Be sure that caps on the ports are tight,
Crankcase
Heater(s)
Compressor
crankcase heater operation
varies depending
on the
unit size and type. In general for all units, the crankcase heaters are
energized
operating,
if there is power to the unit, the compressor
and the ambient temperature
is below 75 °F.
IMPORTANT:
Unit
Otherwise,
Compressor
power
damage
must
be on
to compressor
for 24 hours
is not
prior
may result.
Rotation
[]NIT DAMAGE HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result in unit damage.
Improper wiring will cause compressor stoppage and alarm.
Correct wiring by switching leads as indicated below.
to
CONTROL
BOX
AND
COMPRESSOR
\
ELECTRICAL
OPTIONS
\
\
PANEL
\
\
\
\"\
OUTDOOR
\
INDOOR MOTOR
\
\
ACCESS
\
J
DOOR
f
AIR
SCREEN
(HIDDEN)
\\
\
\
CONDENSER COIL
ACCESS PANEL
\
GAS SECTION
ACCESS
/
BASEPAN
/
FILTER
ACCESS
DOOR
CONNECTIONS
ACCESS
PANEL
C 07002
Fig. 4 - Panel and Filter
On 3-phase units, it is important to be certain the compressors are
rotating in the proper direction. To determine whether or not
compressors
are rotating in the proper direction, use a
phase-rotation meter on the unit input power to check for
LI-L2-L3 or clockwise rotation or use the Service Test mode to
energize a compressor. If the compressor is rotating in the wrong
direction, the controls will stop the compressor and display alarm
for "Circuit A Failure to Pressurize."
IMPORTANT:
Indoor or outdoor fan rotation direction may not
indicate proper input power phase sequence, as some 3-phase units
use single-phase fan motors.
To correct the wrong compressor rotation direction, perform the
following procedure:
1. Turn off power to the unit and lock out the power.
2. Switch any two of the incoming unit power leads.
3. Turn on power to the unit.
4. Verify corrected compressor rotation.
Power
Supply
All 208/230-v units are factory wired for 230-v power supply. If
the 208/230-v unit is to be connected to a 208-v power supply, the
transformers (TRAN1 and TRAN2) must be rewired by moving
the wire from the 230-volt connection and moving to the 200-volt
terminal on the primary side of the transformer. Refer to unit label
diagram for additional information.
Internal
Wiring
Check all electrical connections in unit control boxes; tighten as
required.
Evaporator
Fan
Fan belt and variable pulleys are factory-installed, but may need to
be adjusted for specific applications. Be sure that the fans rotate in
the proper direction. See Appendix C for unit specific fan
performance data. See Appendix D for unit specific air quality
Locations
limits, evaporator fan motor specifications, FIOP static pressures,
and fan RPM for various motor pulley settings. Appendix C and D
are based on 100% fan speed (VFD at 60Hz).
To alter fan
performance, see Evaporator Fan Performance Adjustment in the
Service section.
The
Supply
Fan
Minimum
Speed
(Configuration-+UNIT--,FSd_N)
and the Supply Fan Maximum
Speed (Configuration-+UNIT-+FSd_X)
can also be used to alter
fan performance. The fan should run at the maximum fan speed
when setting up the application design point. The unit is equipped
with a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD). The VFD's settings
should not be used for adjusting fan performance. Specific VFD
information can be found in Appendix B.
IMPORTANT: When setting up and starting the unit, the heating
minimum CFM requirements must be upheld when changing belts,
pulleys, and configurations. During heating mode, the fan speed is
always set to Supply Fan Maximum Speed (FS.MX).
Condenser
Fans and Motors
Condenser fans and motors are factory set. Refer to Condenser-Fan
Adjustment section as required.
Return-Air
Filters
Check that correct filters are installed in filter tracks (see Physical
Data table in Installation Instructions). Do not operate unit without
return-air filters.
IMPORTANT:
For units with 4-in. filter option, units are shipped
with standard 2-in. filters. To install 4-in. filters, the filter spacers
must be removed.
Outdoor-Air
Inlet Screens
Outdoor-air inlet screens must be in place before operating unit.
Accessory
Installation
CONTROLS
Check to make sure that all accessories
including
sensors have
been installed and wired as required by the instructions
and unit
wiring diagrams.
The following
Orifice
factory-installed
options.
configuration
at start-up.
Change
This unit is factory
gas at an elevation
(48PD Only)
assembled
for heating
from sea level to 2000
operation
Use accessory
high altitude kit when installing
elevation of 2000 to 7000 ft. For elevations above
High Altitude section to identify
elevation.
Purchase
these orifices
Follow instructions
the correct orifices.
in accessory
using
natural
ft.
this unit at an
7000 ft, refer to
the correct orifice size for the
from your local Carrier dealer.
Installation
Instructions
to install
Use accessory
LP (liquid
propane)
gas conversion
kit when
converting
this unit for use with LP fuel usage for elevations
up
to 7000 ft. For elevations
above 7000 ft, refer to High Altitude
section
to identify
the correct
orifice
size for the elevation.
Purchase
these orifices from your local Carrier dealer. Follow
instructions
in
correct orifices.
Gas Heat
accessory
Installation
Instructions
to install
the
before
turning
1. Turn off field-supplied
unit.
2. Connect
pressure
field-supplied
3. Connect
gauge
manual
pressure
to supply
shutoff
gauge
4. Turn on field-supplied
gas stop, located
valve.
to manifold
manual
gas
t@,
external
to
located
on
(See F ig. 5.)
pressure
a quick
the 48/50PD
series units
controls
are pre-configured
Service
Test
guide to setting
with ComfortLink
at the factory
up
T'_
for
Field-installed
accessories
will require
Service Test is recommended
for initial
Control
Set Point and
Configuration
Log
During start up, accessory installation,
and equipment
service set
points and/or configuration
changes might have to be made. When
setting
set
points
or
changing
configuration
settings,
documentation
is recommended.
The Control Log starting on page
106 should be filled out and left with the unit at all times. A copy
should
also be provided
Standard
There
to the equipment
owner.
Unit Control
are two different
applications
these
units can be applied
Ventilation
and Single
Zone VAV.
a direct wired
space sensor
can be
sensor/thermostat
can be used.
For
used
Installation
to,
either
or a
of an
accessory supply air temperature
(SAT) sensor in the supply duct is
recommended
when using a communication
type control. A supply
duct SAT measurement
is valid for heating mode display, while the
factory-standard
internal SAT is not valid for heating due to its
location
upstream
of the heating section.
supply duct SAT, the heating mode display
t@.
gas stop. Enter
will provide
SET-UP
start-up.
Additionally,
specific job requirements
may require
changes to default configuration
values. See the CCN and Display
parameter
tables and other sections of these instructions
for more
details.
conmmnicating
on heat as follows:
manual
information
and configuring
controls.
Unit
Displacement
application
(48PD Only)
Verify gas pressures
QUICK
Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAT.H
When installing
the
is enabled by setting
to ENBL.
mode by setting Serrice Test-_TEST
to "ON" using the
Scrolling Marquee display. Use the Service Test feature to
There are several configurations
that should be considered
for
Displacement
Ventilation or Single Zone VAV applications.
Table
set Serriee Test_HEAT_HT.1
using the Scrolling Marquee.
3 shows
settings.
to ON (first stage of heat)
these configuration
defaults
and specific
application
These settings typical values and should be adjusted for
each actual specific unit application.
Refer to the Operation section
for more detail on these configurations
and how they effect the
GAS
units operation.
SUPPLY
IMPORTANT:
Multiple
zoning
application
is not recommended
at this time with the PD product.
Space
(T-55,
Temperature
T-56,
Sensor
Control--Direct
Wired
or T-59)
Wire accessory space temperature
sensor(s) to the T-55 terminals
on the field connection
terminal board located at the unit control
box. No configuration
is required when installing a T-55, T-56, or
T-59.
Refer to Field-Installed
Accessories
section for additional
UNION
information.
T-58
C06323
Fig. 5 - Field
Gas Piping
5. After the unit has run for several
nfinutes,
verify
the supply
gas pressure is between 5.5-in. wg to 13.0-in. wg, and the
manifold pressure is 3.50-in. wg on sizes 03-14
and 3.00
on size 16. If manifold pressure
Gas Valve Adjustment
section.
IMPORTANT:
Supply
gas pressure
6. Set Service
Marquee,
Test-+HEAT-+HT.1
7. Exit Service
Test mode
"OFF"
using the Scrolling
must be adjusted,
must not exceed
by setting
Marquee,
to OFF
Selwice
refer to
13.0-in.
using
wg.
Scrolling
Test-+TEST
to
Communicating
Thermostat
Install the T-58 communicating
thermostat.
Connect
the CCN
communication
bus from the T-58 to the CCN terminals
on the
field connection
terminal board located at the unit control box.
Configure
the unit's CCN communication
number, and baud rate. Configure
the T-58's
element number, bus
CCN communication
bus number and baud rate the same as the unit, while the element
number has to be different. Configure the T-58 to send SPT to the
unit's element
number. Refer to the Field-Installed
Accessories
section
for additional
information.
Table
3 1
ITEM
EXPANSION
Application
Specific
Configurations
DEFAULT
UNITS
Air Setpoint
DISPLACEMENT
VENTILATION
SINGLE ZONE
VAV
SASP
Cool Supply
65
dF
65
55
FS.MX
Supply
Fan Maximum
Speed
100
%
100
100
FS.MN
Supply
Fan Maximum
Speed
20
%
20
70
FS.VM
Vent Mode Fan Speed
50
^F
50
50
M IN.C
M in Corn pressor Capacity
70
%
15
70
3
FS.CD
Fan Speed Control
SA.MU
SASP Maximum
Reset Up
SA.MD
SASP Maximum
Reset Down
MRMX
Econ Min at Max Fanspeed
PE1 .C
Power Exhaust
IDF.C
Demand
Stage
Indoor Fan Max Speed
System Pilot - Communication
Install the System Pilot and connect
from it to the units CCN connection
^F
3
^F
3
5
-10
^F
-3
-5
30
%
30
30
1 CFM
600
cfm
600
600
CFM
1600 (05)
2000 (06)
cfm
1600 (05)
2000 (06)
1600 (05)
2000 (06)
Space Sensor
the CCN communication
bus
on the low voltage terminal
board. Configure
the unit's CCN communication
bus number, and baud rate. Refer to the System
instructions for configuring
attaching it to a unit.
3
10
element number,
Pilot's installation
it to be used as a space temperature
and
gen III TEMP Monitor - Linkage Communication
Thermostat (33CSTMT-01)
should be
information
Economizer
satisfactory.
If they need to be changed,
additional
about these configuration
settings can be found in the
section.
Power Exhaust
If a Power Exhaust
accessory
was field installed,
the unit must be
configured
for it by setting Configuration-->ECON-->PE,EN
ENBL.
The default
settings
for the other
power
to
exhaust
configurations
should be satisfactory.
If they need to be changed,
additional information
about these configurations
can be found in
the Power Exhaust section.
Install the linkage thermostat.
Connect the CCN communication
bus from the Stat to the CCN terminals on the field connection
Electric Heat
terminal board located at the unit control box. Configure the unit's
CCN communication
element number, bus number, and baud rate.
If an Electric Heat accessory was field installed, the unit must be
configured
for it by setting Configuration--,HEAT--,HT.TY
to a
Refer
value of 2. The number of electric heat stages must be configured
by setting
Configuration--,HEAT--,NJtTR
per the installed
heater.
to
the
configuring
Linkage
Thermostat's
the Stat and additional
installation
information
instructions
for
about it.
Space Humidistat Control
The humidistat
input
is provided
board.
The
Space
Configuration--,UNIT--,RH.SW,
on the field connection
terminal
Humidity
Switch
configuration,
identifies the normally
open or
normally closed status of this input at LOW humidity. Humidistat
1 terminal is the 24 VAC source for dry contact and the Humidistat
2 terminal
is the signal input.
Relative Humidity Sensor Control
For units with the economizer
option (with the ECB-economizer
control board), the humidity sensor input is provided on the field
connection
terminal board. The sensor can be used in addition to
or
instead
of
a humidistat.
The
RH
Sensor
on
configuration,
Configuration-+UNIT-+RH.S=YES,
the sensor is being used instead of an OAQ sensor.
OAQ
Input
identifies
Terminal
the 24vdc loop power and Terminal 4 is the 4-20 mA signal
Refer to the Field Installed Accessories
for more information.
that
1 is
input.
Configure
Configuration--,CCN--,CCN,4
to desired
number (Default is 1). Configure Configuration-->CCN-->
to
desired
bus
number
Configuration--+CCN--+BAUD
(Default
to desired
element
CCN.B
is
0).
Configure
code number for baud
is 3 = 9600 baud).
Shutdown
installed,
the
unit
or
Smoke
Detector
must
be
configured
accessory
for
it
was
by
field
setting
Configuration--,UNIT--,FS.SW
to normally open (1) or normally
closed (2) when there is not a fire alarm. Normally open (1) is the
preferred configuration.
IMPORTANT:
On standard units, the fire shutdown
terminals Fire Shutdown
1 and 2.
input
is the
Outdoor Enthalpv
If an Outdoor
be configured
Enthalpy accessory was field installed, the unit must
for it by setting Configuration--,ECON--,EN.SW,
identifies the normally open or normally
when the outdoor enthalpy is low.
closed
status of this input
IAQ Switch
identifies the normally open or normally closed status of this input
when the indoor air quality value is low (good) and also selects the
unit response
IAQ
Below
are quick
configuration
settings
accessories.
If these accessories were installed
will already be configured.
section, third party control,
for field
installed
by the factory, they
See the Field-Installed
Accessories
control connection
tables, and CCN or
tables for any accessories not mentioned
information
on accessories.
below
to this input.
IMPORTANT:
switch
Accessories
Display parameter
and any additional
If a Fire
If an IAQ Switch accessory was field installed, the unit must be
configured
for it by setting
Configuration--,AIR.Q--,II.CF,
CCN Communication
rate (Default
Fire Shutdown
An IAQ
is already
accessory
configured
for it by
selects the unit response
OAQ
cannot
be used
if an enthalpy
Sensor
If an CO 2 Sensor
2000
switch
on this input.
was field
installed,
the unit
must be
setting
Configuration-+AIR.Q-+IA.CF
to this input. Default conversion
to 0 to
ppm.
Sensor
Economizer
If an Outdoor
If an Economizer
accessory
configured for it by setting
unit must be configured
for it by setting Configuration-+AIR.Q
--,OA.CF
selects
the unit response
to this input.
Default
conversion
to 0 to 2000 ppm.
YES.
The default
settings
was field installed,
the unit must
Configuration-->ECON-->EC.EN
for the other economizer
be
to
configurations
Air Quality
Sensor
accessory
was field installed,
the
Fan
Status
Filter
If a Fan Status accessory
was field installed,
the unit must
configured
for it by setting Configuration---_UNIT---_FN.SW
normally
preferred
open (1) or normally
configuration.
IMPORTANT:
Fan Status.
Fan Status
closed
input
Table
DISPLAY
MENU
TIMECLOCK
SCH.L
SUBr-] r-]SUB
MODE
(2). Normally
open (1) is the
is not on the ternfinals
4 -- Setting
KEYPAD
ENTRY
ENTER
Time
DISPLAY
ENTER
PER.1
Status
If a Filter
configured
normally
preferred
Status accessory was field installed,
the unit must
for it by setting Configuration--_UNIT--_FL.SW
open (1) or normally
configuration.
closed (2). Nom_ally
Schedule
- Weekdays
for 7:30 to 22:30
ITEM EXPANSION
Local Occupancy
OCC.1
Only
COMMENT
Schedule
Period Occupied
Time
ENTER
00.00
Scrolling
ENTER
00.00
Hours Flash
•
07.00
Select
ENTER
07.00
Change
07.30
Select
•
ENTER
07.30
7
OCC.1
07.30
Period Occupied
•
UNC.1
00.00
Period Unoccupied
Time
00.00
Scrolling
00.00
Hours Flash
•
22.00
Select
ENTER
22.00
Change
22.30
Select
22.30
ESCAPE
UNC.1
22.30
•
MON.1
NO
Monday
Time
stops
accepted,
NO
YES
Select
accepted
Scrolling
YES
Change
YES
Monday
In Period
Item/Value/Units
•
TUE.1
NO
Tuesday
In Period
YES
ENTER
Select
YES
YES
Tuesday
•
WED.1
NO
Wednesday
In Period
NO
YES
Scrolling
Select
ENTER
YES
Change
WED.1
YES
Wednesday
THU.1
NO
Thursday
In Period
NO
YES
Select
Scrolling
YES
Change
THU.1
YES
Item/Value/Units
•
FRI.1
NO
•
ESCAPE
ESCAPE
ESCAPE
In Period
Scrolling
Select
YES
YES
FRI.1
YES
again
scrolls
again
accepted
Friday In Period
NO
ENTER
scrolls
stops
YES
ESCAPE
ENTER
again
accepted
Item/Value/Units
•
Thursday
scrolls
stops
YES
In Period
ENTER
ENTER
again
accepted
In Period
•
•
scrolls
stops
Item/Value/Units
ENTER
ESCAPE
again
YES
Change
TUE.1
scrolls
accepted
Scrolling
ESCAPE
again
stops
MON.1
•
scrolls
YES
ESCAPE
NO
flash
In Period
•
ENTER
minutes
30
Item/Value/Units
ENTER
ENTER
again
22
Change
Period Unoccupied
scrolls
Time
ENTER
•
flash
accepted
Item/Value/Units
ENTER
ENTER
minutes
30
Change
ESCAPE
stops
accepted,
Change
Friday In Period
stops
YES
accepted
Item/Value/Units
be
to
open (1) is the
marked
an Occupied
ITEM
be
to
Programming
Operating
The
_
ComfortLink
different
assigned
controls
schedules
(Periods
to the desired days
SERVICE
Schedules
will
accommodate
up
to
eight
1 through 8), and each schedule
is
of the week. Each schedule includes
The Service
Test function
compressors,
exhaust fans,
Use of Service
would set days Monday through Friday to ON for Period 1. Then
the user would configure
the Period 1 Occupied From point to
08:00 and the Period 1 Occupied To point to 17:00. To create a
Service
Test
operation:
different weekend schedule,
the user would use Period 2 and set
days Saturday and Sunday to ON with the desired Occupied On
and Off times.
and heating
IMPORTANT:
programmed
By
default,
the
time
for 24 hours of occupied
To create a schedule,
1. Scroll
to
perform
the
schedule
periods
are
the following
and
to enter the password
before any new data is
SCH_
has a range of 0 to 99. The default value
not used as the control only supports
one internal/local
schedule. If one of the 2-64 schedules
is configured,
then
the control will force the number back to 1. Make sure the
value is set to 1 to use a local schedule.
the Time
TIME
SCHEDULE
ENTER.
3. Scroll
Clock
Period
down
mode.
Scroll
(SCH.L)
1 (PER.l)
down
sub-mode,
point.
and
press
This point
indicates
if
schedule
1 applies to Monday. Use the ENTER command
to go into Edit mode, and use the Up or Down key to
change the display to YES or NO. Scroll down through the
rest of the days and apply schedule
1 where
schedule can also be applied to a holiday.
4. Configure
the beginning
of the occupied
Period 1 (OCC). Press ENTER
the first two digits of the 00.00
desired.
time period
The
for
to go into Edit mode, and
will start flashing. Use the
Up or Down key to display the correct value for hours, in
24-hour
(military) time. Press ENTER
and hour value is
saved and the minutes digits will start flashing.
Use the
same procedure
value.
to display
and save
the desired
minutes
00.00 will start flashing.
Use the Up or Down key to display
the correct value for hours, in 24-hour
(military) time. Press
ENTER and hour value is saved and the minutes digits will
start flashing. Use the same procedure to display and save
the desired minutes value.
6. The first schedule
such
at initial
system
start up and
changes
limits for cooling
are ignored.
delays
following
Normal
circuits,
compressor
are reduced
from
economizer,
time guards
to 30 seconds
to 1 strike (versus
normal
and
or less.
3) before
changing
to
broadcast
is ignored
so all alerts and alarms are
on CCN.
• The words
"SERVICE
TEST"
are inserted
into every alarm
message.
Service
turned
CCN.
test can only be turned
ON/OFF
at the unit display.
Once
ON, other entries may be made with the display or through
To turn Service Test on, change the value of TEST to ON.
To turn service
test off, change
the value of TEST
IMPORTANT:
Service
Test mode
Refer
Control
Usage
to Basic
Depending
on
field-installed
the
unit
accessories,
section
model,
some
to OFF.
may be password
for
more
factory-installed
of the Service
protected.
information.
options,
and
Test functions
may
not apply.
Outputs
The independent
(INDP) submenu
is used to change output status
for the economizer,
power exhaust stages, crankcase heaters, and
the
alarm
relay.
These
independent
outputs
can
operate
simultaneously
with other Service Test modes. All outputs return to
normal
operation
when Service Test is turned off. When the
economizer
is using the factory
default
Digital
Control
Type
(Configuration---,ECON---,E.CTL
is 1 or 2) then the Economizer
Calibration
feature may be used to automatically
check and reset
the economizer
actuator range of motion.
operation section of more details.
IMPORTANT:
ECONOCMD,
mode functions
If a network
force
Refer to the economizer
is applied
to CCN
points:
PE_I, PE_2, or ALMOUT,
their respective
test
will not be usable.
Those forces are at a higher
level than test mode;
test mode.
therefore
they will still be honored
when
in
Fan Test
5. Configure
the unoccupied
time for period 1 (UNC). Press
ENTER to go into Edit mode, and the first two digits of the
needed,
air temperature
Independent
to the LOCAL
will be displayed.
to the MON.I
the
• Circuit alerts are limited
CCN
is 1. A value of 0 is always occupied,
and the unit will
control to its occupied
set points. A value of 1 means the
unit will follow a local schedule, and a value of 65 to 99
means it will follow a CCN schedule. Schedules
2-64 are
2. Enter
has
• The status of ALM.N
select
CONFIGURATION
(CCN). Scroll down to the Schedule
Number
(Configuration--,CCN--,SCH.O=SCH_.
If
password
protection
has been enabled,
the user will be
prompted
accepted.
of
alarm shut down state.
procedure:
mode,
operation
(See Table 5 for point details).
mode
other staging
operation.
Configuration
Test is recommended
troubleshooting
• Outdoor
can be used to verify proper
heating
stages, indoor
fan, outdoor
fans, power
economizer,
crankcase heaters, and the alarm relay.
an occupied on and off time. As an example,
to set an occupied
schedule for 8 AM to 5 PM for Monday through Friday, the user
during
TEST
is now complete.
as for weekends
If a second
or holidays,
scroll
schedule
down
is
The fans (FANS) submenu is used to change
indoor fan and outdoor fan stages. The VFD
on
(Supply
VFD
Power
Test).
The
indoor
fan
speed test (F.SPD) runs the fan at the desired speed entered.
The
outdoor fan relay test (OFC.I)
only tests the relay for switching
between high and low speeds.
The actual outdoor fan will not run
unless cool test is on. The cooling (COOL) and heating (HEAT)
service test outputs are reset to OFF for the fans service test.
and
repeat
the entire procedure
for period
2 (PER.2).
If
additional
schedules
are needed, repeat the process for as
many as are needed. Eight schedules
are provided.
See
Table 4 for an example
and off via IDF
output status for the
power can be turned
of setting the schedule.
10
Cooling
Fire Shutdown
Test
The cooling
(COOL)
submenu
is used
to change
output
status
for
testing the cooling function. The fans (FANS) and heating (HEAT)
service test outputs are reset to OFF for the cooling service test.
The digital
scroll controller
power test (CTLR)
turns
on and off the
compressor
controller.
The compressor
capacity test (CPAC) is
used to run the compressor
at a desired capacity of 15% to 100%.
If a capacity is chosen between 1 and 14, the capacity will be set to
15%.
The outdoor
fan will turn on to high speed when the
compressor
capacity
is 15%
default
to
compressor
supply
capacity
fan maximum
speed
(FS.MX)
when
the
test is first activated. The cool test fan speed
(F.SPD)
running.
or greater.
The indoor
fan speed
will
is used to change the fan speed while the compressor
All normal cooling alarms and alerts are functional.
IMPORTANT:
capacity
When
charging
the unit,
test and the cool test fan speed
Heating
should
both
is
the compressor
The fire shutdown
input is provided for unit shutdown
in response
to a fire alarm or smoke detector.
The Fire Shutdown
Switch
configuration,
Configuration--,UNIT--,FS.SW,
normally open or normally
no fire alarm.
Input
at field connection
cooling (COOL)
service test outputs are reset to OFF for the
heating
service
test. Indoor
and outdoor
fans are controlled
normally to maintain proper unit operation.
The indoor fan speed
will run at the configured
max speed FS.MX.
All normal heating
alarms and alerts are functional.
• Fire Shutdown
2 = 24 VAC signal input
Output
The alarm output is provided
on the field connection
terminal
board (TBI) to indicate a current alarm status. The output will be
24VAC if a current alarm exists.
Monitoring
On field terminal board (TBI),
to monitor economizer
position
See economizer
operation
EXPANDED
Directory
NAME
VALUES
Test Mode
Test Independent
Outputs
Economizer
Position Test
0 to 100%
E. CAL
PE.1
PE.2
Calibrate Economizer
Power Exhaust 1 Test
Power Exhaust 2 Test
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
Alarm Relay Test
Crankcase
Heat Test
Test Fans
On/Off
On/Off
IDF
VFD Power Test
On/Off
F.SPD
OFC.1
Indoor Fan Speed Test
Outdoor Fan Relay Test
0 to 100%
On/Off
Test Cooling
Dig Scroll Ctrl Pwr Test
Compressor
Capacity Test
On/Off
0 to 100%
COOL
CTLR
CAPC
F.SPD
signal,
disconnect
0 to 100%
HT.1
HT.2
Heat Stage 2 Test
On/Off
THIRD
signal,
information.
commanded
TBI-8
and
the violet wire on
disconnect
the violet
and
wire on
and the 50092 resister at TBI-J10-6.
meter device between
TBI-8
Place amp
and TBI-9.
In analog mode (E.CTL = 3), the economizer
position
as a 2-10v feedback signal across TBI-10
and TB1-9
IMPORTANT:
connected
The
violet
wire
at the J10 connector
economizer
in analog
Economizer
Cool Test Fan Speed
Test Heating
Heat Stage 1 Test
HEAT
for additional
and place volt meter device across TBI-8
• To read a 4-20mA
On/Off
ECON
ALRM
CCH
FANS SITPPLY
TBI-J10-8
TBI-JI0-8
Field Service
INDP
section
TBI-9.
DISPLAY MENU/
SUB-MENU/
NAME
SERVICE TEST
TEST
and Submodes
terminals 8, 9, and 10 can be used
from a third party control system.
In digital mode (E.CTL = 1 or 2), the economizer
position can be read as a 2-10v or 4-20mA
signal.
TBI-9
are used as follows:
• To read a 2-10v
Test Modes
(TBI)
1 = 24 VAC source for dry contact
Economizer
Service
board
• Fire Shutdown
Alarm
the
of this input when there is
• X = 24 VAC signal output
Test
5 --
terminal
identifies
status
• C = 24 VAC common
be set to 100%.
The heating (HEAT) submenu
is used to change output status for
the individual
heat stages, gas or electric. The fans (FANS) and
Table
closed
and
50092
as originally
can be read
at any time.
resister
wired
must
be
to operate
the
mode.
Damper
Control
For units with the economizer
option or accessory and the ECB
control board, the damper
position
can be directly
controlled
through the IAQ sensor input provided
on the field connection
terminal
board.
The
IAQ
Analog
Input
configuration,
Configuration--,AIR.Q--,IA.CF
will have to set to 3 (Control
Minimum
Position).
When IA.CF = 3, an external 4 to 20 mA
source is used to move the damper 0% to 100% directly.
On/Off
Terminal
Terminal
PARTY CONTROL
2 = 4-20mA
3 = 4-20mA
IMPORTANT:
Third party controls may interface with the unit ComfortLink
controls
through
the connections
described
below.
See other
sections of these instructions
for more information
on the related
+ signal
- common
In
configurations
this
are not valid.
mode
preset
The damper
minimum
position
positions
may exceed
the
TM
unit control
Remote
The remote
input position to provide economizer cooling and CO2 sensor input
can not be used for DCV control.
Refer to the Indoor Air Quality
operation
and configurations.
section
Occupancy
occupancy
for more information.
CONTROLS
input
is provided
on the field connection
terminal
board
(TB1).
The
Remote
configuration,
Configuration--,UNIT--,RM.SW,
normally
open or normally
closed status
unoccupied.
• 5 = 24 VAC signal input
Occupancy
Switch
identifies
the
of this input when
Display
Configuration
The Configuration--,DISP
display settings.
Metric
OPERATION
Display
This variable
Metric units.
submenu
is used to configure
the local
(METR)
is used
to change
the display
from English
units to
• 6 = 24 VAC source for dry contact
Language Selection (LANG)
This variable
display.
11
is used
to change
At this time, only English
the language
is available.
of the ComfortLink
Password Enable (PROT)
This variable
password
is
configurations.
Service
(PSWD)
is the 4-digit
if a demand
LEDs
unit
only
password
that is required
if
(TEST)
limit has been placed on the unit's
Displays
if one or more refrigerant
circuits operation
of the ComfortLink
"_ display.
Displays
if
heating
operation
is
prevented
temperature
The ComfortLink
controls operate under a hierarchy
of command
structure as defined by four main elements:
the System Mode, the
Econo Cool OAT Lockout (E.LOC)
The System
the control
Mode
The HVAC
functional
status, and the Unit Control
is the top level that defines
system:
Disabled,
Enabled,
operation:
Disabled,
status
affects
Type.
three main
states of
four main
states of
Fan Only, Cool, and Heat.
set points
Space Sensor control mode
indoor air quality ventilation
for cooling
and heating
and operation
of the economizer
and free cooling.
in
for
Run
Status--,
MODE
and Operating
Modes'--,
MODE.
System Mode (SYS)
In Run Status
Modes,
the current system
mode
and Operating
Displays if economizer
operation
outdoor temperature
limit lockout.
option
This configuration
sets the control start-up delay after the power is
interrupted.
This can be used to stagger the start-up of multiple
units.
Modes,
the current allowed
HVAC
Shut
Down
Text
on IDF
This
configuration
Failure
@plies
still
permit
factory
Alert
T409
but
Fan
Maximum
Supply Fan Minimum
Only economizer use for cooling
(occupied cooling set point active)
during
Free
Heating
Vent
Heating mode
Remote HVAC Mode Disabled (HV.DN)
Allow disabling
of HVAC
network connection.
mode.
This
is only
available
on
a
This shows the actual setpoint
heating mode.
not
cause
unit
shutdown.
The
(FS.MX)
cooling
Mode
Speed (FS.MN)
mode and cooling
Fan
Speed
test.
(FS.VM)
This configuration
sets the speed the fan will run during the
ventilation
mode.
The fan speed does not vary during ventilation
so it will remain at this speed throughout
vent mode.
during
during
(OCC)
space
occupancy
based
on
closed)
is installed,
and
the input is when the
is currently
Fire Shutdown Switch (FS.SW)
identifies
and what status (normally
occupied
due to an
the fire or smoke
This
(LINK)
is established
between
the unit
configuration
if a fire shutdown
open, normally
is installed,
the input is when
Switch (RM.SW)
identifies
if a remote
installed,
and what status (normally
input is when UNOCCUPIED.
12
switch
closed)
alarm is OFF (no alarm).
Remote Occupancy
Displays if Linkage communication
and a Linkage source.
if a fan status switch
open, normally
This configuration
identifies if a filter status switch is installed, and
what status (normally open, normally closed) the input is when the
filter is CLEAN.
This configuration
in Effect (T.OVR)
if the state of occupancy
identifies
what status (normally
indoor fan is OFF.
Filter Status Switch (FL.SW)
that is being used for control
Displays the current state of assumed
unit configuration
and inputs.
Active
and
sets the limit for the lowest speed the fan can
This minimum
speed limit applies to the unit
This configuration
that is being used for control
Heat Setpoint in Effect (EFF.H)
Linkage
is installed
Fan Status Switch (FN.SW)
(EFF.C)
This shows the actual setpoint
cooling mode.
Displays
override.
will
Speed
This configuration
run out of 100%.
Timed Override
switch
This configuration
sets the limit for the highest speed the fan can
run out of 100%.
This max speed limit @plies to the unit at all
times except for fan test.
Mechanical cooling
Only economizer used for cooling
Currently Occupied
if a fan
Brief Description
Fan may run for ventilation
in Effect
only
default value is YES.
Ventilation
(fan-only)
Cooling
Free Cooling
Setpoint
(IDF.F)
configured.
A YES value will enable diagnostic Alert T409 to shut
down the unit when incorrect fan status is sensed. A NO value will
Fan Only
Cool
due to
(FIOP).
Unit is in test mode or System mode is
disabled
Heating
is prevented
included
in
Unit
Configuration
(Configuration--_UNIT).
Configuration
will be done at the factory for any factory-installed
HVAC Operation
Disabled
Unoccupied
Cooling
for cooling
Many configurations
that indicate what factory options and/or field
accessories are installed and other common operation variables are
Disabled
Cooling
outdoor
Unit Configuration
Supply
Expanded
to
A YES value will operate the indoor fan whenever the unit is in the
Occupied mode. A NO value will operate the indoor fan only when
heating or cooling is necessary. The factory default value is YES.
mode is displayed with expandable
text. This is the mode the unit
decides to run in based on its inputs. There are four main HVAC
modes; cooling has three different expanded
texts,
These modes
are shown below,
HVAC
Mode
due
limit lockout.
is
HVAC Mode (HVAC)
Status
is prevented
Fan On When Occupied (OC.FN)
and Operating
displayed with expandable
text. This is an overall state of the unit.
Three states are: Unit Operation Disabled, Unit Operation Enabled,
or Service Test Enabled.
In Run
capacity.
Start-Up Delay (S.DLY)
The general operating mode of the control and the status of some
related operation
lockouts
are located
on the display
at two
locations:
III
or Test.
Mode is the next level that defines
The Occupied
Gen
temperature limit lockout.
Modes
the Occupied
the
Heat OAT Lockout (H.LOC)
This is used to test the operation
HVAC Mode,
supports
Circuit OAT Lockout (C.LOC)
numeric
due to outdoor
Display
The 48/50PD
Thermostat.
Demand Limit in Effect (D.LMT)
Displays
Password
This variable
enabled.
Test
IMPORTANT:
TEMP Monitor
enables or disables the use of a password.
The
used to restrict
use of the control
to change
open,
occupancy
normally
switch
closed)
is
the
RH
Sensor
On
OAQ
Input
Level 1 Priority
(RH.S)
This configuration
identifies if a space relative humidity sensor is
installed on the outdoor air quality (OAQ) input. A YES value
enables SP.RH display,
A NO value disables SP, RH display and
use.
Space
Humidity
Switch
(RH.SW)
This configuration
identifies if a space relative humidity
switch is
installed on the ENTHALPY
input, and what status (normally
open, normally
LOW.
closed)
Temperature
Compensated
This
factor
the input
is when
the space
humidity
is
The CCN point OCCUPIED
as a ComfortID _ controller:
the unit
is considered
is
used
in
the
equation
of
the
occupied,
when
NO, the unit is considered unoccupied.
forced, proceed to the level 2 priority.
OCCUPIED
Remote
Normally
Occupancy
Switch
should
be
Open or Normally Closed when
the occupancy
field-supplied
three possible
with
(24v, single
configurations
an external
1. (Configuration---_UNIT---_RM.SW
Temperature
switch.
permitted.
3. (Configuration-+UNIT-+RM.SW
Switch
= 2)
This
factor
is
used
in
the
equation
of
the
Temperature
Compensated
Start Time Bias for heating. A setting of 0 minutes
indicates
Temperature
Compensated
Start in Heating
is not
1)
The
Operating
PD unit
must
each type of switch, the appropriate
listed in the table below.
TYPE
to a space
temperature
configuration
of four
set points:
The
Occupied
Occupied
Cool Set Point (Setpoints-+OCSP),
the Unoccupied
Cool Set Point (Setpoints--,UCSP),
Occupied
Heat Set Point
(Setpoints--,OHSP),
or
the
Unoccupied
Heat
Set
Point
(S etpoints-+
UHSP).
Occupancy
When
the building
is in occupied
when
mode, the occupied
set points are
Level
3
minimize unnecessary
cool to heat and heat to cool changes, there
is a 10-minute
delay after the last stage turns off before the control
Schedule
The
heating
and cooling
set points
The
conditioned
temperature
temperature
sensor
senses
the temperature
Closed
(2)
Normal
Closed
(2)
Open and
Occupied
and
Occupied
an Economizer
options are determined
Schedule
Broadcast
by the state of
Number
and
the
Global
(Configuration-+CCN-+BROD-+B.GS).
This is the factory
default.
= 1-64)
Follow
schedule.
Schedules
I to 64 are local
The 48/50PD unit can only store one
local schedule
and therefore
changing
changes the title of the schedule table.
in the
this
number
only
3. (Configuration--,CCN-+SCH.O-+SCH.N
=
65-99)
Follow the global programmed
schedule.
If the 48/50PD
unit is configured
as a Global
Schedule
Broadcaster
(Configuration---,CCN---,ROD---,B.GS
will follow the unit's programmed
the schedule
this schedule
CCN RS-485
+, -, and ground connection.
The T59 space
temperature
sensor is a T56 sensor with an integrated temperature
display.
A jumper wire is not needed between
R and WI when
= YES),
the unit
schedule and broadcast
so that other devices programmed
to follow
number
can receive the schedule.
If the
48/50PD
unit
Broadcaster
is not
programmed
as a Global
(Configuration--,CCN--,BROD--,B.GS
will
receive
broadcasted
schedules
T55, T56, T58 or T59.
occupancy
is affected by a number
of different
the unit is operating with a space temperature
sensor
(T-55, T-56, T-58 or T-59), occupancy
and the operation
of the economizer.
occupancy
are listed below from highest
occupancy
the local programmed
within the controller.
lower at the space temperature
sensor. The T58 space temperature
sensor communicates
with the PD unit control board through a
The building's
factors. When
Normal
Closed
is ignored.
sensor senses the temperature
in the conditioned
space and allows
for adjustment of the space temperature
set point by a configurable
number of degrees F higher or a configurable
number of degrees F
sensors
Open
2. (Configuration-+CCN-+SCH.O-+SCH.N
space with no provisions
for adjusting
the space
set point at the sensor.
The T-56 space temperature
using space temperature
and
Occupied
1. (Configuration---,CCN---,SCH.O---,SCH_
= O) The unit is
always considered
occupied and the programmed
schedule
are also
mode is required.
T55 space
Closed
(Configuration---,CCN---,SCH.O---,SCH_
separated by a Heat-Cool
Set Point Gap (Setpoints-,GAP)
that is
user configurable
from 2 to 10 degrees F. This parameter prevents
the unit from over cooling the conditioned
space to where heating
mode is required or over heating the conditioned
space to where
cooling
are
Priority
The following
Occupancy
modes.
Normal Open (1)
Unoccupied
when
Closed
active. When the building is in unoccupied
mode, the unoccupied
set points are active. The PD control will switch automatically
between cooling and heating to maintain temperature.
However, to
will switch
and states
IMPORTANT:
To perform remote occupancy,
Control Board must be installed in the unit.
Determination
Closed
Open and
Unoccupied
Occupied when
Closed or
Unoccupied when
Open
T59 space temperature
sensor is connected
to the low voltage
terminal board as shown in the Installation
Instructions
Manual, the
PD
unit
will
try
to
maintain
the
Space
Temperature
at one
Open
STATE OF
SWITCH
AND
STATE OF
OCCUPANCY
SWITCH
CONFIGURATION
OF SWITCH
sensor
T-55, T-56, T58 or T59 and will not operate with a conventional
R, YI, Y2, WI, W2, G, C thermostat.
When a T-55, T-56, T58 or
(Temperatures-+AIR.T-+SPT)
is
are
If the switch is configured
to No Switch (0), the switch input value
will be ignored and software will proceed to level 3 priority.
For
Sequence
be connected
Normally
Normally
permitted.
General
switch
= 0) No Switch
=
Start Heating Factor
This
pole, single throw [SPST]).
There
for the remote occupancy
switch:
Compensated
Start Time Bias for cooling. A setting of 0 minutes
indicates
Temperature
Compensated
Start in Cooling
is not
Compensated
to
is not being
configured
to either
the user would like to
2. (Configuration-+UNIT-+RM.SW
Switch
Temperature
is forced
If OCCUPIED
Level 2 Priority
control
Start Cooling Factor
is forced via an external device such
when OCCUPIED
is forced to YES,
programmed
using
the
affects the unit set points
The factors
affecting
to lowest priority.
to broadcast
programmed
= NO), the
from
the
this schedule
number.
schedule,
occupancy
temporarily
switched
from unoccupied
to
pressing the override button for approximately
the T-55,
Override
13
T-56, T-58 or T-59 space
will
only
occur
if SPT
Schedule
While
can be
occupied
3 seconds
temperature
Override
unit
unit
by
on
sensor.
Enabled
(Configuration--+CCN--+SCH.O--+OV.SP)
The length
Timed
of the override
Override
(Con figuration--+CCN--+
Compressor
period
SCH.O--+O
is set
to YES.
is detemfined
Hours
by the
setting
V>EX).
duct static pressure
difference
and indoor
fan RPM.
Make
correction
to static pressure for all options installed in the unit per
the accessory
pressure
drop table.
Deternfine
Indoor Fan Max
Operation
The 48/50 PD units use a Copeland Digital Scroll Compressor
that
can vary the refrigerant capacity between
100 and 15%. This is
accomplished
by a mechanism
in the compressor
that separates the
two scroll spirals which stops the pumping
of the refrigerant gas.
This mechanism
is operated by the differential
pressure between
the suction
and discharge
of the compressor.
The pressure
to
operate the unloading mechanism
is controlled by a small solenoid
situated in a refrigerant line between the top of the compressor
and
the suction line. When the solenoid is energized the compressor is
unloaded.
The solenoid coil is controlled by the Copeland Digital
Scroll
Controller
(DSC)
that operates
(Service Test--+INDP--+ECON)
to 0 (Econonfizer
Damper Closed)
and Indoor Fan Speed Test (Service Tes---,FANS---,F.SPD)
equal to
(Configuration---,UNIT---,FS.MX).
Measure the supply to return
on a 1 to 5V signal
from the
Speed CFM (Configuration---,ECON---,IDF.C)
where the corrected static pressure and RPM
The supply
Maximum
on the fan
table
cross.
fan speed range is configured
by
Speed
(Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_X)
the
Supply
and
Supply Fan Minimum
Speed (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS.MN).
These configuration
values are in units of % speed referenced
Fan
the
to a
2 to 10VDC signal to the VFD AI1 input with 2VDC representing
0% speed and 10VDC representing
100% speed or 0 to 60HZ
VFD frequency output to the motor.
The
Supply
Fan
Minimum
Speed
ComfortLink
Auxiliary
Board (AUXI)
and converts this into a
Pulse Width Modulated
(PWM) signal to the solenoid valve. The
pulse width modulated
signal is an on and off signal that repeats
every 15 seconds with the off time portion
of the 15 seconds
(Configuration---,UNIT---,FS.MN)
can
be
user
configured
between
10 and 70%.
The Supply Fan Minimum
Speed default
value is 70%, this provides the greatest energy efficiency rating for
representing
The
The
the % loading
Compressor
of the compressor.
Capacity
monitored
on the ComfortLink
Compressor
Capacity
value
(Outputs--+COOL--+CAPC)
can
Integral, Derivative
(PID) algorithm that controls the Supply
Temperature
(Temperatures--+AIR.T--+SAT)
to the Supply
Control Point (Run Status--+COOL--+SA.CP).
The
be
Scrolling Marquee Display.
The
is detemfined
by a Proportional,
Compressor
Minimum
Air
Air
Capacity
(Configuration---,COOL---,MIN.C)
is configured at the factory to
70%.
This is the minimum
compressor capacity that gives the
highest SEER rating for a 48 series unit with the highest gas heat
option and no economizer
per AHRI standard 210/240.
Since the
AHRI rating standard does not account for energy savings that can
be realized
extending
temperature
by displacement
ventilation
air distribution
economizer
cooling
operation
at higher
set points,
a complete energy
analysis
system and
supply
air
should be
conducted before changing the Compressor
Minimum
Capacity
(Configuration---,COOL---,MIN.C)
setting to detemfine the energy
savings
at
a
lower
(Configuration--,COOL--,MIN.C)
Indoor
Compressor
setting.
Minimum
Capacity
fan is controlled
by the Indoor
Fan VFD
Power
Relay
control,
On the
Relay
(Outputs---,FANS---,IDF)
is always on so that power is supplied to
the VFD electronic
boards.
This prevents
the formation
of
condensation
on the VFD electronic boards and provides power to
VFD display so that error codes
can be verified.
and VFD configuration
The 48/50PD unit controls require an accurate supply duct CFM at
the unit design point where the indoor fan will run at the Supply
Fan Maxinmm
Speed (Configuration-_UNIT--,FS_X).
Supply Fan Maximum
Speed (Configuration--_UNIT--_FS_X)
is used for operation of the economizer
and power exhaust.
supply
CFM
The
The
duct CFM is configured
by the Indoor Fan Max Speed
(Configuration-_ECON-_IDF.C).
Default
values
for
(Configuration---,UNIT---,FS.MX)
and 100%.
The Supply Fan
(Configuration---_UNIT---_FS_X)
application
requirements,
(Configuration---,ECON---,IDF.C).
deternfine
Fan
(Configuration---,ECON---,IDF.C)
supplied in this book to
Speed
CFM
When
Max
using the fan tables to
Speed
CFM
set Economizer
Position
Test
The
to fine tune the CFM
Supply
Fan Maxinmm
to the
Speed
The indoor
fan may operate during cooling
with compressors
mode, free cooling with outdoor air mode, heating mode, or for
ventilation
with outdoor air mode,
The indoor
fan operation
• Fan On When
• IAQ Analog
can be affected
When
supply
by the following:
Occupied
(Configuration--+UNIT--+OC.FN)
Fan Config
(Configuration--+AIR.Q--+IA.FN)
(Configuration--+AIR.Q--+ILFN)
(Configuration---,UNIT---,FN.SW)
the unit is in occupied
or unoccupied
fan will modulate to maintain the space
cooling mode the
temperature
sensor
set point between
the configured
Supply Fan Maximum
Speed
(Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_X)
and the Supply Fan Minimum
Speed (Configuration--+UNIT--+FS.MN).
When
the
40PD
or 50
PD
unit
heating mode (gas heat or electric
operate
at
the
Supply
(Configuration--_UNIT--_FS_X)
For 48PD
monitored
is in occupied
modifications
of fan delays
functions of the IGC control.
or
other
operation
When the PD unit is in free cooling mode
modulate
to
maintain
The
Occupied
(S etpoints---,
fan will
Speed
due
to safety
the indoor fan will
Cool
Set
Point
the
Unoccupied
Cool
Set
Occupied
Heat
Set
or
the
Unoccupied
Heat
Set
Point
Point
Point
UHSP) .
the PD
unit
is in ventilation
mode
Occupied
(Configuration---,UNIT---,OC.FN)
operate
at
the
Vent
Mode
(Configuration---,UNIT---,FS.VM).
Vent
(Configuration---,UNIT---,FS.VM)
factory
be user configured
between 40 and 100%.
14
or unoccupied
heat mode) the indoor
Fan
Maximum
setting.
gas heating units, the IGC control fan output is also
by the MBB control.
This can result in additional
When
then use the fan tables
Fan
Max
Speed
(Configuration---_UNIT--_FS_X)
RPM
nmst
now
produce
supply CFM that is not lower that the nfinimum CFM allowed in
the product data for heating and cooling,
from an air balance report to configure
CFM (Configuration--+ECON--+IDF.C).
is not available
deternfine
Maximum
can be configured
between 80
Maximum
Speed default value is
not lower than the minimum
CFM allowed in the product data. If
the exact CFM can not be set by the half turn pulley settings then
adjust
the
Supply
Fan
Maximum
Speed
(Setpoints-,OCSP),
(Setpoints---,UCSP),
(Setpoints---,OHSP),
Speed
report
air type duct application.
100%.
Set the indoor fan pulley to the application
design point
CFM for heating and cooling at 100% fan speed so that the CFM is
Indoor Fan Max Speed CFM (Configuration-_ECON-_IDF.C)
are at 400 CFM per ton or 1600 CFM for the 05 size and 2000
CFM for the 06 size. It is preferred to use the supply duct CFM
the Indoor Fan Max
If an air balance
in a mixed
Fan
• Fan Status Switch
(Outputs_FANS_IDF)
on the MBB (main base board)
which then operates
the indoor
fan contactor
(IFC).
48/50PD
units
the
Indoor
Fan
VFD
Power
the remote
parameters
an economizer
Supply
• IAQ Switch Fan Config
Fan Operation
The indoor
a unit without
and
Fan
On
When
the indoor fan will
Fan
Speed
Mode
Fan
Speed
default
is 50%
and can
Outdoor
When
Fan Operation
The 48/50 PD units use a multi-speed
outdoor fan motor to control
the head pressure
within
an acceptable
range at low outdoor
ambient temperatures.
On the 48 and 50 PD-05
and 06 size units
the outdoor
compressor
The outdoor
fan contactor
is powered
on the load side of the
contactor so the outdoor fans will run only when the
compressor
contactor
is
contactor
is not energized
energized.
the outdoor
FAN
LEVEL
When
the outdoor
fan
fan runs at high speed.
FAN
SPEED
CONDITIONS
fan speed
1. Compressor
inputs
Table
6 --
an
TO NEXT
is
Fan Level
installed,
then
Econonfizer
(Outputs-+
from the
parameter
econonfizer
Econo
actuator
Actual
Actuator
econonfizer
Multi-Function
ComfortLink
Installed
is output on
Position
Communication
actuator
used
with
Technology
(MFT)
system to communicate
the
48/50PD
units
is
a
actuator.
This allows the
with the actuator through a
feedback
signal.
The configuration
Econonfizer
Control
Type
(Configuration-+ECON-+E.CTL)
deternfines the conmmnication
method, either digital or analog, used to communicate
between
Economizer
Control Board and the economizer
actuator.
the
The power to the unit must be cycled after the Economizer
Control
Type (Configuration
--+ECON--+E.CTL)
configuration
parameter
is changed.
E.CTL
= 1 or 2 (Digital/Position
When
or Digital/Command)
Econonfizer
Control
(Configuration-+ECON-+E.CTL)
Control
Board will communicate
Control
Board
and actuator
Type
is set to 1, the Econonfizer
with the economizer
actuator
using the digital protocol,
from Econonfizer
Control
J7-1 to actuator pin 5. The commanded
position and
actual position
are communicated
back and forth
actuator and the Economizer
Control Board. When the
first initiate
communication,
Board plug
the actuators
between
the
Economizer
a Control
Angle
Econonfizer
Control
Type
(Operating
Modes'---,
ECON--+C_4NG)
is provided
to the Econonfizer
Control Board
and defines the actuator's range of motion. The control angle must
be
greater
than
the
Min
Actuator
Ctrl
Angle
(Configuration-+ECON-+M_4NG).
During this digital control,
the Economizer
Control
represent
the actuator's
Board
actual
three of fan levels
the three levels and
are deternfined
by
TO TRANSITION
HIGHER LEVEL
TO NEXT
1. Outside Air Temperature Control -- Fan
Lev2 On Temperature 55 F or above (Configuration--,COO L--,O FC--,2.ON > =55F)*
2. Condenser Pressure A Override -- Fan
Levl Max Pressure 450 psig or above (Configuration--,COOL--,OFC--,1
.MXP> = 450 psig)*
Control
of Outdoor
N/A
Fan
The default
to be checked
position
configurations
or manually
have been
configured.\
E.CTL
= 2. Because
when
qualified
over
a wide
the wiring
has a
built-in 500-ohm
resistor, the 4 to 20mA signal is converted to a 2
to 10VDC signal that is accessible via a field connected
ternfinal
board TB-8 and TB-9.
However,
before this signal can be read
E CON-+ E C _4P) .
Economizer
The
back
fan runs
1. Compressor
Contactor is ON
(on initial start up outdoor fan runs at Level 2 for
10 seconds before moving to correct level based
on outside air temperature or Condenser Pressure A)
commanded
(Configuration--_UNIT--_EC.EN)
should be set to YES. The
economizer
is controlled
by the Econo
Commanded
Position
(Outputs-,ECON-,EC.CP)
on the Economizer
Control Board
(ECB). Feed
configuration
by a system
Table 6 shows
The fan levels
CONDITIONS
Contactor is OFF
Operation
econonfizer
the outdoor
to the Main Base Board.
*Configuration
parameters
1.MXE
2.MNE
2.ON and 2.OFF factory
default
configuration
should not be changed.
range of conditions
and are provided
in case a field replacement
of the control
board occurs and the settings
need
If
is controlled
1. Outside Air Temperature Control -- Fan
Lev2 Off Temperature 45 F or below (Configuration--,COOL--,OFC--,2.OFF
< =45F)*
2. Condenser Pressure A Override -- Fan
Lev2 Min Pressure 200 psig or below (Configuration--,COOL--,OFC--,2.MNP<
= 200 psig)*
HIGH
Economizer
is energized
Outdoor Air Temperature
(Temperatures-,AIR.T-,OAT)
but can
be overridden
by Condenser
Pressure
A (Pressures-+SCP,4)
N/A
LOW
fan contactor
set up in the control software.
fan speeds for each level.
TO TRANSITION
LOWER LEVEL
OFF
the outdoor
at low speed.
remotely,
connection
the violet wire that connects
the actuator
to field
ternfinal board TB-J10-8
must be removed or cut.
E.CTL
= 3 (Analog Control)
When E.CTL is set to 3, the Econonfizer
Control
Board
will NOT
conmmnicate
with the economizer
actuator directly with
20mA
analog signal wired to TB-8 and TB-9 along
500-ohm
resistor producing
a 2 to 10VDC signal for the
While in this mode, the actuator's built-in
2 to 10VDC
signal
s accessible
via TB-9
used by the Econonfizer
Free
Cooling
The
econonfizer
will
and TB-10
Control
be
any time because
the 4 to
with the
actuator.
feedback
it is not
Board.
allowed
to help
with
cooling
if the
Outdoor Air Temperature
(Temperatures--,AIR.T--,OAT)
is less
than
the
configured
Econo
Cool
Hi
Temp
Linfit
(Configuration-+ECON-+EH.LO)
and
greater
than
the
configured
Econo
(Configuration-+ECON-+EL.LO).
Cool
If
Lo
an
Temp
enthalpy
installed,
the outdoor temperature
must be below
Hi Temp
Linfit
(Configuration--+ECON--+EHJ_O)
Outdoor
LOW.
Enthalpy
Switch
(Inputs-+GENd-+ENTH)
Unoccupied
Free Cooling
The unoccupied
building
space
free cooling algorithm
attempts
half way between
the Occupied
Linfit
sensor
is
the Econo Cool
and the
must
be
to maintain
the
Cool Set Point
(Setpoints-,OCSP)
and
Occupied
Heat
Set
Point
(Setpoints-,OHSP)
using
only
the econonfizer
when
the
conditions
in the building
and the outdoors are suitable., during
UNoccupied
are suitable.
periods if the air in the building
and the outdoor
Three different configurations
define this algorithm:
1. Unoccupied
(Configuration-+ECON-+
analog 4 to 20 mA output will
position
when
E.CTL
= 1 or
15
Free
UEFC)
air
Cooling
a.(Configuration--,ECON--,UEFC
= O) - Disabled
(Configuration--+ECON--+MP.MX)
unoccupied
Cooling
occupied
setpoints.
space temperature
nmst be higher then the nfid-point
between the occupied cooling and heating set points.
only occur when the time until the next occupied
period
is less than the Free Cool PreOcc
nfinutes.
in
2. Free
Cool
Time (FC.TM)
PreOcc
Time
(C onfiguratio n--_ E CON--_ F C. TM)
FC.TM
is the configuration
that determines
minutes
before
occupancy
set for Preoccupancy
that free cooling
(UEFC
many
can occur when
= 2).
3. l.Free
Cool
Low
(Configuration---,ECON---,FC.LO)
Unoccupied
Temperature
FCJLO.
how
Temp
free cooling cannot occur
(Temperature---,
AIR.T--,
Linfit
if the Outdoor Air
OAT) is less than
exhaust
(Configuration--_ECON--_PE_N)
and 06 size units both power
set
Power
Exhaust
Installed
to YES.
On the 48/50PD-05
exhaust fans are wired together and
are controlled
by the configuration
(Configuration-_ECON-_PE1.C).
Power
When
Exhaust Stagel CFM
the Indoor Fan Max
Speed CFM
(Configuration-_ECON-_IDF.C)
supply
control
CFM (either by fan tables or air balance report)
calculate the outside air CFM based on outside
damper
position
(Outputs-,FANS-,F.SPD)
and
is set to the correct
Commanded
Fan
to turn on the power exhaust
the
air
Speed
when the
calculated
outside air CFM reaches Power Exhaust Stage1 CFM
(Configuration--,ECON--,PE1.C).
The power exhaust will turn
off when the calculated
outside
air CFM falls below Power
Exhaust
Stagel
CFM (Configuration--+ECON--+PE1.C).
Power Exhaust Stage2 CFM (Configuration--+ECON--+PE2.C)
not currently
Indoor
Air
used on the 48/50PD-05
Quality
demand
outdoor
quality
The
is
and 06 units.
(IAQ)
The ComfortLink
TM control
methods
of demand
ventilation
typically measured
using a CO2
displayed
measured
has the capability
for several
control.
Indoor air quality
is
sensor whose measurements
are
in parts per million (ppm).
with
a CO2 sensor for
Outdoor air quality may be
indoor-outdoor
differential
ventilation
control, or with other sensor types for the
air lockout function.
The factory-installed
indoor air
CO2 sensor
is mounted
in the return section.
A
field-installed
indoor air quality CO2 sensor may be mounted in
the return or directly in the occupied
space, per job requirements.
The indoor air quality modes of operation
can be affected by the
IAQ Analog Input Config (Configuration---,
AIR.Q---,
IA.CF),
IAQ Switch Input Config
(Configuration---,
OAQ Analog Input Config (Configuration---,
and other related fan and limit configurations
IAQ (Analog
= 1 (DCV)
When
IA.CF
= 1 the IAQ
AIR.Q---,
AIR.Q---,
as described
IA.CF),
OA.CF)
below.
Input)
The ComfortLink
TM control is configured for indoor
sensors which provide 4 to 20 mA signal for 0 to 2000
algorithm
below
when
the space is
is set for Demand
air quality
ppm CO2.
Control
between
between
the Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) and the Outdoor Air Quality (OAQ).
The lower of these two positions is referred to as the Econo Min
IAQ Position (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+AQ.MN)
while the higher
is referred
to
as the
Econ
Min
at Max
(Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X).
The
Econo
Position
(Configuration--+AIR.Q--+AQ.MN)
should
economizer
contaminates
Fan
Speed
Min
IAQ
be set to an
position
that brings in enough
fresh air to remove
and CO2 generated
by sources other than people.
The
Econ
Min
(Configuration--+ECON---,MP.MX)
at
Max
should
Fan
be
Speed
to
an
set
economizer
position that brings in fresh air to remove contaminates
and CO2 generated
by all sources including
people when the
indoor
fan is operating
at the Supply
Fan Maximum
Speed
(Configuration--+UNIT--+FS.MX).
Speed (Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X)
The ComfortLink
power
duct
will
IA.CF
value for n_axinmm
Exhaust
enable
Mode with Economizer
section
and the indoor fan is on.
Ventilation (DCV).
During DCV, the damper modulates
two user configurations
depending
upon the relationship
c. (Configuration--_ECON--_UEFC
= 2) - Preoccupancy
When UEFC is set to 2, unoccupied
free cooling can
To
Fan
Maximum
Speed
(Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_X)
and the
damper position will vary at other fan speeds as described in the
b. (Configuration--_ECON--_UEFC
= 1) - Unoccupied
When UEFC is set to 1, unoccupied
free cooling can
occur throughout
the entire unoccupied
period. The
Power
when the fan is at Supply
When UEFC = 0, unoccupied
free cooling is disabled.
Cooling will only occur if the space exceeds the
The
Econ Min at Max Fan
value is the design
occupancy.
TM control
will begin
to open the damper
the Econo Min IAQ Position (Configuration---,AIR.Q---,AQd_N)
position when the IAQ level begins to exceed the Outdoor
Quality
referred
(OAQ)
level by a configuraMe
to
as
AQ
Air
amount.
This amount is
Differential
Low
(Configuration--+AIR.Q--+AQD_L).
When
between
IAQ
and
OAQ
(Configuration--+AIR.Q--+AQDJI),
from
the
differential
reaches
AQ
Differential
High
the economizer
position will
be
at
the
Econ
Min
(Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X)
at
when
at
Supply
Fan
(Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_X).
differential
is
between
Maximum
Speed
When
the
IAQ/OAQ
AQ
Differential
Low
(Configuration--+AIR.Q--+A
(Con figuration--+AIR.Q--+A
Max
Fan
Speed
the indoor fan speed is
QD.L)
and AQ Differential
High
QD JI) , the control will modulate the
damper
between
Econ
Min
at
Max
Fan
Speed
and Econo Min IAQ Position
(Configuration--+ECON--+MP.MX)
(Configuration--+AIR.Q--+A
Q.MN) in a linear manner as shown
in Figure 3. At other fan speeds
operate in the shaded area between
curves but at the actual fan speed
Speed (Outputs-,FANS-,F.SPD).
IA.CF
= 2 (Override
the econonfizer
damper will
the two econonfizer
position
as indicated
by Commanded
Fan
IAQ)
When IA.CF = 2, the IAQ algorithm maintains the damper
Min at Max Fan Speed (Configuration--,ECON--,MP.MX)
the indoor
fan speed
is
(Configuration--,UNIT--,FS.MX)
3 when the indoor fan
(Outputs-,FANS-,F.SPD)
at
at Econ
when
Supply
Fan
Maximum
Speed
or in the shaded area of Figure
speed is at the Commanded
Fan Speed
until the override
condition
triggers.
The override
triggers when
than AQ Differential
High
The IAQ Override
Position
the IAQ/OAQ
differential
is greater
(Configuration--+AIR.Q--+AQD.H).
(Configuration--+AIR.Q--+OVRaP).
The economizer
damper will return to the Econ Min at Max Fan
Speed (Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X)
or MP.MX
curve at
other fan speeds when the IAQ/OAQ
differential
is less than the
AQ Differential Low (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+AQD.L).
If the sensor being used has a different range, the ppm display
range must be reconfigured
by entering new values for the IAQ
The override
algorithm
will operate whenever
the building
is
occupied
and the indoor fan is operating
or whenever
the IAQ
algorithm has caused the indoor fan to operate.
The IAQ Analog
Sensor Value at 4mA (Configuration--_AIR.Q--_L4M)
Sensor Value at 20mA (Configuration--_AIR.Q--_L2OM).
Fan Config (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+IA.FN)
determines
or not the IAQ algorithm can turn on the indoor fan.
IA.CF
= 0 (No IAQ)
IA.CF
= 0 signifies
damper
will
operate
that there is no IAQ sensor
at the
Econ
Min
and IAQ
installed.
at Max
Fan
The
Speed
whether
If the indoor fan is not operating,
the economizer
position will be
zero. If the override is not active and the building is unoccupied,
the economizer
16
position
will be zero.
The damper
position
may
exceed Econ Min
at
Max
(Configuration--_ECON--_MP_X)
(Configuration--,AIR.Q--,OVRdP)
Fan
Speed
or IAQ Override
Position
to
provide
econonfizer
Fan
cooling.
IA.CF = 3 (Control Minimum
Position)
When IA.CF = 3, an external 4 to 20 mA source is used to set the
minimum
position.
The 4mA signal
corresponds
to 0% and the 20
mA signal corresponds
to 100%. In this mode, configuration
such
as
Econ
Min
at
Max
Fan
Speed
(Configuration--,ECON--,MP.MX),
Econo
Min IAQ Position
(Configuration--,AIR.Q--,AQ.MN)
position and DCV minimum
used.
If the indoor
nfininmm
3 are not
the econonfizer
position may exceed
econonfizer
cooling.
position
the econonfizer
will be
minimum
Linfit
Enable
(Configuration---,AIR.Q---,OAQ_L)
(Analog
IAQ
is 600
ppm
Sensor)
The DCV
algorithm
will operate
whenever
the building
is
occupied
and the indoor fan is operating
or whenever
the IAQ
algorithm has caused the indoor fan to operate.
The IAQ Analog
Fan
Config
(Configuration---,AIR.Q---,IA.FN)
deternfines
whether or not the IAQ algorithm can turn on the indoor fan. If the
indoor fan is not operating,
The damper position may
the econonfizer
position will be zero.
exceed Econ Min at Max Fan Speed
(Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X)
position curve to provide econonfizer
IA.FN
fan is not operating,
zero. The damper
position to provide
IAQ (Switch
and the econonfizer
position curves in figure
Lockout
CO2.
and corresponding
cooling.
damper
= 0 (Never)
When
IA.FN
IA.FN
=0, the IAQ algorithm
can never turn on the fan.
= 1 (Occupied)
When IA.FN
=1, the IAQ algorithm
will turn on the indoor fan
whenever
the building
is occupied
and IAQ/OAQ
differential
is
Input)
Indoor air quality can also be measured using a switch input. For
the purpose of specifying
the type of switch input, low CO2 levels
are considered
normal.
The IAQ switch input is defined by the
IAQ
Switch
Input
Config
(Configuration-,AIR.Q-,ILCF).
Enthalpy
and IAQ are controlled
by the same switch input and
greater
than
the
Fan
(Configuration---,AIR.Q---,DF.ON).
when the IAQ/OAQ
differential
Differential
On
AQ
Differential
The indoor fan will turn off
is less than the Fan Off AQ
(Configuration---,AIR.Q---,DF.OF).
II.CF = 0 (NO IAQ)
IA.FN = 2 (Always)
The indoor fan operation
for IA.FN
=2, is the same as the
operation
when IA.FN
=1, except the algorithm is not linfited to
The II.CF = 0, configuration
signifies that there is no IAQ switch
input. The damper will operate at the Econ Min at Max Fan Speed
the occupied periods only. The fan can be triggered
space is occupied or unoccupied.
(Configuration_ECON_MP.MX)
position
curve based on indoor
Fan
therefore
occupied
II.CF
cannot
be used simultaneously.
and the indoor
fan
and corresponding
speed when the
damper
space is
fan is on.
= 1 (DCV Normally
Open)
fan
is
operating
at
(Configuration-*UNIT-*FS.MX).
Supply
economizer
minimum
position
(Configuration--*ECON--*MP_X)
operating
at
Supply
(Configuration--_
position
Fan
If
is Econo Min
when the indoor
Maximum
Speed
IAQ
is high,
the
is Econ Min at Max Fan Speed
when
the indoor
fan is
Fan
Maximum
Speed
UNIT--_FS_X).
II.CF = 3 (Override
Normally
Open)
positioning
of the
economizer
damper
for ventilation
purposes.
The override
is
active when IAQ is high and inactive when IAQ is low.
The
override
position
is configured
by the IAQ Override
Position
Outdoor
Air Quality
VR dP).
(Analog
range
nmst be reconfigured
OAQ
Sensor
(Configuration--,AIR.Q--,O.4M)
and
20mA (Configuration--,AIR.Q--,O.2OM).
OA.CF
by entering new values
Value
at
4mA
OAQ
Sensor
Value
at
that there
II.FN
When
= 0 (Never)
II.FN =0, the IAQ algorithm
II.FN
When
= 1 (Occupied)
II.FN
=1, the IAQ
II.FN = 2 (Always)
The indoor fan operation
is no outdoor
sensor
OA.CF = 2 (OAQ Lockout)
The outdoor air quality analog
analog
input
air sensor
installed.
The
input is the value of OAQ.
is only used
to lock out the
outdoor ventilation.
The econonfizer
commanded
position is set to
0% when
the CO2
ppm
exceeds
the OAQ
lockout
value
configured
for
the
(Configuration---,AIR.Q---,AQJL).
and corresponding
cooling.
can never turn on the fan.
algorithm
OAQ
The
Lockout
default value
Limit
for OAQ
for II.FN
damper
will
turn on the indoor
fan
The indoor
=2, is the same as the operation
when IA.FN
=1, except
the algorithm
is not linfited
to the
occupied periods only. The fan can be triggered on when the space
is occupied or unoccupied.
Modes
Cooling
T56,
Mode
T58
In cooling
Using
Space
Temperature
Sensor
T55,
or T59
mode
the PD control
will maintain
the Occupied
Cool
Set Point (Setpoint--_OCSP)
or the Unoccupied
Cool Set Point
(Setpoints---,UCSP)
by modulating
the indoor fan speed to supply
more or less airflow to the conditioned
space at the Supply Air
Cooling
default value of OAQ is 400 ppm CO2.
OA.CF = 1 (DCV)
The outdoor air quality
(Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X)
position curve to provide econonfizer
Temperature
= 0 (NO OAQ)
This signifies
Input)
or not the IAQ algorithm can turn on the indoor fan. If the indoor
fan is not operating,
the econonfizer
position will be zero.
The
damper
position
may exceed
Econ Min at Max Fan Speed
Cooling
Input)
The ComfortLink
TM control is configured
for outdoor air quality
sensors which provide a 4 to 20 mA signal corresponding
to 0 to
2000 ppm CO2. If a field supplied sensor has a different range, the
ppm display
for
the
Switch
whenever
the building
is occupied
and IAQ is high.
fan will turn off when the IAQ returns to normal.
II.CF = 4 (Override
Normally
Closed)
The damper override function permits absolute
(Con figuration---,AIR.Q---,O
(Analog
The DCV
algorithm
will operate
whenever
the building
is
occupied
and the indoor fan is operating
or whenever
the IAQ
algorithm has caused the indoor fan to operate.
The IAQ Switch
Fan Config (Configuration---,AIR.Q---,II.FN)
deternfines whether
II.CF = 2 (DCV Normally
Closed)
The Demand
Control Ventilation
(DCV) allows the econonfizer
minimum position to be decreased when there is no IAQ problem.
If IAQ is low, the econonfizer
minimum
IAQ Position (Configuration--_AIR.Q--_AQ_N)
Enable
on when the
The
Cool
configured
maintain
(Temperatures---,AIR.T---,SAT).
Supply
Air Set Point
Supply
between
a
Air
45F
Set
(Temperatures--+AIR.T--+SAT)at
(S etpoint---, SA SP) .
Cooling
Speed
Demand
Point
and 75F.
Supply
(Setpoint---,SASP)can
The compressor
Air
the Cool
Supply
be
modulates
to
Temperature
Air
Set Point
Window
When the temperature
in the conditioned
space is higher than the
Occupied Cool Set Point (Setpoints---,OCSP)
plus the Fan Speed
Control
17
Demand
(Configuration---,COOL?FS.CD)
configuration
variable
orUnoccupied
CoolSetPoint(Setpoints--->UCSP)
the
Fan
Speed
(Configuration--->COOL--->FS.CD)
Control
configuration
plus
Demand
variable
the
indoor
fan will run at 100%.
When the temperature
in the
conditioned
space is between
the Occupied
Cool Set Point
(Setpoints--->OCSP)
and
Occupied
Cool
Set
Point
(Setpoints--->OCSP)
plus
the
(Configuration--->COOL--->FS.CD)
indoor fan modulates
(Setpoints-,OCSP)
(Setpoints-,UCSP).
space
falls to
(Setpoints-,OCSP)
Speed
Control
Demand
configuration
variable
the
to satisfy the Occupied
Cool Set
or
Unoccupied
Cool
Set
Point
Point
When the temperature
in the conditioned
below
the Occupied
Cool
Set Point
or
Unoccupied
Cool
Set
Point
0.5F
(Setpoints-,UCSP)
ventilation mode.
Fan
for 5 nfinutes the controls
See ventilation mode sequence
will run unit
of operation
in
can
be
set
to
-10
and
the
(Setpoint--,SASP)
In normal
Maxinmm
Reset
Up
configuration
variable
of Cool Supply Air Set Point
reset of +0 and -10 F.
operation
when
the
Space
Temperature
is within
the
speed demand window the unit control will modulate the indoor
fan speed and supply air temperature
along a defined curve to bring
the Space Temperature
to Occupied or Unoccupied
Cool Set Point.
Since this curve is independent
of the conditioned
space load the
control scheme will adapt to any load present in the conditioned
space
move
by adjusting the fan speed and supply air temperature
and
the space temperature
along the defined time temperature
curve
to Occupied
When
the space
or Unoccupied
temperature
the speed
Maximum
configured
Cool Set Point.
rises
Point
(Setpoints-,OCSP)
+
(Configuration--->COOL--->FS.CD)
Tern )e ra_ure
SASP
(Configuration--_COOL--_SAT--_SA_U)
can be set to 0 giving the range
above
the Occupied
Cool
Set
Fan
Speed
Control
Demand
for over 2 nfinutes or is outside
demand window and there is some amount of SASP
Reset Down (Configuration--->COOL?SAT--->SA.MD)
the indoor fan will be locked at 100% and the unit
controls will subtract a calculated
amount of temperature
reset to
the Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--->SASP).
The indoor fan
ocsp
+ FSCD
X
C_oling
_peed
D el_
Window
- ]nit
Space Temperature a on 9,_
(OO SP)
Supply
OCSP
ocsP
Fan
._pe
ed
M o_utate_
to 1'_ OVe
e_ned Curce o the O_cup ed Cool eet Polnt
"I"-,,
_
--
m
,
- 05 F
• Time
C09143
Fig. 6 - Cooling
Cooling
Supply
Speed
Air Set Point
Demand
Window
The
Air
will
continue
to
cunmlatively
reset
Set
for reset of the Cool
This is needed for
applications
where
a high
Cool
Supply
Air
Set Point
(Setpoint--,SASP)
is required
or where dramatic
load changes
occur over short time periods.
In these situations a high supply air
Point
(Setpoint--->SASP)
+ SASP
(Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SAJ_D).
Set Point (Setpoints---,OCSP)
or the Unoccupied
(Setpoints---,UCSP)
over a reasonable time period.
or econonfizer
conditioned
space controls
Status--->COOL--->SA.CP).
Maxinmm
When
Reset
Down
the reset is no
Point (Setpoint--->SASP).
The indoor fan will then modulate lower
than 100% to move the Space Temperature
(Temperatures--->SPT)
along
Point
operation
Cool
the defined time temperature
curve to Cool Supply Air Set
(Setpoint--->SASP)
or Unoccupied
Cool
Set
Point
(Setpoints--->UCSP).
may not provide enough cooling to reduce the Space
(Temperatures--->AIR.T--->SPT)
to the Occupied Cool
The compressor
subtract
a calculated
amount
of temperature
to a value equal to the Supply Air Temperature
longer needed the control will remove Down Reset until all reset is
removed
and
the
Supply
Air
Control
Point
(Run
Status--->COOL--->SA.CP)
is back to the original Supply Air Set
Reset
The PD unit can be configured
to allow
Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--,SASP).
temperature
Temperature
speed will be locked at 100% as long as reset is applied.
Supply Air Temperature
will now adjust to this new Supply
Control Point (Run Status--->COOL--->SA.CP).
The controls
Supply
Set Point
See Fig. 6 and 7.
Air Temperature
iiiiiiiiii!iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii!iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii_
b,iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
iiiiiiiiiii!iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii!iiii!
iii!iiiiiii iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
supplying
cooling
to the Supply Air Control
The Supply Air Control
to the
Point
Point
(Run
(Run
SAS
Status--->COOL--->SA.CP)
which is a calculated
value that is equal
to the Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--->SASP)
plus the
calculated
amount
of reset required
up to the values
set by
configuration
variables
SASP
Maxinmm
Reset
Down
(Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SA.MD)
and SASP Maximum
Time
C09144
Reset Up (Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SAJ_U).
Reset
of
linfited
Down
Maximum
The
the
Cool
Supply
Air
Set
Point
(Setpoint--->SASP)
by the configuration
variables
SASP
(Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SA.MD)
Reset Up
SASP
Maxinmm
and
is
Reset
SASP
(Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SAJ_U).
Maximum
Reset
Down
(Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SA.MD)
configuration
variable
can be set from -20 to 0 F and will allow the Cool Supply Air Set
Point (Setpoint--->SASP)
to be reset to as nmch as 20 F below the
Cool Supply
Air
Maximum
Reset
Set
Up
Point (Setpoint--->SASP).
The SASP
(Configuration--->COOL?SAT--->SAJ_U)
configuration
variable can be set from 0 to 20 F and will allow the
Supply Air Temperature
to be Reset to as nmch as 20 F above the
Cool Supply
Air Set Point (Setpoint--->SASP).
The SASP
Maximum
and
Reset Down
SASP
(Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SAJ_D)
Maximum
Reset
Up
(Configuration--_COOL--_SAT--_SA_U)
configuration
variables
can be set independently
and do not need to be equal values above
Fig. 7 - Cool
Supply
Cooling Mode with Economizer
Temperature
Sensor T55, T56,
If
an
economizer
is
installed,
configuration
(Configuration--_ECON--_
YES.
The econonfizer
is controlled
Air Set Point
Using Space
T58
the
or T59
Economizer
Installed
EC.EN) should be set to
by the Econo Commanded
Position (Outputs'--,ECON--,
EC.CP) on the Econonfizer
Control
Board.
If the indoor fan is off or the building is unoccupied,
the
econonfizer
position is zero.
When
the space temperature
is above
the Occupied
Cool
Set Point
(Setpoints-,OCSP)
and the econonfizer
is installed,
configured
and working
correctly the unit controls will always try to meet
space cooling demand using the econonfizer
before turning on the
compressor.
The econonfizer
will provide
following
outside air conditions
are true.
and below the Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--,SASP).
For
example,
the
SASP
Maximum
Reset
Down
(Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->
?SA J_D) configuration
variable
18
free cooling
when
the
Forall
units with Economizers:
pressure
1. 1.The outdoor
temperature is below the Econo Cool Hi
Temp Limit (Configuration--_ECON--_EH_LO)
and above
the
Econo
Cool
Lo
Temp
Linfit
(C onfiguration--+
readings
to deternfine
the actual
Indoor
Fan Max
Speed
CFM (Configuration--+ECON--+IDF.C).
Economizer
Position
%
E CON--+ EL_LO) .
MAX P
For units
with Enthalpy
2. 1.The outdoor
is
below
Control
enthalpy is low and the outdoor temperature
the
Econo
Cool
Hi
Temp
Limit
(Configuration--+ECON--+EH.LO)
and above the Econo
Cool Lo Temp Limit (Configuration--+ECON--+EL.LO).
If the conditions
cooling
above are true and the economizer
the economizer
outside
air and return
is available
air dampers
for
will
modulate to allow proportions
of outside air and return air to mix
and produce a temperature
equal to the Cool Supply Air Set Point
(Setpoint--+SASP).
If reset is applied
to the Supply
Air
4PMX
;v
AQ/dl'j
Temperature
Set Point (Setpoint--+SASP)
the dampers will control
to the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status--+COOL--+SA.CP).
20 25
50
I_
100
75
for DqYsj
Fan Speed
%
Minimum Configurable
Fan Speed is 20%
If the conditions above are true but the economizer
dampers are not
able to satisfy the Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--+SASP)
with Reset (if applied), the compressor will turn on and modulate
to provide
additional cooling to satisfy the Cool Supply Air Set
Point (Setpoint--+SASP)
If the conditions
with Reset if applied.
ECON
above are not true, the economizer
user
Configurable
Econ
Min
at
Max
Fan
Speed
(Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X)
where
the
nfinimum
economizer damper position is based on the Supply Fan Maximum
MIN
AT MAX
will move to a
FANSPEED
POSITION
(MmNPMAX)
Speed
(Configuration--+UNIT--+FS.MX).
This
is done to
maintain a constant airflow through the economizer
by opening the
dampers
dampers
more as the indoor fan speed is reduced
more as the indoor fan speed increases.
or closing
the
MINIMUM
The shape of the Economizer
Minimum
Position vs. Fan Speed
curve is determined
by the configuration
parameters:
Econ Min at
25% Fan speed (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.25),
Econ Min at
50% Fan speed
75% Fan speed
at Max Fan speed
The
Econ
(Configuration--+ECON--+MP.50),
(Configuration--+ECON--+MP.75)
IAQ
DAMPER
POSITION
(AO. MN)
Econ Min at
and Econ Min
(Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X).
Min
at
25%
Fan
100
speed
(Configuration--+ECON--+MP.25),
Econ Min at 50% Fan speed
(Configuration--+ECON--+MP.50)
and Econ Min at 75% Fan
speed (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.75)
damper
positions
are
calculated
based
on the
(Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X)
Econ
Min
and
/
at Max
Fan
Speed
Supply
Fan Maximum
Econ
Min
at
25%
Econ Min
and Econ
Fan
economizer
programmed
at
Max
Fan
Speed
Outside air CFM through the
outside
air dampers.
into the PD controls
economizer
at 400 CFM/TON
Supply
in H20 pressure in the return duct.
The
default
is based
on
calculations
a side shot
Air flow with negative
0.25
Econ Min at Max fan Speed (Configuration--+UNIT--+FS.MN)
is
set by user based on minimum
required
outside air ventilation
CFM required for the application.
This procedure would be the
same as if this were a CV unit with the unit running at the design
point CFM.
This determines
the minimum
position amount of
outside
speed.
air CFM
required
when
Configure
the
Indoor
(Configuration--+ECON--+IDF.C)
AQ
DIFFERENTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL
LOW (AQD.L)
HIGH (AQD.H)
the fan is running
Fan
either
Max
to
the
Minimum
Position
speed
at 50% Fan speed
Min at 75% Fan
speed (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.75)
damper position are user
configurable
and can be determined
by setting the fan speed at 25,
50 and 75% and determining
the damper
position required
to
maintain
the
Econ
Min
(Configuration--+ECON--+MP.MX)
DIFFERENTIAL
AQ
Fig. 8 - Economizer
(Configuration--+ECON--+MP.25),
(Configuration--+ECON--+MP.50)
INSIDE/OUTSIDE CO2
C09145
Speed (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_X).
The
700
If the indoor fan is not operating, the econonfizer will be fully
closed, 0% open.
Ventilation Mode
If the space temperature falls 0.5F below the Occupied Cool Set
Point (Setpoints-+OCSP) the compressor will turn off, the indoor
fan speed will be set to the Vent Mode Fan Speed
(Configuration-+UNIT-+FS.VM)
and the econonfizer will open
to the position that will supply nfinimum ventilation air at the
configured
Vent
Mode
Fan
Speed
(Configuration-+UNIT-+FS.VM).
Default Vent Mode Fan Speed
(Configuration-+UNIT-+FS.VM)
is 50%. Configuring the Vent
Mode Fan Speed (Configuration-+UNIT-+FS.VM)
lower will
provide additional energy savings in vent mode but may not
supply the required ventilation air to the conditioned space at lower
fan speeds.
Demand Control Ventilation
at maximum
Speed
supply
CFM
CFM
deternfined from the fan performance
tables or air balance reports.
If using fan performance
tables make corrections
for all installed
accessory pressure loss and use measured RPM, power and static
The 48PD units can also be equipped with optional CO2 sensors
for additional indoor air quality control. When unit is equipped
with a return duct CO2 sensor or return duct CO2 sensor and
outside air CO2 sensor the Econonfizer nfinimum position vs. fan
speed curve will be recalculated based on the CO2 level of the
return and/or outside air as shown in Fig. 8. See the Indoor Air
19
Quality (IAQ) section of the Econonfizer Operation section above
for more details on Demand Control Ventilation (DCV).
Economizer Operation for Units Equipped with Return Air
COy Sensor Only
When the CO 2 sensor
detects a CO 2 level or IAQ Level
(Inputs--+AIR.O--+IAO)
below
the AQ Differential
Low
(Configuration--,AIR.O--,AOD.L)
value the MP.25, MP.50,
MP.75 and MP.MX points will be recalculated to new values for
MP.25, MP.50, MP.75 based on the Econ Min IAQ Position
(Configuration--,AIR.O--,AO.MN).
The econonfizer outside air
damper will close and reduce the amount of outside air CFM to the
conditioned space based on the lower IAQ sensor readings and
indoor fan speed.
The econonfizer outside air damper will
continue to close and reduce the amount of outside air CFM to the
conditioned space until the damper reaches user configurable Econ
Min IAQ Position (Configuration--,AIR.Q--,AQ_N).
This will
happen
when
the
Commanded
Fan
Speed
(Outputs-+FANS-+F.SPD)
is at the Supply Fan Maxinmm Speed
(Configuration--,UNIT--,FS_X).
When the Commanded Fan
Speed (Outputs-+FANS-+F.SPD)
is between
Supply Fan
Maximum Speed (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_X)
and the
Supply Fan Minimum Speed (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_N)
the damper will operate in the shaded area of Figure 8 based on the
IAQ Level (Inputs-+AIR.Q-+IAQ).
Economizer Operation for Units Equipped
COy Sensor and outside air COy Sensor
with Return Air
The Econonfizer will operate sinfilar to Econonfizer Operation for
Units Equipped with Return Air CO2 Sensor Only but the IAQ
Level (Inputs-+AIR.Q-+IAQ)
will be deternfined by actual
outside air CO2 measurements instead of the 400 ppm CO2 default
value for OAQ.
Cooling Mode Using Space Temperature
Sensor T55,
T56, T58 or T59 and Humidistat
(HL38MG029
or
TSTATCCPLH01-B)
Enhanced dehunfidifying will be provided when a hunfidistat
(HL38MG029 or TSTATCCPLH01-B) is connected the PD unit
ternfinal strip across the R and W2 ternfinals (since the PD unit
does not support the use of conventional thermostat inputs the W2
ternfinal is reconfigured for hunfidity input) and Space Hunfidity
Switch (Configuration--,UNIT--,RH.SW)
configuration variable
is set to 1 (Normally Open-no call to dehunfidify).
Relative
hunfidity set point is set by adjusting the dial on the HL38MG029
or TSTATCCPLH01-B
device.
When the hunfidistat contacts
close and provide 24VAC to the W2 ternfinal the PD unit will reset
the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status---,COOL---,SA.CP) by
one degree F lower than the Supply
Air Set Point
(Setpoint-+SASP)
or the current control point if the Supply Air
Set Point (Setpoint-+SASP)
has already been modified. After 5
minutes if the humidistat contacts are still closed and 24 VAC is
being supplied to the W2 ternfinal the PD unit will reset the Supply
Air Control Point (Run Status--+COOL--+SA.CP) lower by one
more degree F. This reset cycle will continue to lower the supply
air temperature every 5 nfinutes until the Supply Air Control Point
(Run Status-+COOL-+SA.CP)
is equal to the Supply Air Set
Point (Setpoint--+SASP)
+ SASP Maximum
Reset Down
(Configuration--+COOL-+SAT-+SA.MD).
The unit will continue
to operate at this reduced supply air temperature control point until
the hunfidistat contacts open and 24VAC is no longer supplied to
the W2 ternfinal. When 24VAC is no longer supplied to the W2
ternfinal the supply air control point will be reset higher by one
degree F. After 3 nfinutes if the hunfidistat contacts are still open
and 24VAC is not being supplied to the W2 ternfinal PD unit will
reset the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status---,COOL---,SA.CP)
higher by one more degree F. This reset cycle will continue to
raise the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status---,COOL---,SA.CP)
every 3 nfinutes until the Supply Air Control Point (Run
Status--,COOL--,SA.CP)
is equal to the Supply Air Set Point
(Setpoint-+SASP) or the supply air control point if reset was being
that reset the Supply
Air Set
Point (Setpoint-+SASP).
Whenever
Relative Hunfidity
applied the space temperature
is controlled
by modulating
applied
due to cooling
Reset is
the fan
speed
reset.
requirements
even if the fan was locked
at 100% due to (Setpoint-+SASP)
Cooling Mode Using Space Temperature Sensor T55,
T56, or T58 and Humidity Sensor (HL39ZZ007 or
33ZCSENRH-01)
Enhanced
dehumidifying
will be provided
when a humidly
sensor
(HL39ZZ007
or 33ZCSENRH-01)
4 to 20 ma control
is
connected the PD unit terminal strip across the TB1-J10
pin 3 and
4, power to hunfidity sensor is connected
to R and C, the RH
Sensor on OAQ Input (Configuration--,UNIT--,RH.S)
is set to
YES
and
Space
(Configuration--,UNIT--,RH.SW)
Hunfidity
configuration
variable
Switch
is set to
0. Relative
hunfidity set point is set by changing
the value of
Space RH Set point
(Setpoint--,RH.SP).
When
the relative
hunfidity
in the space is above the Space
RH Set point
(Setpoint--,RH.SP)
the PD unit controls will reset the supply air
temperature
by one degree F lower than the Supply Air Set Point
(Setpoint--,SASP)
or the current control
Set Point (Setpoint--,SASP)
has already
point if the Supply Air
been modified.
After 5
nfinutes the PD unit will reset the Supply Air Control Point (Run
Status-+COOL-+SA.CP)
lower by one more degree F. This reset
cycle will continue to lower the Supply Air Control Point (Run
Status-+COOL-+SA.CP)
Control
Point
(Run
Supply
Down
relative
every 5 nfinutes
Status-+COOL-+SA.CP)
until
the Supply Air
is equal to the
Air Set Point (Setpoint--+SASP)
+ SASP Maximum
Reset
(Configuration--+COOL--+
SAT-+SA.MD).
When the
hunfidity in the space goes below the Space RH Set Point
(Setpoint-+RH.SP)
(Setpoint--_RH.DB)
the
the
Space
supply air control
RH
Deadband
point will be reset
higher by one degree F. After 3 nfinutes if the hunfidity sensor
reading is still below the Space RH Set Point (Setpoint-+RH.SP)
the Space RH Deadband
reset
the
Supply
Status--+COOL--+SA.CP)
(Setpoint--+RHJ)B),
the PD unit will
Air
Control
Point
(Run
higher by one more degree F. This reset
cycle will continue to raise the Supply Air Control Point
(Run
Status--+COOL--+SA.CP)
every 3 nfinutes until the supply air
temperature
control point is equal to the Supply Air Set Point
(Setpoint--_SASP)
or the supply air control point if reset was being
applied due to cooling requirements
that reset the Supply Air Set
Point
(Setpoint-+SASP).
Heating
Gas
Modes
Heating
T55, T56,
Mode
or T58
Using
Space
For
gas
units,
the
(Configuration---,HEAT---,HT.TY)
1.
Heat will not operate
value
configured
if the outdoor temperature
is greater than the
for
the
Heating
Lockout
Temperature
Heat
Mininmm
and Heat Minimum
(Configuration--+HEAT--,MOT.H).
stages of heating.
Factory defaults
OFF.
The
of 1 nfinute
On Time
Off Time
Timeguards
apply to both
values are 2 nfinute s ON and 2
Integrated
Gas Controller
(IGC) minimum
will be followed even if Heat Minimum
On
Time (Configuration---,HEAT---,MRTJt)
Service Test.
If the indoor
Sensor
Type
of
Heat
Installed
will be factory set to a value of
(Configuration---,HEAT---,HT_LO),
(Configuration---,HEAT---,MRTJt)
nfinutes
on-time
Temperature
(48PD Units Only)
fan control
is
is configured
lower
to cycle
and
during
with the heating
demand by setting Fan ON When
Time (Configuration--,UNIT--,OC.FN)
Occupied Heat Minimum
On
to NO, the fan will stop
after
a delay
configured
(Configuration-+HEAT-+FOD.G).
Fan-off
The
Fan-off
seconds.
nfinutes
2O
by
Delay,
factory
Gas
default
Heat
for
Delay, Gas Heat (Configuration--+HEAT--+FOD.G)
is 45
If the IGC temperature
limit switch opens within 10
of the end of the gas heat cycle, the next fan off delay will
beextended
by 15seconds.
Then_axinmm
delayis 3
Once modified by the IGC,
to
the
configured
minutes.
the fan off delay will not change
Fan-off
Delay,
Gas
(Configuration--,HEAT--,FOD.G)
control.
unless
power
is reset
back
Heat
to the
A light emitting diode (LED) is provided on the IGC to indicate
status. During normal operation the LED is continuously
on. See
the Troubleshooting
section if the LED is off or flashing.
The IGC
is located behind the gas section access panel door. See Figure 8 or
9 for location.
The 48/50PD
unit
cooling and heating
unnecessary
(Operating
cooling
The unit
control
will switch
automatically
between
to maintain space temperature.
To nfininfize
changes there is a 10 nfinute Mode Select Timeguard
Modes'--,HEAT--,MS.TG)
after the last stage
of
turns off and before
the heating
tries to maintain
the space
is allowed.
temperature
at the Occupied
Heat Setpoint (Setpoint--,OHSP)
or the Unoccupied
Heat Setpoint
(Setpoint--,UHSP).
See the Occupancy
Deternfination
section for
factors
that
affect
the
Currently
Status--,VIEW--,OCC)
parameter.
Heating
Modes'--,HEAT--,SPT--,DMDJt)
is equal
unoccupied
set point nfinus
Modes'--,HEAT--,SPT--,SPT)
Occupied
(Run
Demand (Operating
to the occupied
or
the Space Temperature
(Operating
[DMDJt
= Setpoint - SPT].
Two methods
are used to add and remove stages of heating for
48PD units. The first method causes the unit to operate around its
steady state number of stages. For example, if the correct number
of stages is between 0 and 1, this method will cause the first stage
to cycle. If the correct number of stages is between 1 and 2, this
method will cause the second stage to cycle.
causes the unit to find the steady-state
number
these methods
The control
are provided
The second method
of stages. Details of
below.
uses two methods
to add a stage of heating.
The first
method will add a stage of heating when the Heating Demand
(Operating
Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,DMDdt)
plus the change in
Spacetemp
Trend
(Operating
Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,TRND)
times
the
Heat
Thermal
Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,H.LAG)
Demand
[DMD.H
Lag
Factor
(Operating
is greater than the SPT Heat
method will add a stage of heating
Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,DMDdt)
SPT
Heat
Demand
Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,HT.PD)
(+)
plus 0.5
HT.PD
+ 0.5] and the heat demand
than 0.3 degrees F per nfinute.
The control
uses two methods
when Heat Demand
is greater that the
Level
degrees
is changing
to remove
(Operating
F [DMD.H
>
at a rate greater
a stage of heating.
first method will remove a stage of heating when
Demand
(Operating
Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,DMDdt)
change
in
Spacetemp
Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,TRND)
Trend
the Heat
times
The
the Heating
plus the
(Operating
Thermal
Lag
Factor (Operating
Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,H.LAG)
is less than
the
SPT
Heat
Demand
(-)
Level
(Operating
Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,HT_D)
[DMDdt
+ change
TRND
*
H_LAG
The
< HT_D].
second
Demand
method
(Operating
will
remove
a stage
of heating
Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,DMDdt)
when
Heat
is less that
the
SPT
Heat
Demand
(-)
Level
(Operating
Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,HT.ND)
nfinus 0.5 degrees F [DMDdt
<
HT.PD
- 0.5] and the heat demand is changing
at a rate greater
than 0.3 degrees
F per nfinute.
Temperature
Sensor
(SAT)
Mode
Sensing
affects the Supply Air
value displayed.
This
configuration
is accessible via the Scrolling Marquee
Heat Mode Sensing (Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SATJt).
When
the
SAT
(Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SATJt)
Heat
on the SAT
Mode
Sensing
=DSBL, the Supply Air
Temperature
(Temperatures---,AIR.T---,SAT)
value
on
the
Scrolling Marquee and the CCN tables will be forced to zero when
heat outputs come ON and for 5 nfinutes after.
Air Temperature
(Temperatures---,AIR.T---,SAT)
fan inlet, upstream of the heat section.
When
the
SAT
Heat
(Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SATdt)
Temperature
displayed
at
heating
mode.
downstream
temperature
The default Supply
location is at the
Mode
Sensing
=ENBL, the Supply Air
(Temperatures---,AIR.T---,SAT)
sensor
reading
is
the Scrolling Marquee
and the CCN tables during
This setting
should
sensor wires are removed
replaced by an accessory
only be used if the original
SAT
from the Main Base Board (MBB) and
SAT sensor located in the supply duct
of the heat section.
There are then two supply air
limits that become active, the Maximum
SAT Lower
Level
(Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAM_L)
the Maximum
SAT
Upper
Level
(Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAM.U).
Any time the supply air temperature
rises above the Maximum
SAT Lower
heat staging
additional
below
Level (Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAM_L)
will be linfited to what is currently
on
stages can be added until the supply
the
Maximum
SAT
(Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAM.L).
temperature
rises
above
the Maximum
(Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAM.U),
reduced
again
by removing
until
a heat stage.
That
the
Supply
and
the
no
air temperature
falls
Lower
Level
If the supply
air
SAT
Upper
Level
then heating
will be
stage can not be added
Air
Temperature
(Temperatures---,AIR.T---,SAT)
falls below
the Maximum
SAT
Lower
Level (Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAM_L).
If the
supply
air temperature
stays above the Maximum
SAT Upper
Level
stage
(+) Level (Operating
Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,HTaUD)
+ change TRND * H.LAG
> HT.PD].
The second
(Operating
Supply-Air
The
SAT
Heat
(Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SATJt)
Temperature
(Temperatures'--,AIR.T--,SAT)
(Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SAM.U),
will be removed
after the Heat
Stage
then
another
Decrease
Time
(Configuration---,HEAT---,H_DEC).
In heating
mode
the PD control
will maintain
the Occupied
Heat
Set Point (Setpoint--_OHSP)
or the Unoccupied
Heat Set Point
(Setpoint---,UHSP)
by turning on or off the Stage I and Stage 2
Gas
Heat
at
the
Supply
(Configuration---,
UNIT---,FS_N).
When
below
Fan
Minimum
Speed
the space temperature
sensor detects the space temperature
the Occupied
Heat
Set Point
(Setpoint---,OHSP)
or
Unoccupied
Heat Set Point (Setpoint---,UHSP)
and power is sent
to the Integrated
Gas Unit Controller
(IGC) board.
The heat
staging is deternfined
as described
above and the Integrated
Gas
Controller
(IGC)
initiates
the gas heat module
start-up.
Gas Heat Start-Up
An LED (light-enfitting
diode) on the IGC board will be on during
normal operation. A check is made to ensure that the rollout switch
and linfit switch are closed and the induced-draft
motor is running.
The induced-draft
motor is then energized,
and when speed is
proven
with the Hall Effect sensor on the motor, the ignition
activation period begins. The burners will ignite within 5 seconds.
If the burners
do not light, there is a 22-second
delay before
another 5-second
attempt. If the burners still do not light, this
Configurable
delays also apply when adding stages per Heat Stage
Increase
Time (Configuration---,HEAT---,HdNC)
or removing
sequence
elapsed,
stages
per
Heat
(Configuration---,HEAT---,H_DEC).
When ignition occurs the IGC board will continue to monitor the
condition
of the rollout and linfit switches, the Hall Effect sensor,
as well as the flame sensor. If for some reason the over temperature
(Configuration---,HEAT---,MRTdt)
(Configuration---,HEAT---,MOTdt)
Stage
Heat
Decrease
Mininmm
and Heat Minimum
also apply.
On
Time
Time
Off Time
is repeated for 15 nfinutes. After the 15 nfinutes have
if the burners still have not lit, heating is locked out.
linfit opens prior to the start of the indoor fan blower, on the next
attempt, the 45-second
delay will be shortened
to 5 seconds less
than the time from initiation
21
of heat to when
the linfit tripped.
Gas
willnotbeinterrupted
totheburners
andheating
willcontinue.
Oncemodified,
thefanondelaywill notchange
backto 45
seconds
unless
power
isreset
tothecontrol.
When
theindoor
fan
turns
onafter
the40or45second
delay
theindoor
fanwillrunat
100%
fanspeed.
Supply-Air
Temperature
Sensor
(SAT)
The
SAT
Heat
(Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SATart)
Temperature
(Temperatures-,AIR.T-,SAT)
Mode
Sensing
affects the Supply Air
value displayed.
This
Gas Heat Staging
configuration
is accessible via the Scrolling Marquee
Heat Mode Sensing (Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SATart).
When additional heat is required, power is supplied to the second
stage of the main gas valve. When the space temperature
is 0.5F
When
the
SAT
(Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SATart)
above
the
Unoccupied
Temperature
(Temperatures-+AIR.T-+SAT)
value
on
the
Scrolling Marquee and the CCN tables will be forced to zero when
Occupied
Heat
Set Point
(Setpoint-+OHSP)
or
Heat Set Point (Setpoint-+UHSP)
power is removed
Heat
Mode
Sensing
=DSBL, the Supply Air
from the second stage of the main gas valve and to the IGC Wl
terminal.
Both stage 1 and stage 2 of the gas valve closes,
interrupting
the flow of gas to the main burners.
heat outputs come ON and for 5 nfinutes after.
Air Temperature
(Temperatures-+AIR.T-+SAT)
fan inlet, upstream of the heat section.
Gas Heat Shut
When
the
SAT
Heat
(Configuration--+HEAT--+SAT--+SATatI)
Down
If power to the IGC Wl terminal lasted less than 1 minute, the
heating cycle will not ternfinate until 1 nfinute after power is
applied to
temperature
the Wl ternfinal
of the IGC board.
If the over
linfit opens after the indoor motor is stopped within 10
heating
mode.
This setting
sensor wires are removed
replaced by an accessory
Once modified,
the fan off delay will not change back to 45
seconds unless power is reset to the control. A LED indicator is
provided on the IGC to monitor operation.
The IGC is located in
downstream
temperature
Gas Heat with Economizer
When
there is a call for heat as described
operate
at
the
Supply
(Configuration--_UNIT--_FS_X)
above the indoor
Fan
Maximum
configuration
setting
fan will
Speed
and the
econonfizer outdoor air damper will move to the Econ Min at Max
Fan
Speed
(Configuration--_ECON--_MP_X)
position.
The
econonfizer
outdoor air damper is closed when the indoor fan is
not operating.
Mode
ENBL,
=
Sensing
Supply
the
should
only be used if the original
SAT
from the Main Base Board (MBB) and
SAT sensor located in the supply duct
of the heat section.
There are then two supply air
limits that become active, the Maximum
SAT Lower
Level
(Configuration--+HEAT--+SAT--+SAM_L)
the Maximum
SAT
Upper
Level
(Configuration-+HEAT-+SAT-+SAM.U).
Any time the supply air temperature
rises above the Maximum
SAT Lower
heat staging
on.
The default Supply
location is at the
Air Temperature
(Temperatures-+AIR.T-+SAT)
sensor reading is
displayed
at the Scrolling Marquee
and the CCN tables during
nfinutes of Wl beconfing inactive, on the next cycle the time will
be extended by 15 seconds.
The maximum
delay is 3 nfinutes.
the gas burner section and can be accessed
by opening the gas
access door.
During normal operation,
the LED is continuously
on the SAT
additional
below
Level (Configuration--+HEAT--+SAT--+SAM_L)
will be linfited to what is currently
on
stages can be added until the supply
the
Maximum
SAT
(Configuration-+HEAT-+SAT-+SAM.L).
temperature
rises
above
the Maximum
(Configuration-+HEAT-+SAT-+SAM.U),
reduced
again
by removing
until
and
the
no
air temperature
falls
Lower
Level
If the supply
air
SAT
Upper
Level
then heating
will be
a heat stage.
That
the
Supply
stage can not be added
Air
Temperature
(Temperatures-+AIR.T-+SAT)
falls below
the Maximum
SAT
Lower
Level (Configuration--+HEAT--+SAT--+SAM_L).
If the
supply
air temperature
stays above the Maximum
SAT Upper
Electric Heating Mode Using Space Temperature
Sensor T55, T56, or T58 (50PD Units Only)
For electric heat units with factory installed electric heat, the Type
of Heat
Installed
(Configuration--,HEAT--,HT.T¥)
will be
factory set to a value of 2 and the Number
of Heat Stages
(Configuration--,HEAT--,N.HTR)
will be factory set to match the
installed heater. If electric heat is installed in the field the value for
Number of Heat Stages (Configuration-+HEAT-+N.HTR)
be changed to match the number of heat stages installed.
must
Level
stage
(Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SAM.U),
will be removed
after the Heat
Stage
then
another
Decrease
Time
(Configuration--+HEAT--+H39EC).
Temperature
Compensated
Start
This logic is used when the unit is in the unoccupied
state. The
control
will calculate
early Start Bias time based
on Space
Temperature
deviation
from the occupied
cooling and heating set
Heat will not operate if the outdoor temperature is greater that the
value
configured
for
the
Heating
Lockout
Temperature
(Configuration-+HEAT-+HT_LO),
Heat Minimum
On Time
points. This will allow the control to start the unit so that the space
is at conditioned
levels when the occupied
period starts. This is
(Configuration-+HEAT-+MRTJt)
(Configuration-+HEAT-+MOT.H).
Setting Up the System
stages of heating.
nfinutes OFF.
Factory
and Heat Minimum
Off Time
Timeguards
apply to both
defaults
values are 2 minute
s ON and 2
required
Fan-off
Delay,
30 seconds.
Elect
Heat
by
Fan-off
The
Delay,
factory
Elect
default
for temperature compensated
local display
under
ITEM
Heat
for
(Configuration--+HEAT--+FOD_E)
is
90.1 compliance.
The settings
If the indoor fan control is configured
to cycle with the heating
demand by setting Fan ON When Occupied Heat Minimum
On
Time (Configuration-+UNIT--.OC.FN)
to NO, the fan will stop
after
a delay
configured
(Configuration-+HEAT-+FOD.E).
for ASHRAE
start can be found
in the
Configuration-+UNIT.
EXPANSION
RANGE
UNITS
CCN
POINT
TCS.C
Temp.Cmp.Strt.Cool
Factr
0 -
60
min
TCSTCOOL
TCS.H
Temp.Cmp.Strt.Heat
Factr
0 -
60
min
TCSTHEAT
Temp
Comp
Strt
Cool Factr
(TCS.C)
This is the factor for the start time bias equation for cooling.
The electronic control uses information
from the space sensor
deternfine the number of heat stages required.
Once the number
stages needed for heating
(Outputs-+HEAT--,HT.1),
(Outputs-+HEAT-+HT.1)
is deternfined,
either Heat Stage
or
Heat
Stage
1
and
Heat
Stage
2
(Outputs-+HEAT-+HT.2)
Heating
Mode
Using
information.
outputs will be turned on.
Space
Temperature
Sensor
to
of
1 Relay
Relay
Relay
Temp
Comp
Strt
Heat Factr
(TCS.H)
This is the factor for the start time bias equation for heating.
IMPORTANT: Temperature compensated start is disabled when
these factors are set to 0.
See Gas
for more
22
Temperature
Compensated Start Logic
The following
conditions
• Unit is in unoccupied
• Next occupied
• Current
CCN Broadcast
nmst be met for the algorithm
state.
time is valid.
Schedule
time of day is valid.
• Valid space temperature
reading
is available
(sensor
Acknowledger
(BROD-->B.ACK)
If this configuration is set to ON, then when any broadcasting is
done on the bus, this device will respond to and acknowledge.
Only one device per bus can be configured for this option.
to run:
Number
(SCH.O-->SCH.N)
This configuration determines
follow.
or CCN
what schedule
the control may
network).
The algorithm will calculate
following equations:
If (space
temperature
Start Bias Time
point)* TCS.C
If (space
> occupied
-- (space
temperature
Start
Bias
temperature)*
a Start Bias time in nfinutes
The control is ahvays occupied.
SCH.N = 1
The control follows its internal time
schedules. The user may enter any
number between 1 and 64 but it will
- occupied
heating
(occupied
SCH.N = 0
set point)
temperature
< occupied
Time
=
TCS Jt
cooling
using the
cooling
set
be overwritten to "1" by the control
as it only has one internal schedule.
set point)
heating
set
SCH.N
point
-
= 65-99
The control is either set up to
receive to a broadcasted
time
schedule set to this number or the
space
control is set up to broadcast its
internal time schedule (B.GS) to the
network and this is the global
schedule number it is broadcasting.
If this is the case, then the control
still follows its internal time
schedules.
When the Start Bias Time is greater than zero the algorithm will
subtract it from the next occupied time to calculate the new start
time. When
Compensated
the new start time is reached,
the Temperature
Start mode is set, the fan is started and the unit
controlled
as in an occupied
state. Once
set, Temperature
Compensated
mode will stay on until the unit goes into the
Occupied mode. The Start Bias Time will be written into the CCN
Linkage Equipment
Table if the unit is controlled
in DAV mode. If
the Unoccupied
Economizer
Free Cool mode is active when
temperature
compensated
mode will be stopped.
IMPORTANT:
start begins,
The maximum
Carrier
Comfort
Configuration
It is possible
minutes
Network
to configure
the Unoccupied
Free Cool
Start Bias can be is 180.
(CCN)®
the ComfortLink
T,_control
to participate
as an element
of the Carrier Comfort
Network
(CCN) system
directly
from the local display.
This section
will deal with
explaining
the various programmable
options which are found
under
the CCN sub-menu
in the Configuration
The maior configurations
local displays
CCN
at Configuration---,CCN.
Address
is the CCN address
Address
Baud
the rooftop
A.
is assigned.
Rate
(BAUD)
Time/Date
Broadcast
(BROD-->B.TIM)
device is on a CCN network
then it will be important
to make sure
that only one device on the bus has this configuration
more than one time broadcaster
is present, problems
will occur.
set to ON. If
with the time
daylight
alone,
Only
savings
the
user
daylight/savings
CCN
OAT
may want
Global
If this
can perform
Even if the rooftop
to set this
is stand
to ON to accomplish
the
traction.
Broadcast
If this configuration
broadcast
nfinutes.
the time and date broadcaster
time adjustments.
(BROD-->B.OAT)
is set to ON,
its outside-air
Schedule
configuration
temperature
Broadcast
is set
the control
will
periodically
at a rate
of once
every
30
ON
and
the
(SCH.N) is between 65 and 99, then the control
internal time schedule once every 2 nfinutes.
Time
Limit
(SCH.O--,OV.TL)
This configuration
allows
occurs when it is initiated.
the user to decide how long an override
The override may be configured
from 1
to 4 hours. If the time
become disabled.
is set to 0, the
Timed Override
removing
SPT Override
function
will
Hours (SCH.O-->OV.EX)
This displays the current number of hours
possible to cancel an override in progress
thereby
override
the override
Enabled?
left in an override. It is
by writing "0" to this
time left.
(SCH.O---'OV.SP)
If a space
sensor
is present,
unoccupied
T56 sensor.
period by pushing the override button on the T55 or
This option allows the user to disable this flmction by
this configuration
then
it is possible
to override
an
to NO.
Limit
Linfit Control
may override
the cooling
algorithm
to linfit
control the amount of power that a machine will use. This can save
the owner money by linfiting peaks in the power supply. Demand
linfit control is intended
to interface
with an external network
system.
This is through
to network points.
a CCN Loadshed
POC Device
To linfit stages through
network writes, the points
---,COOL---,MAX.C
and Run Status---,HEAT---,MAXJI
on
the
network
through
MAXHSTGS
respectively.
or writing
Run Status
are forced
CCN
points
MAX_CAPC
and
Force these to the desired maximum
cooling/dehumidification
capacity
and the maximum
heating
stages, respectively.
When there is no force on these points, they
automatically
reset to allow fltll cooling/dehumidification
capacity
and
all heating
power-on/reset
stages
to be
used.
These
points
are
reset
at
(POR).
When using the Loadshed
POC to do Demand Limiting,
the cool
capacity
and heat stage limits under both Redline and Loadshed
(BROD--,B.GS)
to
to
from the broadcast
or reduce cooling capacity
during run time. The term Demand
Linfit Control
refers to the restriction
of machine
capacity
to
rate.
If this configuration
is set to ON, the control will periodically
send
the time and date out onto the CCN bus once a minute. If this
IMPORTANT:
Override
Demand
is the CCN baud
the time on the bus, it is possible
message.
Demand
is assigned.
is broadcasting
(SCH.O-->HOL.G)
accept the time yet not accept the global holiday
setting
is the CCN bus the rooftop
This configuration
CCN
in the
(CCN.B)
This configuration
CCN
See Appendix
If a device
variable,
are located
(CCN.A)
This configuration
CCN
mode.
for CCN programming
Accept Global Holidays?
schedule
number
will broadcast
the
conditions
can be set individually
the active
stages
are greater
with configuration
decisions.
If
then the loadshed
or redline
configurations
when a loadshed or redline command
unit will reduce capacity or remove stages.
The
points can be found in Configuration---,CCN---,LDS.
23
is given, the
configuration
Loadshed
Group
Number
before
(S.GRP)
This corresponds to the loadshed supervisory devices that reside
elsewhere on the CCN network and broadcast loadshed and redline
commands to its associated equipment parts. This variable will
default to zero which is an invalid group number. This allows the
loadshed flmction to be disabled until configured.
Redline
Max Capacity
This
configuration
cooling/dehunfidification
loadshed condition.
Redline
Max Heat Stages
the
active
Max Heat
Stages
maximum
during
a
(R.MXH)
This configuration tells the unit the maximum
allowed to be on during a redline condition.
Loadshed
heating stages
(R.MXH
This configuration tells the unit the maximum heating stages
allowed to be on during a loadshed condition.
The two Demand Linfiting methods can be active simultaneously.
The lowest cool capacity and heat stage linfits imposed by either
method are applied, and these "effective linfits" are shown in the
points
CAPLIMIT
(Run
Status--+COOL--+LMT.C)
and
HSTGLIMT (Run Status--+HEAT--+LMTJt),
respectively. In
normal running mode, these limits will prevent capacity/stages
from being added, or capacity/stages to be removed, as applicable.
In test mode, these limits are ignored, and the user may continue to
operate at full load.
The point MODEDMDL (Run Status--+MODE--+DJ, MT) is used
to show if any Demand Limiting is in effect that prevents the unit
from operating either cooling or heating at full-capacity.
IMPORTANT:
MODEDMDL may reflect that staging is NOT
limited even though Loadshed is active or the network points are
being forced, if the capacity/stage limits in effect are not less than
the capacity/stages present in the unit.
If a more drastic mode of Demand Limiting is required, the
network point HVACDOWN (Run Status--+MODE--+HV.DN) can
be used to prohibit the unit from selecting any HVAC mode, thus
preventing the operation of the supply fan, compressors, condenser
fans, and heat stages. This point must also be forced, and is reset
automatically when not forced, and at POR.
Alarm
CCN
Alarm
The response of the control system to various alerts and alarms
depends on the seriousness of the particular alert or alarm. In the
mildest case, an alert does not affect the operation of the unit in any
manner. An alert can also cause a "strike." A "striking" alert will
cause the circuit to shut down for 15 minutes. This feature reduces
the likelihood of false alarms causing a properly working system to
be shut down incorrectly. If three strikes occur before the circuit
has an opportunity to show that it can flmction properly, the circuit
will strike out, causing the shutdown alarm for that particular
circuit. Once activated, the shutdown alarm can only be cleared via
an alarm reset.
However, circuits with strikes will be given an opportunity to reset
their strike counter to zero. As discussed above, a strike typically
causes the circuit to shut down. Fifteen nfinutes later, that circuit
will once again be allowed to run. If the circuit is able to run for 1
nfinute, its replacement circuit will be allowed to shut down (if not
required to run to satisfy requested stages). However, the
"troubled" circuit must run continuously for a user defined time
(Configuration-+COOL-+RST.C)
with no detectable problems
will
be reset to zero.
Default
value
is 5
Broadcast
Strike
(Configuration--+COOL--+ALM.N
ALM_NOW
on CCN) to YES to broadcast
Set Alert Each Strike to NO to broadcast
Alert Each Strike configuration
is ignored
all alerts are broadcast.
on
display,
each circuit strike alert.
only circuit shut down.
during Service Test and
Alarm Relay Output
The alarm relay output is a normally open 24 vac output between
field connection
terminal board terminals C and X. Selection
of
which
may
alerts and alarms will result in closing of the alarm relay
be
set
in
the
Alarm
Relay
Configuration
(Configuration--,ALM.O).
result in the alarm output
Setting a configuration
to YES will
relay, ALRM,
status of ON and 24 vac
between
C and X when that particular condition
is in an alarm
state. Setting a configuration
to NO will result in no action by the
alarm output relay for that particular condition.
IMPORTANT:
An accessory
the alarm relay output
filter switch can be used along with
function
to indicate
See the Troubleshooting
section
diagnosing,
alerts and alarms.
and clearing
dirty filter service
for more information
need.
on viewing,
TROUBLESHOOTING
The
Scrolling
Marquee
display
shows
the
actual
operating
conditions
of the unit while it is running. If there are alarms or
there have been alarms, they will be displayed in either the current
alarm list or the history alarm list. (See Table 8.) The Service Test
mode allows proper operation
of the compressors,
fans, and other
components
to be checked while the unit is not operating.
See
Service Test.
Complete
Unit Stoppage
There are several conditions
heating or cooling:
that can cause the unit not to provide
• If an alarm is active which causes the unit to shut down,
diagnose
Handling
There are a variety of different alerts and alarms in the system.
Alerts are indicated by TXXX (where XXX is the alert number) on
the display and generally signify that the improperly functioning
circuit can restart without human interaction. If an alarm occurs,
indicated by AXXX (where XXX is the alarm number), the
damaged circuit will generally not restart without an alarm reset via
the Scrolling Marquee display or CCN.
counter
Operators
of CCN networks
nfight not want to be notified
of
"striking"
alerts for refrigerant
circuits until the circuit has been
shut down due to 3 strikes. Set the cooling configuration
of Alert
Each
(R.MXC)
tells
the
unit
capacity allowed
the strike
nfinutes.
the problem
and Alerts section
• Cooling
and heating
• Programmed
using the information
provided
loads are satisfied.
occupancy
schedule.
• General
power failure.
• Tripped
CB1 or CB2 (24-volt
transformer
circuit breakers).
• Unit is turned off through
the CCN network.
• If outdoor-air
is less than the Compressor
temperature
Temperature
(CA.LO)
• If outdoor-air
Restart
configuration
temperature
Temperature
in Alarms
below.
(HT_LO)
value,
is greater than the Heating
configuration
value,
Lockout
unit cannot
cool.
Lockout
unit cannot
heat.
Procedure
Before attempting
to restart the machine,
check the alarm list to
determine the cause of the shut down. If the shutdown
alarm for a
particular control function has occurred, deternfine
and correct the
cause before allowing the unit to run under its own control again.
When there is problem,
Test mode. The alarms
can operate
Control
the unit should be diagnosed
in Service
nmst be reset before the control function
in either Normal
Module
mode or Service
Test mode.
Communication
Red LED
Proper
operation
of the MBB, ECB
and AUX1
control
boards
can
be visually
checked by looking
at the red status LEDs. When
operating correctly, the red status LEDs should blink in unison at a
rate
24
of once
every
2 seconds.
If the red LED
on the ECB
and
AUXIis notblinking,
checktheDIPswitch
positions
onthe
board,
If theredLEDsarenotblinkingin unison,
verifythat
correct
power
is beingsupplied
toallmodules,
A blinking
red
LEDattherateofoncepersecond
means
thatsoftware
is not
loaded
ontheboard,
Also,besure
thattheboard
issupplied
with
thecurrent
software,
If necessary,
reload
current
software,
Aboard
LEDthatislit continuously
should
bereplaced,
Green
LED
The MBB,
Equipment
whenever
power is on, If LEN LED is not blinking,
check LEN
connections
for potential communication
errors (MBB J3, J4, and
communication
directly
to the Scrolling
Marquee
Table
Device
Starting 4702N
Prior to 0803N
ECB
Presence
Marquee
The J5
and CCN
Pins 2 to 3
Pins 5 to 7
Pins 5 to 6
Pins 6 to 7
15K C_
J5
18.9K Q
J5
7.5K Q
J5
7.5K C_
J5
9.9K Q
J5
-
-
J2
7.5K C_
J3, J4, & J5
9.9K Q
J3, J4, & J5
5K 0
J2
18.9K Q
J2
9.9K Q
J2
9.9K 0
J2
29K 0
J9
16K Q
J9
13.5K Q
J9
values
should
J3, J4, & J5
9.9K £-2
J3, J4, & J5
5.2K £-._
be read when the board
Unit
Alarms
menu locations
All Current
Alarm
unit
(Currently
Active
read correctly before
power
off
off
(Alarm
Use the ENTER
key, then scroll through any alarm numbers
which of the nine codes are present.
this time.
using
alerts
AI Safety
When the DSC's
to
Power cycle will
alarm clears, this
clear.
Trip
that Current
Sensing
The unit does not support
Change
(DSC)
LED diagnostic
the CS.A1
AI (CS.AI)
has been
the use of a current sensor
to disable
at
and this alert will clear
and not return.
• Compressor
in
enabled.
this time.
-+CS.41)
AI Current
This Alert indicates
The description
for an alarm can be viewed
on the Scrolling
Marquee
display
by pressing
ESCAPE
and ENTER
keys
sinmltaneously
while displaying
the alarm code number. Be sure to
for each code, because in some cases there are
descriptions
and causes for the same code
Refer to the DSC's
LED code.
(Configuration-+COOL
are displayed
Scroll Controller
determine
enabled.
History)
alarms
are three
test mode
Board Alarm
its alarm relay.
• Compressor
Use the ENTER key, then scroll through any alarm numbers using
the up and down arrow keys. Alarms are displayed
in numerical
order.
expand description
different
possible
number.
Control
This Alert indicates
Alarms-->HIST
There
have corresponding
energizes
clear the DSC's
unit power
Causes
troubleshooting.
• Digital Compressor
Alarms)
the up and down arrow keys. Up to 20
order of occurrence,
with time and date.
Possible
texts for this alert code.
alerts, two of which
alert will automatically
Turning
and
This alert occurs when the Digital
will not reset the alarm history.
Alarms-->CURR
Codes
out.
indicated with "Service Test" in the expanded text. Pressing enter
and esc on the marquee or navigator to expand the T051 alert will
show you one of the below alerts. Make sure the expanded text is
History)
to YES to reset the alarm history.
Alarm
-
T051
are 5 different
different
Alarms)
Change to YES to reset all active alarms. Turning
will also reset all current alarms.
Change
There
are used for the local display:
(Reset
9.9K £-2
J5
off and the unit is locked
Alert Code
Alarm Output terminals. Each alarm may also be broadcast on the
CCN network.
Active
alarms and past alarm history
can be
reviewed and cleared via the local display or a CCN device.
The
(Reset
is powered
Diagnostic
of active alarms will be indicated
on the Scrolling
display by the Alarm Status light turning on and by the
Alarms-->R.HIST
(CCN) Resistance between Pins/
Connector
7.5K _2
and Alerts
Alarms-->R.CURR
Resistances
Pins 1 to 2
number of active alarms being displayed in the automatic View of
Run Status. Presence of active alarms may also be signaled on the
following
Communication
15K C_
J3, J4, & J5
18.9K Q
J3, J4, & J5
5.9K 0
J2
AUX1
Viewing and Clearing
Failures
Pins 1 to 3
Starting 0803N
Alarms
LEN
Communication
Connector
MBB
The resistive
71
The MBB has one yellow LED which is used to indicate CCN
communication
activity. The Carrier Comfort
Network@
(CCN)
LED will blink during times of network communication.
(LEN) Resistance between Pins/
Board Serial
Number
Prior to 4702N
IMPORTANT:
by a 3-wire
to module,
power
and
display,
a LEN interface at the field
If the Scrolling Marquee or Navigator display Conmmnication
Failure or the green or yellow LED's do not flash on the boards
then the problem could be the communication chip on one of the
control boards (MBB, ECB or AUX1).
Use an ohm meter to
measure the resistance on the communication pins of the boards to
determine if the board is bad. If the reading is less than half the
value indicated in Table 7, then the board needs to be replaced.
ECB and AUX1 each have one green LED, The Local
Network
(LEN)
LED should
always
be blinking
J5), Communication
between modules is accomplished
sensor bus, These 3 wires run in parallel from module
The J4 connector
on the MBB also provides
both
connector on the MBB provides
connection ternfinal (TB).
Yellow LED
Detected
that Current
After Turnoff
Sensing
The unit does not support
Change
the CS.AI
A1 (CS.A1)
the use of a current
to disable
has been
sensor
at
and this alert will clear
and not return.
(Con figuration--,COOL--,CS.41)
Alert Code
Temperature
T064
This alert occurs
240°F
25
- Circuit
Thermistor
A Saturated
Condensing
Failure
when the temperature is outside
(-40 ° to 116°C).
When
this occurs,
the range -40 ° to
the control
will
use
only the outdoor temperature to control the outdoor fans. If both
the SCT and OAT fail, then circuit shutdown alarm will occur also.
The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thernfistor, a shorted or
open thernfistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection.
Alert Code T066 - Circuit A Saturated Suction Temperature
Thermistor Failure
This alert occurs when the unit's suction transducers are turned off
internally. Cooling will not operate. This is usually due to a
network force on a non exposed CCN point. Reload factory
defaults or reinstall software on the MBB. Consult the network
manager if alert continues.
Alert Code T073 - Outdoor
Failure
Air Temperature
Thermistor
this time. Change
not return.
the CS.A1
to disable
and this alert will clear and
(Con figuration--+COOL--+CS_41)
Alert
Code
Tll0
- Circuit
This alert has "Service
A Loss of Charge
Test" text that will be displayed
if the alert
occurred
during
service
test.
This
alert occurs
when
the
compressor is OFF and the suction pressure is less than 5 psig and
OAT is greater
than -5°F for I continuous
minute.
Use the
Scrolling
Marquee
to reset the alert. The cause of the alert is
usually low refrigerant pressure or a faulty suction pressure. This
alert only occurs when the compressor is OFF because the low
refrigerant pressure alarms (alert T133) handle this situation when
the compressor is operating.
This alert occurs when the temperature is outside the range -40 ° to
240°F (-40 ° to 116°C). For all units, all ambient temperature
lockout linfits for cooling and heating are ignored. For all units, if
both SCT and OAT fail, then circuit shutdown alarm will also
occur. For econonfizer equipped units, the econonfizer will not
operate to provide cooling. The econonfizer will still operate for
ventilation. The control will use condenser temperatures for
outdoor fan control. For units with CCH crankcase heat relay
control, the crankcase heat relay will be turned on if any
compressor is off. This alert resets automatically. The cause of the
alert is usually a faulty thernfistor, a shorted or open thernfistor
caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection.
Alert
Alert Code T074 - Space Temperature
(converted
from the suction pressure) is less than configured
suction
control
levels,
Configuration-+COOL-+SST-+SST.1
Thermistor
Failure
This alert occurs when the temperature is outside the range -40 ° to
240°F (-40 ° to 116°C). Cooling and heating will not operate. For
econonfizer equipped units, the econonfizer will still operate for
ventilation. This alert resets automatically. The cause of the alert is
usually a faulty thernfistor in the T-55, T-56, or T-58 device, a
shorted or open thernfistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose
connection.
Alert Code T075 - Supply Air Temperature
Failure
Thermistor
This alert occurs when the temperature is outside the range -40 ° to
240°F (-40 ° to 116°C). Econonfizer cooling and compressor
operation cannot occur while this alert is active. The unit will not
be allowed to enter cooling mode. This alert resets automatically.
The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thernfistor, a shorted or
open thernfistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection.
Alert Code T076 - Return Air Thermistor Failure
This alert occurs when the temperature is outside the range -40 ° to
240°F (-40 ° to 116°C). Differential dry bulb crossover control
can not occur. Free cooling can only be controlled by the OAT and
enthalpy. This alert resets automatically. The cause of the alert is
usually a faulty thernfistor, a shorted or open thernfistor caused by
a wiring error, or a loose connection.
Alert Code T077 - Space Relative Humidity
Sensor Failure
Code
T126
- Circuit
A High
Discharge
Pressure
This alert has "Service Test" text that will be displayed if the alert
occurred during service test. This alert occurs when alert T051 is
active while the appropriate condensing
150°F. This alert reset automatically.
temperature
The cause
is greater than
of the alert is
usually an overcharged
system, high outdoor ambient temperature
coupled with dirty outdoor coil, plugged filter drier, or a faulty
high-pressure
Alert
Code
switch.
T133
See Alert T051
- Circuit
This alert has "Service
occurred
during
compressor
is
for diagnostic
A Low Refrigerant
procedure.
Pressure
Test" text that will be displayed
service
operating
test.
and
This
the
if the alert
alert occurs
when
the
evaporating
temperature
low
(Low Suction
- Level 1) or SST.2 (Low Suction
- Level 2) or
SST.3 (Low Suction Level 3). The circuit SST value must be less
than SST.I (for 5 nfinutes), SST.2 (for 4 nfinutes), or SST.3 (for 3
minutes when using the economizer
and 1.5 minutes when not
using the econonfizer)
for the alert to occur. When the outdoor
temperature
is less than 40°F, the above values are reduced I°F for
every 2°F the OAT is below 40°F. An alert will also occur if the
circuit SST value is less than SST.3 -5°F for 20 seconds and the
outdoor temperature
is above 40°F. All the above timers will reset
if the suction temperature
rises above SST.O for I nfinute. This
alert causes a strike for the respective circuit. This alert will activate
when the coil becomes
frosted. However,
during the 15-nfinute
reset period, the coils will thaw and strike should clear and restart if
there is nothing
else wrong with the circuit. The alert resets
automatically.
The cause of the alert is usually low refrigerant
charge, dirty filters, evaporator
fan operating backwards,
loose or
broken belt, plugged filter drier, faulty transducer,
excessively
cold
return air, or stuck open economizer
when the ambient temperature
is low.
Alert
Code
T143
- Circuit
A Failure
to Pressurize
This alert has "Service Test" text that will be displayed if the alert
occurred
during
service
test.
This
alert occurs
when
the
compressor
turns on and the difference
between
suction
and
This alert occurs when the input is less than 3.5 mA and the sensor
is configured as installed. If a hunfidistat is not installed, then
dehunfidification will not be functional. Check sensor and wiring.
This alert clears automatically.
discharge
IMPORTANT:
An ECB must be installed to use the space
relative hunfidity sensor.
Alert Code T092 - Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer
Failure
strike for the respective circuit. The alert resets automatically.
The
cause of the alert is usually compressor
wiring causing reverse
rotation or a faulty compressor.
This alert occurs when the
transducer voltage. A circuit
Use the Scrolling Marquee to
is usually a faulty transducer,
connection.
board does not properly read the
cannot run when this alert is active.
reset the alarm. The cause of the alert
faulty 5-v power supply, or a loose
Alert Code T102 - Compressor
A1 Current
Sensor Failure
This Alert indicates that Current Sensing A1 (CS.A1) has been
enabled. The unit does not support the use of a current sensor at
pressure
is less
then
the
Ckt A Minimum
Pressure
(Configuration-+COOL-+SST-+PSIJ)).
The pressure difference
must be greater then PSI.D (default is 20 psi) after 60 seconds and
stay above it while running the compressor.
This alert causes a
Alert
Code
T153
This
alert occurs
- Real Time
when
Clock
the RTC
Hardware
clock
Failure
chip on the MBB
is not
responding.
Time and date functions will not operate, such as local
occupancy
schedules.
The unit will default to 24/7 unoccupied
mode. Recovery is automatic but MBB board replacement
may be
necessary. Cycling power to the control and reconfiguring
and date should be tried before board replacement.
Alarm
Code A154
- Serial
EEPROM
Hardware
the time
Failure
The unit will completely
shut down. The serial EEPROM
chip on
the MBB, which stores the unit's configuration,
is not responding.
26
Recovery is automatic but MBB board replacement may be
necessary. Cycling the power to the control should be tried before
board replacement.
found
Alarm Code T155 - Serial EEPROM
Alert Code
Storage Failure Error
at variable
Configuration-+UNIT-+FS.SW.
Verify that the
configuration
is set correct, verify the wiring
This alarm resets automatically.
T408
and auxiliary
device.
- Dirty Air Filter
Configuration data in the serial EEPROM chip can not be verified.
The unit will run to last know good values or defaults, and
therefore operating errors may occur. Recovery is automatic but
MBB board replacement may be necessary. Cycling power to the
control and reconfiguring the control points should be tried before
board replacement.
This alert occurs when the Filter Status switch senses a plugged
filter for 120 continuous seconds after the indoor fan has been
Alarm Code A156 - Critical Serial EEPROM
Error
configuration
is set correct and verify the wiring and filter status
switch. The hose should be connected to the low side of the switch.
Storage Fail
The unit will completely shut down. Critical configuration data in
the serial EEPROM chip can not be verified. Recovery is automatic
but MBB board replacement may be necessary. Cycling power to
the control and reconfiguring the critical control points should be
tried before board replacement. There are no critical configurations
in the 48/50PD.
Alert Code A157 - A/D Hardware Failure
running for 10 seconds. Because the Dirty Air Filter switch can be
configured normally opened or closed, the switch might be open or
closed. The configuration
for this switch
variable
Configuration-+UNIT--,FL.SW.
This alert resets
Alert Code
you one of the below alerts. Make
correctly before troubleshooting.
• Fan Status Switch
sure the expanded
On, Fan Contactor
Off
indoor fan has been on for 10 seconds
feedback
has determined
Because
or closed,
configuration
be off.
normally
the switch might be open or closed.
and fan status switch. The hose
to the high side of the switch. If the IDF is
to shut down the unit when this alarm occurs
(Configuration-+UNIT-+IDF.F
only be reset manually
not configured
= YES), then this alarm can
and the unit is shut down.
If the IDF is
to shut the unit down when this alarm occurs
(IDF.F = NO), then this alarm resets automatically
specific
control
Off, Fan Contactor
On
This alert occurs when the fan status switch
indoor fan has been off for 10 seconds
feedback
has determined
that the indoor
the Fan Status switch
opened
or closed,
configuration
has sensed that the
and the indoor
fan should
can be configured
Verify the wiring
Alarm Code A200 - Linkage Timeout - Comm Failure
This alarm occurs when the MBB fails to communicate with a
Linkage device. This only occurs when the MBB has previously
conmmnicated with a Linkage device since last power cycle. If a
back up sensor was not installed the T074 alert will occur shortly
after this one. Reset power to the unit and verify Linkage is
communicating.
Alarm Code A404 - Fire Shutdown
(IDF.F = NO), then this alert resets automatically
be connected
and fan status switch. The hose
to the high side of the switch. If the IDF is
to shut down the unit down when this alert occurs
(Configuration-+UNIT-+IDF.F
only be reset manually
not configured
Alert
The
Verify that the configuration
This alert occurs when the ECB cannot conmmnicate with the
Belimo Actuator. If the analog signal is connected properly, the
economizer will still be controlled through it. This is usually
caused by a wiring problem, actuator failure, or the wrong actuator.
Investigate using the Low Voltage Schematic, make sure the
actuator is a MFT conmmnication actuator, and verify the feedback
signal from the actuator is correct.
control
normally
for this switch input can be found at
is set correctly.
configured
fan
be on.
the switch might be open or closed.
Configuration-+UNIT-+FN.SW.
should
and no
action is taken.
• Fan Status Switch
Because
The
Verify that the configuration
Verify the wiring
be connected
configured
that the
fan
for this switch input can be found at
is set correctly.
should
fan should
can be configured
Configuration-+UNIT-+FN.SW.
This alert occurs when the MBB cannot conmmnicate with the
AUX1 board. Unit operation will be disabled. This is usually
caused by a wiring problem. Investigate using the Low Voltage
Schematic, check that the AUX1 address is correct, and verify the
resistance between pins on the LEN connections.
Alert Code T179 - Loss of Communication
with the
Economizer Control Board
and the indoor
that the indoor
the Fan Status switch
opened
with the Capacity
This alarm occurs when the shutdown input is either open or
closed depending upon its configuration. This alarm is usually
caused by an auxiliary device that is trying to shut down the unit,
e.g., smoke detector. The configuration for this switch input can be
text is read
This alarm occurs when the fan status switch has sensed
This alarm occurs when a circuit has 3 strikes. Use the Scrolling
Marquee display to reset the alarm. Investigate the alarm that
caused the strikes to occur.
This alert occurs when the MBB cannot conmmnicate with the
ECB. Economizer operation will be disabled.
This is usually
caused by a wiring problem. If a relative humidity sensor is
installed and configured but there is not an ECB installed on the
unit, this alert will be generated (the ECB is required for RH sensor
operation). Investigate using the Low Voltage Schematic, check
that the ECB address is correct, and verify the resistance between
pins on the LEN connections.
Alert Code T180 - Loss of Communication
with the
Economizer Actuator
automatically.
T409
There are 2 different texts for this alert code. Pressing enter and esc
on the marquee or navigator
to expand the T409 alert will show
The unit will completely shut down. The analog to digital
conversion chip on the MBB has failed. Recovery is automatic but
MBB board replacement may be necessary. Cycling power to the
control should be tried before board replacement.
Alert Code A163 - Circuit A Down due to Failure
Alert Code T178 - Loss of Communication
Control Board
input can be found at
Verify
that
the
= YES), then this alarm can
and the unit is shut down.
If the IDF is
to shut the unit down when this alert occurs
and no specific
action is taken.
Code
T414
There are 6 different alerts under this one alert code. Pressing enter
and esc on the marquee or navigator to expand the T414 alert will
show you one of the below alerts. All these alerts are generated by
the Belimo actuator and reported to the ECB. These
occur if the ECB is controlling the actuator digitally
• Economizer
Damper
Actuator
Out of Calibration
This alert occurs when the economizer
27
alerts can only
through MFT.
actuator
reports
angle (Operating
Modes-+ECON-+C_4NG)
minimum
angle (Configuration-+ECON-+M_4NG).
control
a control
less than the
Initiate economizer
using the Service
calibration
(Service
Test--,INDP--,
Test menu. The economizer
procedure
will try to find new maximum
positions.
If the alert does not clear automatically
calibration
procedure
economizer
rotation.
is complete,
clamp.
clamp,
open and closed
investigate
return the damper),
and while pushing
• Economizer
the damper
changing
after the
Damper
Actuator
longer
the
• Economizer
to determine
what is increasing
actuator is the correct
Load Limit
load is too high.
damper
load and verify
This alert resets
damper
that the
position
is
powered
with no signal for
(may have to wait
If the alert continues,
determine
if the
is bad. This alert resets automatically.
Damper
move. Investigate
Investigate
size for the unit.
Excessively
The stop jog ration must be less than 21%
than a few hours).
ECB or actuator
the
closed tighten
too rapidly.
Stuck or Jammed
This alarm occurs when the actuator
Torque Above
This alert occurs when the actuator
Hunting
a few hours to allow the ratio to decrease
but
This alert resets automatically.
Economizer
Actuator
to clear this alert. Leave the actuator
what is limiting
loosen
Damper
This alert occurs when the commanded
After that step, run another calibration,
first power off unit (spring
actuator
E.CAL)
calibration
what is stopping
senses it can no longer
the rotation
of the actuator
and fix. This alert resets automatically.
• Economizer
Damper
Actuator
Mechanical
This alert occurs when the actuator
automatically.
Investigate
actuator
Failure
senses
a catastrophic
and replace if necessary.
failure.
This alert resets
automatically.
• Economizer
Damper
Actuator
Direction
Switch
Wrong
Position
direction
switch
This alert occurs when the economizer
damper
is in the wrong
switch should
clockwise
position.
position
The direction
and the actuator
the CW face of the actuator
should be mounted
is accessible.
Correct
be in the
so that
if necessary.
This alert clears automatically.
Alert
Code
T415
- IAQ Input
Out of Range
This alert occurs when the IAQ input (on ECB) is less than 3.5 mA
and the sensor is configured
as installed.
IAQ operation
will be
disabled.
Alert Code
Check
sensor
and wiring.
T416 - OAQ Input
This alert clears automatically.
Out of Range
This alert occurs when the OAQ input (on ECB) is less than 3.5
mA and the sensor is configured
as installed.
OAQ operation will
be disabled.
Check
sensor
and wiring.
This
alert clears
automatically,
28
Table
8 -ALARM
OR
ALERT
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
Digital Compressor
Compressor
T051
A1 Safety Trip
Service Test - Compressor
A1 Safety Trip
T066
Circuit A Saturated Condensing Temp
Thermistor Failure
Circuit A Saturated Suction Temperature
Thermistor Failure
T073
Outdoor Air Temperature
T074
Space Temperature
T075
Supply Air Temperature
T076
Return Air Thermistor
T077
Space Relative Humidity Sensor Failure
T092
Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer
Failure
Thermistor
Thermistor
Thermistor
Failure
Failure
T102
Compressor
Tl10
Circuit A Loss of Charge
Service Test - Circuit A Loss of Charge
A1 Current Sensor Failure
Codes
RESET
METHOD
No action
Automatic
Add Strike for Circuit A
Automatic
Add Strike for Circuit A
Automatic
Turn off all
compressors
Turn off all
Automatic
Automatic
compressors
Use OAT to control
Outdoor fans
See the DSC's LEDs for troubleshooting
Current Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and
should be off
Current
should
Current
should
Current
should
Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and
be off
Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and
be off
Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and
be off
Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor
error or loose connection.
caused by wiring
Automatic
Suction transducers
Automatic
Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor
error or loose connection.
caused by wiring
No heating or cooling
Automatic
caused by wiring
No cooling mode
Automatic
Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor
error or loose connection.
Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor
error or loose connection.
Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor
error or loose connection.
No Cooling
No differential DB
crossover
If RH.S = Yes, then no
indoor humidity control
Shutdown
Circuit A
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
If CS.A1 = Enable,
then no T051 current
alarm
Shutdown Circuit A
Shutdown Circuit A
Automatic
Manual
Manual
internally forced inactive
caused by wiring
caused by wiring
Faulty, shorted, or open sensor caused by wiring
error or loose connection.
Faulty transducer, faulty 5-V power supply, or loose
connection
Current Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and
should be off
Add Strike for Circuit A
Automatic
Service Test - Circuit A Low Refrigerant
Pressure
Add Strike for Circuit A
Automatic
Circuit
Add
Strike
for Circuit
A
Automatic
Low refrigerant or faulty suction pressure transducer
Low refrigerant or faulty suction pressure transducer
An overcharged system, high outdoor ambient
temperature coupled with dirty outdoor coil, plugged
filter drier, or a faulty high-pressure
switch.
An overcharged system, high outdoor ambient
temperature coupled with dirty outdoor coil, plugged
filter drier, or a faulty high-pressure
switch.
Low refrigerant charge, dirty filters, evaporator fan
turning backwards, loose or broken fan belt, plugged
filter drier, faulty transducer, excessively cold return
air, or stuck open economizer when the ambient
temperature is low.
Low refrigerant charge, dirty filters, evaporator fan
turning backwards, loose or broken fan belt, plugged
filter drier, faulty transducer, excessively cold return
air, or stuck open economizer when the ambient
temperature is low.
Wiring causing reverse rotation or faulty compressor
Add
Strike
for Circuit
A
Automatic
Wiring causing
Circuit A High Discharge
Pressure
Service Test - Circuit A High Discharge
Pressure
Circuit A Low Refrigerant
Shutdown
Circuit A
Automatic
Shutdown
Circuit A
Automatic
Pressure
T133
A Failure
Service
Test
-
To Pressurize
Circuit
A Failure
To
Pressurize
T153
Real Timeclock
Hardware
Failure
A154
T155
A156
A157
Serial
EEPROM
Hardware
Failure
Serial
EEPRQM
Storage
Critical
Serial
A/D Hardware
Circuit
A163
CAUSE
Automatic
T126
T143
PROBABLE
No cooling with
economizer
Failure
Failure
T_,Alarm
ACTION TAKEN BY
CONTROL
Control Board Alarm
Compressor A1 Current Detected After
Turnoff
Service Test - Compressor A1 Current
Detected After Turnoff
T064
ComfortLink
Service
EEPRQM
Failure
A Down
Test
-
Failure
Storage
No time
A Down
date
Automatic
schedule
operation
Unit Shutdown
Error
Fail Error
Due to Failure
Circuit
and
Due to
Unit
Automatic
operation
errors
Unit Shutdown
Unit Shutdown
Shutdown
Circuit
A
Shutdown
Circuit A
Failure
See Legend on next page
29
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
Manual
reverse rotation or faulty compressor
No time/date configured, software failure, or MBB
failure
Software failure or MBB failure
Software failure or MBB failure
Software failure or MBB failure
Software failure or MBB failure
Circuit has 3 strikes or has been locked out by
another alarm
Circuit has 1 strike or has been locked out by another
alarm
Table
8 -ALARM
OR
ALERT
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
ComfortLink
T_Alarm
Codes
ACTION TAKEN BY
CONTROL
RESET
METHOD
(cont)
PROBABLE
CAUSE
T178
Loss of Communication
Control Board
with the Capacity
Unit shutdown -HVAC
disable
Automatic
Communication
wiring problem with AUX1 or faulty
MBB, ECB, or AUXl
T179
with the Economizer
Communication
wiring problem with ECB or faulty
MBB, ECB, or AUXl
Automatic
A200
A404
T408
Linkage Timeout
Fire Shutdown
Dirty Filter
No economizer
operation
No economizer
operation
No Linkage Operation
fall back to local SPT
Unit Shutdown
Alert Generated
Automatic
T180
Loss of communication
Control Board
Loss of communication
Actuator
Communication
wiring problem with actuator.
Received a table write from Linkage before, now not
receiving any linked commands
Smoke detected by smoke detector
Dirty Filter
If IDF.F = Yes, then Unit
Shutdown
YES, then
Manual,
otherwise
with the Economizer
Error - Comm Failure
Fan Status Switch ON, Fan Contactor
OFF
T409
Economizer
Calibration
Economizer
Load Limit
Damper Actuator Out of
incorrect.
Economizer
Excessively
Damper Actuator Hunting
If IDF.F = Yes, then Unit
Shutdown
Alert Generated
YES,Manual,then
Tripped Circuit Breaker. Broken
otherwise
motor. Configuration
incorrect.
automatic
Calibrate economizer (E.CAL).
Automatic
then determine what is limiting
belt. Bad indoor fan
Bad fan status switch.
Alert Generated
Automatic
Actuator
Alert Generated
Automatic
Damper position changing
Alert Generated
Automatic
No economizer
and actuator.
motion.
Alert Generated
Automatic
Check actuator
and replace if necessary.
Actuator direction control switch (CCW, CW) wrong.
Bad sensor, bad wiring, or sensor configured
incorrectly.
Bad sensor, bad wiring, or sensor configured
incorrectly.
If problem still exist
economizer rotation.
Damper Actuator Torque Above
Economizer
Damper Stuck or Jammed
Economizer
Failure
Damper Actuator Mechanical
Economizer Damper Actuator Direction
Switch Wrong
Alert Generated
Automatic
T415
IAQ Input Out of Range
No IAQ Operations
Automatic
T416
OAQ Input Out of Range
No OAQ Operations
Automatic
LEGEND
ECB
-
Economizer
IGC
MBB
-
Integrated Gas Controller
Main Base Board
OAT
-
Outdoor-Air
Cooling
Bad Fan Status Switch. Configuration
automatic
If IDF.F =
Fan Status Switch OFF, Fan Contactor ON
T414
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
If IDF.F =
ControlBoard
Thermistor
Troubleshooting
Use the Scrolling Marquee display or a CCN device to view the
cooling status display and the cooling diagnostic display (see
Appendix A) for information on the cooling operation. Check the
current alarms and alarm history for any cooling alarm codes and
correct any causes. (See Table 9.)
Verify any unique control configurations
per installed site
requirements or accessories. If alarms conditions are corrected and
cleared, operation of the compressors and fans may be verified by
using the Service Test mode. (See Table 5.) See Table 9 for general
cooling service analysis.
30
load too high. Check damper load.
too quickly.
Check damper
blades, gears,
Table
9-- Cooling
Service
PROBLEM
Compressor
Analysis
CAUSE
REMEDY
Power failure.
and Fan Will Not Start
Fuse blown
CB2.
or circuit
Disconnect
off.
Compressor
breaker
tripped.
Check CB1 and
set point or supply
Outdoor
too low.
temperature
Check time guards using ComfortLink_'
Marquee also the DSC has a 2 minute
set point not
Check cooling
Marquee.
Insufficient line voltage.
Active alarm.
Compressor
Continuously.
Unit undersized
for load.
charge.
Recover
2.Replace
Recover
and
refrigerant.
and secure
tightly
and
1.Check TXV bulb mounting and secure tightly to suction
line and insulate.
2.Replace TXV (and filter drier) if stuck open or closed.
Check belt tension. Check for other restrictions.
Insufficient evaporator
airflow.
Indoor Fan Running to slow or off while compressor
is
Check VFD display is illuminated
and shows Auto
mode. Power supplied to VFD. Check O-lOvdc
signal
present at AUXl board.
Reset thermostat
or occupancy
schedule.
on
too low in conditioned
temperature).
to suction
TXV (and filter drier) if stuck open or closed.
excess refrigerant.
Replace air filters.
Check pressure, locate leak, repair, evacuate,
recharge.
charge.
Faulty TXV.
Temperature
return-air
excess
1.Check TXV bulb mounting
line and insulate.
overcharged.
Dirty air filters.
Low refrigerant
Scrolling
Fuse blown or plug at motor loose.
Check for sources and eliminate
High heat load.
Faulty TXV.
Too Low.
if needed.
1.Check TXV bulb mounting and secure tightly to suction
line and insulate.
2.Replace TXV (and filter drier) if stuck open or closed.
Determine cause and correct.
Remove restriction.
Condenser air restricted or air short cycling.
Restriction in liquid tube.
No Power to contactors.
Refrigerant
Pressure
Scrolling
Tighten thermistors.
Clean coil.
Faulty TXV.
Suction
Check active alarms using ComfortLink
Marquee and DSC alert flash codes
Decrease load or increase size of unit.
Check pressure, locate leak, repair, evacuate,
recharge.
Clean coil or remove restriction.
Dirty condenser coil.
Refrigerant overcharge.
Condenser
Fans Not Operating,
Excessive Suction Pressure,
Scrolling
Check cooling demand using ComfortLink
Marquee and DSC alert flash codes.
Replace filters.
stuck on
Condenser coil dirty or restricted.
Loose condenser thermistors.
Pressures,
Check active alarms using ComfortLink
Marquee and DSC alert flash codes
Determine cause and correct.
Compressor
contactor
time
Scrolling
using
Check and adjust set points
Low refrigerant
Condenser
using ComfortLink
Occupancy
schedule set point or supply set point too
low. Compressor
running at lowest capacity
Dirty air filters.
Excessive
demand
Scrolling
anti-short
Check Compressor
Lockout Temperature
ComfortLink
Scrolling Marquee.
alarm.
Compressor
Cycles (other than
normally satisfying demand).
Operates
breaker.
Power disconnect.
time guard to prevent short cycling.
Occupancy
schedule
calling for Cooling.
Active
Call power company.
Replace fuse or reset circuit
area (low
LEGEND
CB - Circuit Breaker
DSC - Digital Scroll Controller
TXV - Thermostatic Expansion
VFD - X?ariable Frequency
Digital
Scroll Controller
The
48/50PD
The
compressor
units
unloader
is on
desired
with
a solenoid
unloader
verses
off
This
direct
control
have
control
the
power
a digital
(DSC).
This
second
window.
capacity.
within
means
of
to
the
codes and correct
LED flash codes.
(DSC) Troubleshooting
are equipped
has
digital
scroll
controller
and off within
a 20
not
'Calve
Drive
the
20
the
seconds
compressor,
DSC
and
but
the
by
unloader
of time
depends
ComfortLink
on
control
it does
signal
for
DSC
green,
has
yellow,
unloaded
for
shutdown
to
time
The
When
T051
guard
DSC
this
alert.
three
and
a half
prevent
is applied
has
LED
lights
red
The
a second
reverse
by
an alarm
MBB
input
Check
the
to
DSC
on
switch
LED
start
rotation.
the DSC
relay
help
output
during
POWER
on
the
24VAC power terminal. When the 2 minute
is active, the green LED will flash.
the
does
however
run
the
up
and
one
A
after
two
that
shutting
minute
second
LED
(green)
--
indicates
LED
(red) -through a unique
on
anti-short
voltage
is present
anti-short
conmmnicates
flash code.
All LEDs Flashing
at the Same
is too low for operation.
compressor
the compressor
is connected
the DSC's
Red
at the
cycle
timer
UNLOADED
LED (yellow) -- indicates the unloader
solenoid
status. The LED is on when the unloader solenoid is energized.
ALERT
condition
commanded
troubleshooting;
will
10 shows
the
capacity.
The
Table
compressor.
is controlled
DSC
turns
the
The amount
that
that
scroll
that
any problems.
All LEDs
Controller
On Solid
failure.
at the Same
Flash
Code
1 --
Reserved
Flash
Code
2 --
High
Rate
--
Time --
for future
an
abnormal
indicates
24VAC
indicates
Digital
system
supply
Scroll
use
off.
to the MBB.
is closed,
the MBB
activates
the
status
on the DSC
for flash
alarm
This occurs
31
Discharge
when the discharge
Temperature
temperature
thermistor
(DTT)
has
measured
atemperature
above
268F(131C)orthethermistor
has the system controller providing the signal may not be powered.
short
circuited
(jumpered
out).
The DSC will de-energize
the compressor
contactor and unloader
TheDSCwillde-energize
thecompressor
contactor
andunloader solenoid and the alarm relay contacts will close causing a T051
solenoid,
andthealarm
relaycontacts
will close
causing
aT051 alert on the ComfortLink Control. Once the system controller
demand signal input has risen above 0.5VDC,
the ALERT code
alertontheComfortLink
Control. Thecompressor
will be
allowed
torestart
after30minute
delayandaftertheDTTreads and alarm relay output will reset. If the demand signal is above
1.44VDC
and the anti-short
cycle timer has timed out, the
below
250F(120C).Theflashcode
andalarm
relay
contacts
will
compressor
will
restart.
bereset
afterthecompressor
hasrunfor60minutes
without
any
otherALERTs.If five discharge
temperature
ALERTs
have Flash Code 6 -- Discharge Thermistor Fault
occurred
withinfourhours,
theDSCwilllockoutthecompressor. This occurs when the DSC is not receiving a signal from the
Thelockout
canonlybereset
bycycling
the24VAC
power
offand discharge temperature thermistor (DTT). The thermistor may be
on.
missing,
Flash Code 3 -- Compressor
Protector Trip
This occurs when the demand signal from the system
will close and the DSC will not increase
the capacity
of the
compressor
beyond 50% loading. This ALERT code and alarm
relay output are reset by reconnecting
the DTT.
controller
greater than 1.44VDC and there is no compressor
current
This could be due to the compressor's
internal overload
is
detected.
protector
being
open,
fuse or breaker
open,
power
disconnected
to
compressor
contactor,
compressor
power wiring not run through
DSC current transformer
port or a compressor
contactor failure.
The DSC will de-energize
the compressor
contactor and unloader
solenoid and the alarm relay contacts will close causing a T051
alert on the ComfortLink
Control.
The DSC will wait for the two
minute
anti-short
controller demand
compressor
the restart,
cycle timer to time out and if the system
signal is still greater than 1.44VDC, energize the
contactor
again. If compressor
current
the ALERT code and alarm relay output
is detected on
will reset. The
DSC will attempt to restart compressor
as long as the
controller demand is above 1.44VDC.
There is no lockout
for this ALERT.
Flash
Code
4 --
Locked
system
feature
Rotor
Flash
disconnected
Code
7 --Reserved
alarm relay
ComfortLink
contacts
will close causing
Control.
The
unloader
the 24VAC
5 --
power
Demand
off and on.
Signal
the
a T051
solenoid
alert
will
on the
remain
solenoid will de-energize
causing the compressor
to run loaded.
The ALERT code and alarm relay output are reset when current is
Flash
detected
Code
9 --
while
system
Low 24VAC
controller
demand
signal
is below
Supply
the supply
The DSC
voltage to the DSC has dropped
will de-energize
the compressor
contactor
and unloader
solenoid.
The alarm relay contacts may
close if the voltage is high enough for the alarm relay to pull in.
Loss
This occurs when the demand
signal input has dropped below
0.5VDC.
The demand input signal wire may be disconnected
or
Table
LED Flash
Code
when
energized
causing the compressor
to run unloaded
as long as the
system controller
demand
signal is less than 1.44VDC.
If the
system controller demand is greater than 1.44VDC,
the unloader
This occurs when
below
18.5VDC.
Flash Code
for future use
in this condition
since the DSC cannot open the compressor
contactor. The DSC will energize the compressor
contactor and the
contacts
Control.
cycling
relay contacts
system
controller
demand
signal
is below
1.44VDC.
The
compressor
contactor
may have welded contacts or the contacts
may be mechanically
jammed. The compressor
will continue to run
no longer
1.44VDC.
causing
a T051 alert on the ComfortLink
results in a lockout and can only be reset by
The alarm
Flash Code 8 -- Compressor
Contactor Fault
This occurs when the compressor
current is detected
A locked rotor condition
in the compressor
is sensed by the DSC
on four consecutive
start ups. The DSC will de-energize
the
compressor
contactor
and unloader
solenoid and the alarm relay
will close
This code
or a wire broken.
Description
The ALERT code and alarm relay output are reset when the supply
voltage to the DSC rises above 19.5VAC.
10 -- DSC Red LED
Flash Codes
Action Taken
by Control
Reset
Method
Probable Cause
N/A
N/A
N/A
1
Flash
Reserved for Future Use
2
Flash
High Discharge Temperature
Compressor
shutdown
Automatic
Compressor discharge temperature
degrees F or the DTT is shorted.
3
Flash
Compressor
Compressor
shutdown
Automatic
Compressor's internal overload protector being open,
fuse or breaker open, power disconnected to compressor contactor, compressor power wiring not run through
DSC current transformer port or a compressor contactor
failure.
4
Flash
Locked Rotor
Compressor
lockout
Manual
5
Flash
Demand Signal Loss
Compressor
shutdown
Automatic
Signal wire may be disconnected or the system controller providing the signal may not be powered
6
Flash
Discharge Thermistor
Capacity Limited
Automatic
DTT may be missing, disconnected
7
Flash
Reserved for Future Use
8
Flash
Compressor
9
Flash
Low 24VAC Supply
Protector Trip
Fault
Contactor Fault
N/A
N/A
Four consecutive
is greater then 268
start ups with locked rotor.
or a wire broken
N/A
Keep capacity
at 15%
Automatic
Compressor contactor may have welded contacts or the
contacts may be mechanically jammed
Compressor
shutdown
Automatic
Bad connection
32
or transformer.
Economizer
Use
the unit
the
economizer
display
Scrolling
Verify
codes
cleared,
operation
Service
Test
of
and
steps
Scrolling
Marquee
correct
how
display,
Test
to
See
(See
Table
installed
section
test
the
11
and
11.)
site
using
the
Table
5).
The
using
the
general
using
the Serviee
2. Enter
needed
TEST
and turn ON test mode,
A
in order
to turn
ON the Service
password
3. Return
Test main
menu
on the
economizer
password
The
may be
default
level
of Serviee
digital
the calibration
opens
Test,
complete,
M.ANG,
6. Return
(Configuration
is being
implemented
11 -- Economizer
PROBLEM
Service
(as long as 5
the degree of rotation
should be greater
causing the T414 alert to clear. If the T414
to Serviee
the
economizer
Test-+TEST
damper
and turn
This will cause the unit to return to normal
OFF
than
alert
for other
test mode,
operation,
Analysis
POSSIBLE CAUSE
REMEDY
Indoor Fan is off.
Damper Does Not Move.
be
is
the calibration
procedure the actuator will
then open fully. After the calibration
is
does not clear, check
mechanical problems.
Table
for
and closes.
conmmnications
procedure
minutes). During
close fully and
is 1111.
to the main
value
positions.
To implement
the calibration
procedure,
change
E.CAL from OFF to ON. E.CAL will remain ON as long as
display.
Test,
an initial
--,ECON--,E.CTL
= 1 or 2). The economizer
calibration
procedure (Serviee Test-,IND.P-,E.CAL)
will reconfigure
the actuator
to the new fully closed
and fully open
analysis.
1. Enter
enter
Damper
Actuator
Out of Calibration"
alert will
generated.
This alert can only occur if the economizer
and
by
economizer
for
and
5. Because of a mechanical
problem with the economizer,
the
actuator might acquire a new degree of rotation which is
less than M.ANG.
If this occurs, a "T414 Economizer
any
are corrected
be verified
Table
for
submenu
make sure the economizer
economizer
per
conditions
may
Service
specify
causes,
to view
history
the INDP
ECON.
This will drive the economizer
damper
to the
specified position.
Continue to adjust the ECON value to
diagnostic
the
alarm
configurations
If alarms
(see
on
and
any
device
economizer
information
the economizer
mode
following
the
alarms
control
or accessories.
or a CCN
and
for
current
unique
requirements
service
A)
the
alarm
any
display
display
Appendix
Check
economizer
Marquee
status
(see
operation,
4. Enter
Troubleshooting
Check for proper VFD connections.
Check that
VFD is illuminated
and in Auto mode.
Unit is not configured for continuous
fan operation
and there are no cooling or heating demands.
Unit is in Unoccupied
heating or cooling.
mode and there is no call for
Tripped circuit breaker.
No power to the unit.
Unit is off via CCN command.
Actuator is unplugged
Unit is not configured
Outdoor-air
temperature
high temperature
lockout.
is above economizer
Outdoor-air
temperature
is below
temperature
lockout.
Communication
Damper
Economizer
to Minimum
Operation
Position.
is Limited
at motor or at economizer
for economizer.
loss to economizer
Outdoor-air
thermistor
Low suction
pressure
IAQ is controlling
Damper
Loss.
Does Not Return
Position.
Does Not Close
on Power
Outdoor Damper Does Not Fully Close
at 0% or Fully Open at 100%.
Economizer
is not a configured
minimum position
LEGEND
CCN
Carrier Comfort Network
IAQ
VFD
Indoor Air Quality
Variable Frequency Drive
board.
economizer
with a compressor.
damper
per the
Adjust the low temperature
lockout setting if it is
incorrect, otherwise, economizer
is operating
correctly.
Check wiring connections.
Identify the obstruction
and safely
is faulty.
problem
minimum
Unit is in Unoccupied
Economizer
to Minimum
low
Minimum position is set incorrectly.
Outdoor-air
temperature
is above economizer
high temperature
lockout.
is below
Check wiring connections.
Configure unit for economizer
instructions.
Adjust the high temperature
lockout setting if it is
incorrect, otherwise, economizer
is operating
correctly.
is jammed.
Outdoor-air
temperature
low temperature
lockout.
Economizer
Position is Less
Than Minimum Position.
economizer
board.
position.
Economizer
compressor
Adjust the
otherwise,
Adjust unit
otherwise,
mode.
remove.
Adjust minimum position setting.
Adjust the high temperature
lockout setting
if it is incorrect, otherwise, economizer
is
operating correctly.
Adjust the low temperature
lockout setting
if it is incorrect, otherwise, economizer
is
operating correctly.
Replace outdoor-air
thermistor.
is operating
problem.
correctly,
identify
IAQ settings if incorrect,
the economizer
is operating correctly.
occupied schedule if incorrect,
economizer
is operating correctly.
Damper is jammed.
Unit is operating under free cooling.
Identify the obstruction
and safely
Economizer
is operating correctly.
Damper
Identify the obstruction
and safely remove.
Remove actuator, flip it over and re-install.
Enter Service Test mode and run the Calibrate
Economizer
(E.CAL) procedure.
is jammed
Economizer
actuator
Unit is operating
or spring
return is backwards.
is out of calibration.
under free cooling.
Unit fan speed is offsetting the economizer
position to maintain proper ventilation.
33
minimum
Economizer
is operating
correctly.
Economizer
is operating
correctly.
remove.
Heating
Use
the
the unit
heating
Scrolling
status
Appendix
A)
Marquee
display
for
display
and
the
information
current
alarms
correct
any
causes.
configurations
per
alarms
Phase
Troubleshooting
and
conditions
on
alarm
history
(See
Table
installed
are corrected
stages
and
indoor
mode.
(See
Table
fan
may
be
heating
for
any
heating
Verify
the
codes
and
control
accessories.
operation
using
(see
Check
unique
or
and cleared,
by
alarm
any
to view
display
operation.
requirements
verified
device
diagnostic
the
12.)
site
or a CCN
heating
of
the
If
the
heat
Service
Test
5.)
Phase
Gas Heat (48PD Units Only)
See
Table
service
12 for general
analysis
the IGC board
(See
Table
of the
for any
gas heating
IGC
board
flashing
service
logic.
alarm
analysis.
Check
codes
the
See
Fig.
status
and correct
on
any causes.
13.)
Table
14 for
Variable
electric
heating
Frequency
service
analysis.
Drive (VFD) Troubleshooting
The VFD must be in "Auto" mode and when commanding it to
100% the voltage signal should be 10vdc across AI1 and AIGND.
Verify all parameters are correct to factory defaults. See Appendix
B for parameters and additional troubleshooting.
Loss Protection
LED STATUS
On Continuously
Phase Loss Protection
Blinking
The phase loss protection option will monitor the three-phase
electrical system to provide phase reversal and phase loss
protection.
Table
PROBLEM
Burners
Will
Not Ignite,
Off
12 -- Gas Heating
Service
Unit is not configured
Check heating
Marquee.
configurations
using
ComfortLink
Active alarm.
Check active alarms using ComfortLink_'
the IGC alert flash codes.
No power to unit.
Check power
No power to IGC.
Heaters off due to time guard to prevent
cycling,
Check fuses and plugs.
Check active alarms using ComfortLink_'
the IGC alert flash codes.
schedule
short
set point not calling
for
supply, fuses, wiring,
Check using ComfortLink
Scrolling
and circuit
_' Scrolling
_' Scrolling
Marquee
and
breakers.
Scrolling
Marquee
and
Marquee.
Check gas line for air and purge as necessary. After purging gas
line of air, allow gas to dissipate for at least 5 minutes before
attempting to re-light
unit.
Drain water and install drip.
Water in gas line.
Dirty air filters.
Gas input too low.
Replace air filters.
Check gas pressure
the Service section.
Occupancy
schedule set point set too low.
Unit undersized for load.
Check setpoints and adjust if necessary.
Decrease load or increase of size of unit.
Restricted
or low airflow.
Remove restriction, verify proper fan speed
SAT compared
to the SAT heating limits.
Too much
outdoor
Check economizer
position and configuration.
Adjust minimum
position if needed using ComfortLink
Scrolling Marquee. Verify
proper fan speed operation.
Check rotation of blower and temperature
rise of unit. Adjust as
needed.
Limit switch
Poor Flame
Characteristics,
Analysis
REMEDY
for heat.
No gas at main burners.
Heating,
FUNCTION
Relay contact closed (normal operation).
Relay contact open (phase loss or phase
reversal has occurred)
- No power will be
supplied to the control system.
24 vac control power not present (off).
CAUSE
Occupancy
Heating.
Inadequate
Protection
If the reverse rotation board senses any one of the three phase
inputs has no AC voltage, the relay will be de-energized (opening
its contact). This protection is always active as long as 24-vac
control voltage is applied, and is not affected by the self by-pass
flmction of the phase sequence monitoring flmction. However, in
the event of phase loss, the relay will be re-energized only if all
three phases are restored and the three phases are in the correct
sequence.
A red LED is provided to indicate the flmction of the board. See
the table below.
9 for
LED
Electric Heat (50PD Units Only)
See
Reversal
If the control senses an incorrect phase relationship, the relay (KI)
will be de-energized (opening its contact). If the phase relationship
is correct, the relay will be energized. The control has a self-bypass
flmction after a pre-set time. If the control determines that the three
phases stay in a correct relationship for 10 consecutive minutes, the
relay will stay energized regardless of the phase sequence of three
inputs as long as 24-vac control voltage is applied. This self-bypass
flmction will be reset if all three phases are restored in a phase loss
event.
cycles
air.
main burners.
Incomplete
combustion
(lack of combustion
air)
results in: Aldehyde odors, CO, sooting flame, or
floating flame.
at manifold.
Check all screws around
Tighten as necessary.
Cracked heat exchanger,
Unit is over-fired,
reduce
pressure.
Check vent for restriction.
Refer to gas valve adjustment
flue outlets
operation,
and burner
and check
compartment.
replace.
input.
Adjust
Clean
as necessary.
gas line or manifold
Check orifice to burner alignment.
Burners
Will
Not Turn Off,
Unit is in Minimum
on-time.
Check using ComfortLink_'
flash codes.
Unit running in Service Test mode.
Main gas valve stuck.
Marquee
and the IGC alert
Check using ComfortLink
_' Scrolling Marquee.
Turn off gas supply and unit power. Replace gas valve.
LEGEND
IGC
SAT
Scrolling
Integrated Gas Controller
Supply Air Temperature
34
in
I FLASH
_O_FED
- INDOOR
(HEATING)
FAN [_ELAY
2 _S
- OF_-NN
SW_rCH
3 _
- _
iNE_J_TES
FLAME
CLOSED
GAS
OF UME
]
FF-
SFJV_OR
WffH
VALVE
4 FL_..S
- L_IT SWITCH
CYCLED 4 _MES ON
CALL FK)R HEAT
t-HEATING
.{
I
5 _
(No _nJ_n- E_rK3N
',_ t5 L(_r2,KOLrF
mW"_tses) _
'Wf IGC
ON
FROM
- 1 MINUTE
BASE CONTROL
LOCK-ON BOARD
ENERGIZES
'W'
±
MOTOR FAULT
_nat f_rn _"te I_I
_
t
I
COMBUSTION RELAY ON IGC 18 ENERGIZED
Effect
1
t
J
7 FLASHES
ROLLObq"
- OF_F&NG
_TCH
OF
_
_
CORRECT _
TO TE'RM_,L
'Jl' ON
8_-_
FAULT
I
i
9 FLASHES
LOCKOUT
- SOFTWARE
I
[
IGC H_.4HVOLTAGE
TRAt,L_F.R
CREATES A
'lO,(X_O
VO£T SPARK FOR 5
8ECONOS
OFF C4.8 VALVE AND SPARK
IGC SAFETY LOGIC WILL 8_JT
VALVE FOR 5 8_X_
r
VHo@
Yes
EXCHANGER
H_8 8E8_
REDUG_E) DUE TO L_
TRIPS) E_C WILL _
BLOWER
8V_TCH
RELAY
SUBTRACT 5 _
(C_
ANC/FHER 5 _)
FROM
FAN ON TIME DELAY
Yes
(5 N.AS__S
OF LED)
No
.½
LEGEND
IDM -- Induced-Draft
iGC -- Integrated
NOTE: Thermostat
"AUTO" position.
Motor
t
Gas Unit Controller
Fan Switch
_
STOP&
SAFETY LOG_ S_
OFF GAS V_
t
]
in the
(DFJ.AYEXTENDED BY 5 Sa_CON{3_3FOR EACH LIMIT8-'Wff{_._I
TRIP
45 SECOND
B_OWER
IMP'LAY
MAXIMUM
DELAY: 8H_
3 MINUTES)
(07014
Fig. 9 - IGC Service
Analysis
35
Logic
Table
LED
FLASH
CODE
ACTION TAKEN
CONTROL
DESCRIPTION
On
Normal
Off
Hardware
1 Flash
13 --
Operation
IGC
Board
BY
LED
RESET
Codes
METHOD
__
Failure
Alarm
PROBABLE
__
No gas heating.
__
--
Loss of power to the IGC. Check 5 amp fuse on
IGC, power to unit, 24V circuit breaker, transformer,
and wiring to the IGC.
High temperature
limit switch opens during heat
exchanger warm-up period before fan-on delay
expires.
High temperature
limit switch opens within
10 minutes of heat call (W) Off.
See Limit Switch Fault.
Indoor Fan On/Off Delay
Modified
5 seconds subtracted from
On delay,
5 seconds added to Off
delay (3 min max).
Power reset.
2 Flashes
Limit Switch
Gas valve and igniter Off.
Indoor fan and inducer On.
Limit switch closed,
heat call (W) Off.
3 Flashes
Flame Sense Fault
Indoor fan and inducer On.
Flame sense normal.
Power reset for LED reset,
4 Flashes
Four Consecutive
Fault
No gas heating.
Heat call (W) Off.
Power reset for LED reset,
5 Flashes
Ignition
No gas heating.
Heat call (W) Off.
Power reset for LED reset.
6 Flashes
Induced
If heat off: no gas heating.
If heat on: gas valve Off
and inducer On.
Inducer sense normal,
heat call (W) Off.
7 Flashes
Rol!out Switch
Gas valve and igniter Off.
Indoor fan and inducer On.
Power reset.
8 Flashes
Internal
No gas heating.
Power reset.
9 Flashes
Temporary
No gas heating.
1 hour auto reset, or
3ower reset,
Fault
Limit Switch
Fault
Draft Motor Fault
Lockout
Control
Lockout
Software
Lockout
CAUSE
or
or
High temperature
limit switch is open. Check the
operation of the indoor (evaporator) fan motor.
Ensure that the supply-air temperature
rise is within
the range on the unit nameplate.
Check wiring and
limit switch operation.
The IGC sensed a flame when the gas valve should
be c!osed. Check wiring, flame sensor, and gas
valve operation.
4 consecutive
limit switch faults within a single call
for heat. See Limit Switch Fault.
Unit unsuccessfully attempted ignition for 15 minutes.
Check igniter and flame sensor electrode spacing,
gaps, etc. Check flame sense and igniter wiring.
Check gas valve operation and gas supply.
Inducer sense On when heat call Off, or inducer
sense Off when heat call On. Check wiring, voltage,
and operation of IGC motor. Check speed sensor
wiring to IGC.
Rollout switch has opened. Check gas valve
operation. Check induced-draft
blower whee! is
properly secured to motor shaft.
IGC has sensed internal hardware or software error.
If fault is not cleared by resetting 24 v power,
replace the IGC.
Electrical interference is disrupting the IGC
software.
LEGEND
IGC
- Integrated
LED
- Light-Emitting
Gas [7nit Control
Diode
NOTES:
1. There
2.
is a 3-second
If more
3. Alarm
than
codes
pause
one alarm
on the IGC
between
code
exists,
alarm
code
displays.
all applicable
will be lost if power
alarm
to the unit
codes
will
Table
PROBLEM
Heat Will Not Turn On.
be displayed
in numerical
14 -- Electric
Heat
CAUSE
Unit is not configured for heat.
Check power supply, fuses, wiring, and circuit breakers.
Check using ComfortLink _' Scrolling Marquee.
or minimum
Check using ComfortLink
Service Test mode off.
No 24 vac at heater contactor.
Heating.
on heater.
Check setpoints and adjust if necessary.
Decrease load or increase size of heater.
outdoor
cycles
Unit is in minimum
Power off unit and remove high voltage
resistance of element, replace if open.
wires.
Check
Remove restriction, verify proper fan speed operation,
check SAT compared to the SAT heating limits.
air.
Check economizer
position and configuration.
minimum position if needed using ComfortLink
Marquee. Verify proper fan speed operation.
heaters.
Check rotation of blower, temperature
minimum airflow. Adjust as needed.
heat on-time.
Check using ComfortLink
Check using ComfortLink
schedule
Turn
Check transformer,
circuit breaker, auto-reset
limit
switches on heater, and manual-reset
limit switches (LS)
on indoor fan housing.
Check minimum airflow. Check limit switch when it is cool,
replace if not.
Occupancy schedule set point set too low.
Heat undersized for load.
Restricted or low airflow.
Occupancy
Heating.
set point still calling for
Unit running in Service Test mode.
Heater contactor failed.
_' Scrolling
_' Scrolling
Supply Air Temperature
36
and
Adjust
_' Scrolling
rise of unit, and
Marquee.
Marquee.
Check using ComfortLink _' Scrolling Marquee.
Power off unit. Check contactor and replace if closed.
LEGEND
SAT
Marquee.
Replace air filters.
Limit switch
Not Turn Off,
_' Scrolling
Dirty air filters.
Bad heater elements.
Too much
Heat Will
limit switch
Analysis
REMEDY
No power to unit.
Unit is in minimum heat off-time,
cool- heat changeover
time.
Heat forced off in Service Test.
Open temperature
Service
Check heating configurations
using ComfortLink
_
Scrolling Marquee.
Check active alarms using ComfortLink
T,, Scrolling
Marquee.
Active alarm.
Inadequate
sequence.
is interrupted.
Thermistor
Troubleshooting
The electronic control uses thermistors to sense temperatures used
to control operation of the unit. Resistances at various temperatures
are listed in Table 15-17. Thermistor pin connection points are
shown in the Maior System Components section. The general
locations of the thermistors are shown the Maior System
Components section.
Air Temperatures
Air temperatures are measured with 10 kilo-ohm thermistors. This
includes supply-air temperature (SAT), outdoor-air temperature
(OAT), space temperature sensors (T55, T56, T58), and return air
temperature (RAT).
The supply air temperature (SAT), return air temperature (RAT)
and outdoor air temperature (OAT) thermistors use a snap-mount to
attach through the unit sheet metal panels. The snap-mount tabs
must be flattened on the tip end of the sensor to release for removal
from the panel. (See Fig. 10.) To reinstall, make sure the
snap-mount tabs extend out.
(07016
Fig. 11 - Saturated
,,
",,,
!
Thermistor/Temperature
Condensing Temperature
Location
Sensor
Thermistor
Check
A high quality digital volt-ohmmeter is required to perform this
check.
/\
I
ix),
Connect the digital voltmeter across the appropriate thermistor
terminals at the J8 terminal strip on the Main Base Board (see
Maior System Components section).
Using the voltage reading obtained, read the sensor temperature
from Table 15-17.
%
', ','_ \
_d,',,/
\ '-\\ %,,
"%'7"g
\
", ",-',',""L/"',,
\
\
%
\
X
JX
\
\
\\
X
_
\x._=j
\_X\\ %%%%
\\
\\
(07015
Fig. 10 - SAT, RAT and OAT Thermistor
Mounting
Refrigerant Temperatures
Condenser
thermistors.
coil temperatures
These measurements
are measured
with
5 kilo-ohm
provide an approximate saturated
condensing
temperature for each circuit (SCT.A).
Fig. 11 shows
the factory locations
for the SCT thermistors on 48/50PD
units.
Ensure that thermistors are placed at the correct location and are
snapped
between
securely
over the return bend
the thermistor and the tube.
so that contact
is made
To check thermistor accuracy, measure temperature at probe
location
with
an
accurate
thermocouple-type
temperature-measuring instrument. Insulate thermocouple to avoid
ambient temperatures from influencing reading. Temperature
measured by thermocouple
and temperature determined from
thermistor voltage reading should be close, within 5°F, if care was
taken in applying thermocouple and taking readings.
If a more accurate check is required, unit must be shut down and
thermistor removed and checked at a known temperature (freezing
point or boiling point of water) using either voltage drop measured
across thermistor at the J8 terminal, or by determining the
resistance with unit shut down and thermistor
disconnected from
J8. Compare the values determined with the value read by the
control in the Temperatures mode using the Scrolling Marquee
display.
37
Sensor
Trim
Corrective offsets can be applied to the space temperature and the
supply air temperature
sensor readings. These corrections are set in
the Configuration--,TRIM
menu for the display,
or in the
Maintenance--,TRIM
section for available
table for CCN. See the Indoor Air Quality
adjustments
to IAQ and OAQ sensor readings.
The space temperature
calibration
temperature
may
value
be corrected
by entering
either a
in SPT.C, or an offset temperature
value in SPT.T. The supply-air
temperature
may be corrected by
entering either a calibration
temperature
value in SAT.C, or an
offset temperature
value in SAT.T. The return-air
temperature
may
be corrected by entering either a calibration
temperature
value in
RAT.C or an offset temperature
value in RAT.T. Temperature
corrections should only be made if sensor readings are compared
an accurate reference temperature
measurement
device.
to
Troubleshooting
Transducer
The electronic control uses suction pressure transducers
to measure
the suction pressure of the refrigerant circuits. The pressure/voltage
characteristics
of these transducers
are in shown in Table 18, the
5vdc power is applied to legs A and B of the transducer and legs B
to C represent the voltage drop shown in the table. The accuracy of
these transducers
can be verified
by connecting
an accurate
pressure gauge to the second refrigerant port in the suction line.
Forcing
Inputs and Outputs
Many variables
may have
directly at the local display.
their value forced
This can be useful
through
CCN or
during diagnostic
testing and also during operation,
typically as part of an advanced
third party control scheme. Input and output points that may be
forced are indicated as 'forcible' in the write status column of the
display
and CCN tables.
If the user needs to force a variable, follow the same process as
when editing a configuration
parameter. A forced variable will be
displayed
on the Scrolling
Marquee with a blinking
period "."
following
indicated
its value. A forced
with a blinking "f'.
value on Navigator
accessory
A forced value on CCN devices
TM
is
is
indicated
with
"Control"
if forced
at the unit display,
or
"Supervisor"
if forced via CCN. To remove a local force with the
Scrolling Marquee,
press the up-arrow
IMPORTANT:
select the point with the ENTER key and then
and down-arrow
keys simultaneously.
In the case of a control
effect at the time of power
power
reset,
any force in
reset will be cleared.
38
Table
15 -- Temperature
RAT,
TEMP
(F)
-25
-24
-23
-22
-21
-20
-19
-18
-17
-16
-15
-14
-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-I
0
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
I0
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5O
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
6O
VOLTAGE
DROP (V)
4.758
4.750
4.741
4.733
4.724
4.715
4.705
4.696
4.686
4.676
4.665
4.655
4.644
4.633
4.621
4.609
4.597
4.585
4.572
4.560
4.546
4.533
4.519
4.505
4.490
4.476
4.461
4.445
4.429
4.413
4.397
4.380
4.363
4.346
4.328
4.310
4.292
4.273
4.254
4.235
4.215
4.195
4.174
4.153
4.132
4.111
4.089
4.067
4.044
4.021
3.998
3.975
3.951
3.927
3.903
3.878
3.853
3.828
3.802
3.776
3.750
3.723
3.697
3.670
3.654
3.615
3.587
3.559
3.531
3.503
3.474
3.445
3.416
3.387
3.357
3.328
3.298
3.268
3.238
3.208
3.178
3.147
3.117
3.086
3.056
3.025
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
196,453
189,692
183,300
177,000
171,079
165,238
159,717
154,344
149,194
144,250
139,443
134,891
130,402
126,183
122,018
118,076
114,236
110,549
107,006
103,558
100,287
97,060
94,020
91,019
88,171
85,396
82,729
80,162
77,662
75,286
72,940
70,727
68,542
66,465
64,439
62,491
60,612
58,781
57,039
55,319
53,693
52,086
50,557
49,065
47,627
46,240
44,888
43,598
42,324
41,118
39,926
38,790
37,681
36,610
35,577
34,569
33,606
32,654
31,752
30,860
30,009
29,177
28,373
27,597
26,838
26,113
25,396
24,715
24,042
23,399
22,770
22,161
21,573
20,998
20,447
19,903
19,386
18,874
18,384
17,904
17,441
16,991
16,552
16,131
15,714
15,317
(°F) vs Resistance/Voltage
OAT, SAT, and SPT Thermistors
TEMP
(F)
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
7O
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
8O
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
9O
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
IO0
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
VOLTAGE
DROP (V)
2.994
2.963
2.932
2.901
2.870
2.839
2.808
2.777
2.746
2.715
2.684
2.653
2.622
2.592
2.561
2.530
2.500
2.470
2.439
2.409
2.379
2.349
2.319
2.290
2.260
2.231
2.202
2.173
2.144
2.115
2.087
2.059
2.030
2.003
1.975
1.948
1.921
1.894
1.867
1.841
1.815
1.789
1.763
1.738
1.713
1.688
1.663
1.639
1.615
1.591
1.567
1.544
1.521
1.498
1.475
1.453
1.431
1.409
1.387
1.366
1.345
1.324
1.304
1.284
1.264
1.244
1.225
1.206
1.187
1.168
1.150
1.132
1.114
1.096
1.079
1.062
1.045
1.028
1.012
0.996
0.980
0.965
0.949
0.934
0.919
0.905
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
14,925
14,549
14,180
13,824
13,478
13,139
12,814
12,493
12,187
11,884
11,593
11,308
11,031
10,764
10,501
10,249
10,000
9,762
9,526
9,300
9,078
8,862
8,653
8,448
8,251
8,056
7,869
7,685
7,507
7,333
7,165
6,999
6,838
6,683
6,530
6,383
6,238
6,098
5,961
5,827
5,698
5,571
5,449
5,327
5,210
5,095
4,984
4,876
4,769
4,666
4,564
4,467
4,370
4,277
4.185
4,096
4,008
3,923
3,840
3,759
3,681
3,603
3,529
3,455
3,383
3,313
3,244
3,178
3,112
3,049
2,986
2,926
2,866
2,809
2,752
2,697
2,643
2,590
2,539
2,488
2,439
2,391
2,343
2,297
2,253
2,209
39
Drop Values
(10K at 25°C
for
Resistors)
TEMP
(F)
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
VOLTAGE
DROP (V)
0.890
0.876
0.862
0.848
0.835
0.821
0.808
0.795
0.782
0.770
0.758
0.745
0.733
0.722
0.710
0.699
0.687
0.676
0.666
0.655
0.645
0.634
0.624
0.614
0.604
0.595
0.585
0.576
0.567
0.558
0.549
0.540
0.532
0.523
0.515
0.507
0.499
0.491
0.483
0.476
0.468
0.461
0.454
0.447
0.440
0.433
0.426
0.419
0.413
0.407
0.400
0.394
0.388
0.382
0.376
0.370
0.365
0.359
0.354
0.349
0.343
0.338
0.333
0.328
0.323
0.318
0.314
0.309
0.305
0.300
0.296
0.292
0.288
0.284
0.279
0.275
0.272
0.268
0.264
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
2,166
2,124
2,083
2,043
2,003
1,966
1,928
1,891
1,855
1,820
1,786
1,752
1,719
1,687
1,656
1,625
1,594
1,565
1,536
1,508
1,480
1,453
1,426
1,400
1,375
1,350
1,326
1,302
1,278
1,255
1,233
1,211
1,190
1,169
1,148
1,128
1,108
1,089
1,070
1,052
1,033
1,016
998
981
964
947
931
915
900
885
870
855
841
827
814
800
787
774
762
749
737
725
714
702
691
680
670
659
649
639
629
620
610
601
592
583
574
566
557
TEMP
(F)
-25
-24
-23
-22
-21
-20
-19
-18
-17
-16
-15
-14
-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Table
16 -- Temperature
VOLTAGE
DROP (V)
3.699
3.689
3.679
3.668
3.658
3.647
3.636
3.624
3.613
3.601
3.588
3.576
3.563
3.550
3.536
3.523
3.509
3.494
3.480
3.465
3.450
3.434
3.418
3.402
3.386
3.369
3.352
3.335
3.317
3.299
3.281
3.262
3.243
3.224
3.205
3.185
3.165
3.145
3.124
3.103
3.082
3.060
3.038
3.016
2.994
2.972
2.949
2.926
2.903
2.879
2.856
2.832
2.808
2.784
2.759
2.735
2.710
2.685
2.660
2.634
2.609
2.583
2.558
2.532
2.506
2.480
2.454
2.428
2.402
2.376
2.349
2.323
2.296
2.270
2.244
2.217
2.191
2.165
2.138
2.112
2.086
2.060
2.034
2.008
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
98,010
94,707
91,522
88,449
85,486
82,627
79,871
77,212
74,648
72,175
69,790
67,490
65,272
63,133
61,070
59,081
57,162
55,311
53,526
51,804
50,143
48,541
46,996
45,505
44,066
42,679
41,339
40,047
38,800
37,596
36,435
35,313
34,231
33,185
32,176
31,202
30,260
29,351
28,473
27,624
26,804
26,011
25,245
24,505
23,789
23,096
22,427
21,779
21,153
20,547
19,960
19,393
18,843
18,311
17,796
17,297
16,814
16,346
15,892
15,453
15,027
14,614
14,214
13,826
13,449
13,084
12,730
12,387
12,053
11,730
11,416
11,112
10,816
10,529
10,250
9,979
9,717
9,461
9,213
8,973
8,739
8,511
8,291
8,076
(°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage
TEMP (F)
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
Drop Values
VOLTAGE
DROP (V)
1.982
1.956
1.930
1.905
1.879
1.854
1.829
1.804
1.779
1.754
1.729
1.705
1.681
1.656
1.632
1.609
1.585
1.562
1.538
1.516
1.493
1.470
1.448
1.426
1.404
1.382
1.361
1.340
1.319
1.298
1.278
1.257
1.237
1.217
1.198
1.179
1.160
1.141
1.122
1.104
1.086
1.068
1.051
1.033
1.016
0.999
0.983
0.966
0.950
0.934
0.918
0.903
0.888
0.873
0.858
0.843
0.829
0.815
0.801
0.787
0.774
0.761
0.748
0.735
0.723
0.710
0.698
0.686
0.674
0.663
0.651
0.640
0.629
0.618
0.608
0.597
0.587
0.577
0.567
0.557
0.548
0.538
0.529
0.520
for SCT
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
7,866
7,665
7,468
7,277
7,091
6,911
6,735
6,564
6,399
6,238
6,081
5,929
5,781
5,637
5,497
5,361
5,229
5,101
4,976
4,855
4,737
4,622
4,511
4,403
4,298
4,196
4,096
4,000
3,906
3,814
3,726
3,640
3,556
3,474
3,395
3,318
3,243
3,170
3,099
3,031
2,964
2,898
2,835
2,773
2,713
2,655
2,597
2,542
2,488
2,436
2,385
2,335
2,286
2,239
2,192
2,147
2,103
2,060
2,018
1,977
1,937
1,898
1,860
1,822
1,786
1,750
1,715
1,680
1,647
1,614
1,582
1,550
1,519
1,489
1,459
1,430
1,401
1,373
1,345
1,318
1,291
1,265
1,240
1,214
40
Sensors
(5K at 25°C
TEMP (F)
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
Resistors)
VOLTAGE
DROP (V)
0.511
0.502
0.494
0.485
0.477
0.469
0.461
0.453
0.445
0.438
0.430
0.423
0.416
0.408
0.402
0.395
0.388
0.381
0.375
0.369
0.362
0.356
0.350
0.344
0.339
0.333
0.327
0.322
0.317
0.311
0.306
0.301
0.296
0.291
0.286
0.282
0.277
0.272
0.268
0.264
0.259
0.255
0.251
0.247
0.243
0.239
0.235
0.231
0.228
0.224
0.220
0.217
0.213
0.210
0.206
0.203
0.200
0.197
0.194
0.191
0.188
0.185
0.182
0.179
0.176
0.173
0.171
0.168
0.165
0.163
0.160
0.158
0.155
0.153
0.151
0.148
0.146
0.144
0.142
0.140
0.138
0.135
0.133
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
1,190
1,165
1,141
1,118
1,095
1,072
1,050
1,029
1,007
986
965
945
925
906
887
868
850
832
815
798
782
765
750
734
719
705
690
677
663
650
638
626
614
602
591
581
570
561
551
542
533
524
516
508
501
494
487
480
473
467
461
456
450
445
439
434
429
424
419
415
410
405
401
396
391
386
382
377
372
367
361
356
350
344
338
332
325
318
311
304
297
289
282
Table 17 -- Temperature
vs Resistance
Values for the DTT Thermistor
(86K at 25 °C Resistors)
Degree
C
Degree
F
Resistance
(k Ohms)
- 40
- 40
2889.60
- 65
- 61
2087.22
- 30
-25
- 20
- 15
- 22
-16
- 4
5
23
363.99
10
15
20
25
50
59
68
77
55
60
65
161
140
149
10.79
85
185
9.20
90
194
7.87
95
206
6.77
1 O0
212
5.85
105
221
5.09
110
260
4.45
115
269
3.87
120
248
3.65
125
257
2.92
130
266
2.58
165
275
2.28
140
284
2.02
145
296
1.80
150
602
1.59
155
311
1.39
160
620
1.25
165
329
1.12
170
368
1.01
175
647
0.92
180
356
0.86
86.00
56.16
122
176
107.44
95
50
12.76
80
165.14
35
116
15.07
167
171.17
69.28
45
158
75
218.41
86
104
(k Ohms)
70
280.82
30
40
Resistance
627.28
- 5
41
F
864.72
475.74
5
Degree
1121.44
14
62
C
1522.20
- 10
0
Degree
45.81
37.58
60.99
25.68
21.40
17.91
41
Table
PRESSURE
(psig)
0
2
VOLTAGE
DROP (V)
0.465
18 -- Pressure
(psig) vs. Voltage
PRESSURE
(psig)
68
Drop Values
for Suction
Pressure
Transducers
VOLTAGE
DROP (V)
1.135
PRESSURE
(psig)
136
VOLTAGE
DROP (V)
1.804
PRESSURE
204
2.474
1.824
206
2.493
208
2.513
210
2.533
(psig)
VOLTAGE
DROP
4
0.485
0.505
70
72
1.154
1.174
138
140
6
0.524
74
1.194
142
1.844
1.863
8
0.544
0.564
76
78
1.214
1.233
144
146
1.883
1.903
212
2.553
214
2.572
80
82
1.253
1.273
148
150
1.922
216
2.592
14
0.583
0.603
218
2.612
16
0.623
84
1.292
152
1.942
1.962
220
2.631
18
0.642
0.662
86
88
1.312
1.332
154
156
1.982
2.001
222
2.651
224
2.671
90
92
1.351
1.371
158
160
2.021
226
2.690
24
0.682
0.702
228
2.710
26
0.721
94
1.391
162
2.041
2.060
230
2.730
28
0.741
0.761
96
98
1.410
1.430
164
166
2.080
2.100
232
2.749
234
2.769
100
102
1.450
1.470
168
170
2.119
236
2.789
34
0.780
0.800
238
2.809
36
0.820
104
1.489
172
2.139
2.159
240
2.828
38
0.839
0.859
106
108
1.509
1.529
174
176
2.178
2.198
242
2.848
244
2.868
110
112
1.548
1.568
178
180
2.218
246
2.887
44
0.879
0.898
248
2.907
46
0.918
114
1.588
182
2.237
2.257
250
2.927
48
0.938
0.958
116
118
1.607
1.627
184
186
2.277
2.297
252
2.946
254
2.966
120
122
1.647
1.666
188
190
2.316
256
2.986
54
0.977
0.997
258
3.005
56
1.017
124
1.686
192
2.336
2.356
260
3.025
58
1.036
1.056
126
128
1.706
1.726
194
196
2.375
2.395
262
3.045
264
3.065
130
132
1.745
1.765
198
200
2.415
266
3.084
64
1.076
1.095
268
3.104
66
1.115
134
1.785
202
2.434
2.454
270
3.124
10
12
2O
22
30
32
40
42
50
52
60
62
MAJOR
General
SYSTEM
COMPONENTS
The
48/50PD
single
package
rooftop
units
contain
ComfortLink
.... electronic
control
system
that
monitors
operations
of the rooftop.
The control system is composed
several
options
See Fig.
48/50PD.
thermistor
main control components
and available
or field-installed
accessories as listed in
12-14 for the control and power
Fig. 15 shows the layout of the control
and transducer locations for the 48/50PD.
the
all
of
factory-installed
sections below.
schematics
box, unit,
for
and
42
(V)
R C
(ECB)
J2
J1
T_AN2
01
J
[ 48HG503976
I 4.0
C08582
Fig. 12 - 48PD
Control
Wiring
43
Schematic
1
POWER EXHAUST J
FlOP/ACCESSORY
TBI
Jll
4
LSa
TRA_I
81
Jll
2
B
J10
19}
_k<_
I_ _ r.....................................
_i:;_-, .Fi.L.;
111........
_-,
_
2'"_,'?_ '_'_
÷
I ........................................................
RED
)
T
TO MBf_J7 9 v
................
............
GRY
BL_.....
BL}{
...............
L_RN--
-G>>
CO.TRO.
.................
YEL
L
_ SWITCHES
4. 5 AND
70_
GRNI
_ QUIP
[
G_D
4.8HG503977
4.0
C08583
Fig. 13 - 50PD
Control
Wiring
44
Schematic
1
:
NACR
] D SCON ECTI
S[D
_
,SEE
ncn.
/
v
i
"
BLNI
_
/
" I_
_y
KE2_YE[
:
:FLOP
_PHASE L_S
]_OTECTI_
U.,
......................
..... ...............................
/
I
',i
_K
_
D_K
"
/
...........
I
.
_f3U
I
/
;
/
Y[!I
;
I
CCHR
t
/
_
{_) .........................
I1 ....................................................................................................................................................
B U
IFC
_
..--J
_
\I RANI
vLVL}Kl
......................
YEL_i
O; C
460V
OILY]
/
L_(
460V
] >_i [{
Y
Y(
5>
_
ONL Y _</_<_
R/}
DLK
7J
/
fIR M
_-_
L
........................................
[
/
CAP1
.
_
.................
/; 0
/1s0_A_OR '
......................
_I'K _]
............
DRN Z:I ) ORM
DLK
.........................
Y .......... YEL_
II
I
I I
'"'
T
+
-024v
/
SCHEMATC
_52
AMPS)
BK
.................................
TRAN2
........
.....
w._.._,._._
..............
:B'' A_DLK_7_
_--"
I _'
[_
b
.................
i
UL
_/
LU
y
/_:_
I/Q_ L/_
_Fx£/
....
_
/
/
_-
_DLK
m[/,,_
"_" L
J-_
I{_tI_BLK
P:MI
/
_
....
B KT(_
YELl <RSl
I
_vr_l
P_H
_
I_BLU_
/
>MI
_BIK
\ ..... ])
_-_
I
_
YELl
I
P:MH
CAPS
_
FlOP/ACCESSORY
_
ONI Y
(32
\
_S
@<_<_,_
ib;_==========================
I
..............................
/rocB
@
P_C2
460V
OT
ON ,¢-J
20D/230,
Yf L =
ONLY
AMPS)
LEGEND
IERMINAI {MARKED>
TERMINAL (UNMARKED)
TERMINALBLOCK
FACTORY WIRING
FIELD CONTROL WIRING
.........................FIELD POWEBWIRING
ACCESSORY
OR OPTIONAL
WIRING
TO INDICAIE
COMMON
POTENI_A!
ONLY:
NOI TO REPRESENT WIRING
A
AUXI
C
CAP
CB
CON
CCNR
CCN
COMP
CS
BS¢
BTT
ED
EBB
fS
RU
GND
GN
NPS
I
IAQ
IBM
i_C
/fM
IGC
INV
[EN
IS
LSM
MBB
OAO
OAT
_
_BLKH
YFI
I
....
_
i i iU_TNV_I
......................
I/]_-
..........................................
'll
{_}
o
_
BLK
--
K
CONVERIENCE'
_BK
/
.......................
J ]..................................................................................................................................
A/vw7
/ CCB AT
_l
_
BL_
OUTLETI
L?,
I
I
208/230,460-3-60
.............................................
.................................
LK
:::::
01_I_DLK
C05,C06
I ................
115V
BOX DOOR
fIELD
..................
_
" "
PP Y .............
K
SU L
_l'm
ROP--_
• _J
_
NOfW_OWERED,
_
::: _::
;
PD
YI
L
.
_Nu
_
I
£1_#
LA EL
............
L
GND
J
EQUIP
/
81U
WIll
:RV, L:CIRI¢
FAT
_OP/
_
ACCY OALY
_
:
........
.....................i'i
_>
48/50
NK
-- ,=
_
:_Loo
]
_-
SCHEMATIC
COMFORTL
:
.................
IUPP L
POWER
C¥
:>
CIRCUIT A
WODULATION DOARD
COMPRESSOR CONTACT@
CAPACITOR
CIRCUIT BREAKER
CRANKCASE HEATER
CRANKCASE HEATER RELAY
CARRIER COMFORT NETWORK
COMPRESSOR {DIGITAL}
CURRRNT SENSOR
DIGITAL SCROLL CONTROLLER
DISCHARGE [EMPERATURE THERMISTER
ENTNALPY CONTROL
ECONOMIZER CONTROL BOARD
ELAME SENSOR
fDSE
GROUND
GAS VALVE
NIGH PRESSURE SWITCH
IGNI{OR
INDOOR AIR QUALITY
INDUCED DRAFT MOTOR
INDOOR fAN CONTACTOR
INDOOR fAN MOIOR
INTEGRATED GAS CONTROIL_R
ADJUSTABLE SPFFD AC MOTOR DRIVE
LOCAL EOUIPMENI NETWORK
L!MI[
SW!{CN
lIMIT SWITCH MANUAl RESET
MAIN BASE BOARD
OUIDOOR AIR OUAL[TY
OUIDOOR AER /{MPERAIUR!
Ol:C
OFM
PEC
PEN
PF
P[
OT
RAT
RS
SAT
SCT
SSP
TB
TRAN
UC
NOTES:
I
If ANY Of TBE ORIGINAL WIRE FURNISHED
MUST DE REPLACED, IT MUST BE REPLACED
WITH TYPE 90°C OR [{S EOUWAIENT
2 THREE PHASE MOTORS ARE PROTECTED UNDER
PRIMARY SINGLE _KASING CONDITIONS
5 USE COPPER CONDUCTORSONLY
4 RED JUMPER WIRE MDSI DE ADDED BETWEEN
R AND W] ROB SPACE TENPFRATURE MODE
AND TFMPORAR]LY DURING SERVICE-TES!
MODE WHEN IHE HEATERS NEED TO OP#RATE
5 THAN1 AND 2 ARE WIRED FOR 23BY ON 2081230v
UNITS
IF UNIT IS TO BE BUN WITH 2OBV POWER
SUPPLY, DISCONNECT BLK WERE FROM 25or
TERMINAl. AND CONNEC[ TO 2OOV TERMIRA!
SFE
CONTROL SCNFMATIC
BC
48
OUTDOOR PAN CONTACTON
OUTDOOR FAN MO[OR
POWER EXHAUST CONTACIOR
POWER EXHAUST MOTOR
PLUGGED FILTER
PLUG
QUADRUPLE TERMINAl
RETURN AIR TEMPRHATUNE
ROLLOUT SWIT¢I!
SUPPLY AIR TEMPERAIURE
SATURATED CONDENSING IEMP
SATURATED SUCTION PRESSURE
TERMINAL BOARD
TRANSFORMER
UNLOADER COlE
THERMOSTAT/IOC MARKINGS
BM
BLOWER NO/OR
C
CONNON
CW
COMBUSTION MOTOR
G
FAR
iFO
INDOOR FAN ON
LI
LENE I
R
THERMOSTAT POWER
RT
POWER SUPPLY
SS
SPEED SENSOR
SERES ONLY
GAS SECTION ONIY
(48 SERES>
W
Wl
THER4OSTAT
Isl
SIAGE OF
HEA
AING
r
wR
x
Y1
Y2
2n_ STAGE OF /_EAHNG
ALARM OUTPUT
1st SIAGE OF COOLENG
2nd SIAGE OF COOL NG
_CONVEN
:
OUI
....POWRD
_
[£{:] E ]
NCI _
_:
C C I......
I 48HG504029I&O.....
(:08584
Fig. 14 - 48/50PD
Power Wiring
Schematic
45
and Legend
D]:T
AND
UC LOCAIION
RAT
UNIT
CONTROL
BOX
TRAN
1
i ......
: _
//
TRAN
2
_"i¸
Z{:
CO MPRESSOR
[
7
-_
CONTACTO
ECB
......
CURRENT
SENSOR
AUXI
DSC
(:08657
Fig. 15 - Typical
Unit Component
46
Arrangement
Main
Base Board
(MBB)
See Fig. 16 and Table 19. The MBB is the center of the
ComfortLink
control system. It contains the maior portion of the
operating
software
and controls the operation
of the unit. The
MBB continuously
monitors
input/output
channel
information
received from its inputs and from the Economizer
Control Board
(ECB). The MBB
The MBB
and
other
receives
also receives
discrete
or
inputs from thermistors
the Current
digital
Sensor inputs
inputs.
RED LED - STATUS
The
temperature (SPT) from either a T-55, T-56 or T-58 device and
space temperature
offset (SPTO)
from
a T-56
device.
See
Field-Installed
Accessories
section. The MBB controls 9 relays.
IMPORTANT:
The
Main
instance
that
is factory
Base
Board
(MBB)
set to '1.'
has a 3-position
Do not
change
this
setting.
and transducers.
for compressors
MBB
reads
space
YELLOW LED CCN (CARRIER COMFORT
GREEN LED -
_
jumper
LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK)
INSTANCE JUMPER
NETWORK)
(SET TO 1)
CEPL130346-01
L_
STATUS
J10
©
J7
I
I
I
J9
C 07026
Fig. 16 - Main
Base Board
47
(MBB)
Table
19-- MBBConnections
DISPLAY
NAME
POINT DESCRIPTION
SENSOR LOCATION
TYPE OF I/O
CONNECTION
PIN NUMBER
INPUTS
Input power from TRAN1
control box
24 VAC
J1, 1-3
IGC Fan Request
gas section
switch input
J6, 4
switch input
J6, 6
switch input
switch input
J7, 4
J7, 6
FDWN
Fire shutdown
switch
HUM
Space Humidity switch
Digital Scroll Unloader
C.ALM
Scroll Compressor
CMRA
Compressor
Alarm
switch input
J7, 8
switch input
J7, 10
FIL.S
Filter status switch
Compressor A1 Current Sensor
Space temperature (T55/56)
SPTO
Space temperature
SAT
SCT.A
RAT
FAN.S
space
A Feedback
CS.A1
SPT
OAT
supply/return/space
offset (T56)
indoor fan section
switch input
J9, 2-3
control box
space
0-5vdc digital input
1Ok thermistor
J9, 10-12
J8, 1-2
space
1Ok thermistor
J8, 2-3
Outdoor air temperature
outdoor coil support
1Ok thermistor
J8, 5-6
Supply air temperature
indoor fan housing, or
supply duct
1Ok thermistor
J8, 7-8
Saturated condenser temperature,
outdoor coil, circuit A
5k thermistor
J8, 9-10
Return air temperature
circuit A
Return air Section
1Ok thermistor
J8, 13-14
Fan status switch
indoor fan section
switch input
J8, 15-16
0-5 VDC pressure
transducer
J8, 18-20
SSRA
Suction pressure, circuit A
compressor
A suction
CTLR
Digital Scroll Ctrl Pwr
relay
J10, 11
CCH
OFC.1
Crankcase heat relay
Outdoor fan 1 relay
relay
relay
J10, 13
J10, 19
OUTPUTS
IDF
Indoor fan VFD pwr relay
relay
J10, 21
Alarm relay
relay
J10, 23
HT.1
Heat Stage 2 relay
relay
J10, 25
HT.2
Heat Stage 1 relay
relay
J10, 27
Local Equipment Network (LEN)
communication
J5, 1-3
Carrier Comfort Network (CCN)
communication
ALRM
COMMUNICATION
Network device power
24 VAC
J5, 5-7
J5, 9-10
Scrolling Marquee Display (LEN)
Scrolling Marquee Display power
communication
24 VAC
J4, 1-3
J4, 5-6
Modulation Board (AUXl) LEN
communication
J3, 1-3
Optional ECB power
24 VAC
48
J2, 1-2
Economizer
The ECB controls
Control
Board
the economizer
By
(ECB)
actuator.
(See Fig. 17 and Table
20.)
The control signal from the ECB uses either the MFT
(Multi-Function
Technology)
digital communication
protocol or a
4 to 20 mA output
signal as defined
by the configuration
Configuration--_ECON--_E.CTL.
The
ECB
has
inputs
for
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ), Outdoor Air Quality (OAQ),
enthalpy
and RH sensor. It also controls two power exhaust outputs.
digitally
communicating
with
the
ECB,
the
actuator is able to provide
the damper position
information
to
the
ComfortLink
controller.
economizer
and diagnostic
The
damper
position
is displayed
at Outputs-->ECON-->EC.4P.
Diagnostic
information
is displayed via Alert T414. More information
about
these alarms is contained in the Alarms and Alerts section.
IMPORTANT:
4-position
The Economizer
Control
Board (ECB) has a
DIP switch that is factory set to '0' (ON, towards
the center of the board).
RED LED
STATUS
Do not change
this setting.
GREEN LED-LEN
(LOCAL EQUIPMENT
NETWORK)
+0+0
C 07027
Fig. 17 - Economizer
Control
49
Board
(ECB)
Table 20 -DISPLAY
NAME
ECB Connections
POINT DESCRIPTION
SENSOR
LOCATION
TYPE OF I/O
CONNECTION
PIN NUMBER
INPUTS
Input power from MBB
control box
24 VAC
J1, 1-2
field installed
switch input
J4, 2
economizer, or
return/space
switch input
J4, 4
Indoor air quality sensor
return/space
0-20 mA
J5, 2
Outdoor air quality sensor, or
Relative humidity sensor
field installed
0-20 mA
J5, 5
Ground
Ground
J5, 3
J7, 3
Output power to enthalpy switch
24 VAC
J4, 3
Output power for loop power sensors
Output power to economizer actuator
24 VDC
24 VAC
J5, 1
J7, 2
RM.OC
Remote occupancy
switch
ENTH or
IAQ.S
Outdoor enthalpy switch, or
Indoor air quality switch
IAQ
OAQ or
SRRH
Sensor Common
Actuator Common
OUTPUTS
PE.1
Power exhaust 1 relay
relay
J8, 3
PE.2
Power exhaust 2 relay
relay
J8, 6
EC.CP
Commanded
0-20 mA
J9, 1
Economizer position
COMMUNICATION
Local Equipment
EC.CP &
EC.AP
Network (LEN)
communication
J2, 1-3
Carrier Comfort Network (CON)
communication
J3
Economizer actuator position
(digital control)
MFT
communication
J7, 1
5O
Modulation
The AUXI
Board
board
controls
for the ECB,
communicate.
(AUX1)
the compressor
capacity
and the indoor
fan speed (See Fig. 18 and Table 21.) It outputs a l-5vdc
and a
2-10vdc
signal to the DSC and VFD for capacity and fan speed,
respectively.
This board
is also used as the LEN connection
therefore
IMPORTANT:
(SI)
The AUXI
that is factory
be in the off position
buss
must
be
board
operational
has an 8-position
set for its LEN address.
except 4, 5 and 7 which
the center of the board).
for the
Do not change
ECB
to
DIP switch
All the switches
must
are on (off is towards
this setting.
DIP SWITCH
TR1
TR2
TR3
TR4
TR5
TR(_
TR7
TR8
(:08658
Fig. 18 - Modulation
Table
DISPLAY
NAME
21 -- AUX1
Board
(AUX1)
Connections
TYPE OF I/O
CONNECTION
PIN NUMBER
Input power from TRAN1
24 VAC
J1, 11-12
CAPC
Compressor
1-5vdc
CH9
RSPD
Commanded
2-10vdc
CH10
Local Equipment Network (LEN)
communication
J9, 1-3
Local Equipment Network (LEN)
communication
J9, 1-3
POINT DESCRIPTION
OUTPUTS
Capacity
Fan Speed
COMMUNICATION
51
Digital
Scroll Control
The DSC
board
controls
and Table 22.) It receives
determined
by the cooling
Board
The
(DSC)
the compressor's
capacity.
a l-5vdc
algorithm.
from the AUX1
signal
(See
DSC
solenoid
Fig. 19
has
direct
unloader
control
of
the
R
a specific
and
pulses
capacity.
D4 D2
T6 T4 T2
P6 P4 P2
C4 C2
24 24
D3D1
T5T3T1
P5P3Pl
C3C1
VACCOM
.,i
{]_
See the troubleshooting
Power
LED
(Green)
....
CC
TI
C
Unloader LED
T2
Alert
LED
(Red)
(08659
Fig. 19 - Digital
Table
DISPLAY
NAME
Scroll
Controller
(DSC)
22 -- DSC Connections
SENSOR
LOCATION
TYPE OF I/O
CONNECTION
PIN NUMBER
24 VAC
24VAC/24COM
Discharge line
86k thermistor
T1/T2
1- 5vdc
19-250VA0
C1/O2
L1/L2
POINT DESCRIPTION
INPUTS
CTLR
Digital Scroll Ctrl Pwr
Compressor
Discharge Temperature
(DTT)
CAPC
Compressor Capacity
Load Control Power*
C.ALM
Scroll Compressor Alarm
Relay
A1/A2
CMRA
Compressor A Feedback
Relay
M1/M2
Relay
U1/U2
OUTPUTS
Digital Scroll Unloader
Voltage
used
for contacts
M1 & M2,
U1 & U2, and VI & V2 (24 VAC
Compressor
section
used).
52
a
The
discharge temperature
thermistor
(DTT) is monitored by the DSC
for compressor
safety.
The DSC is equipped
with an LED
board
(light-emitting
diode) for diagnostics,
section for more details.
T3
compressor
on and off to provide
Variable
Frequency
The VFD varies
Drive (VFD)
the frequency
of the AC voltage
supplied
to the
indoor fan. (See Fig. 20 and Table 23.) This causes the variance in
the speed of the fan. The commanded
fan speed is received by the
VFD from the AUXI
board
as a 2-10vdc
....
signal.
The AII DIP switch must be in the off (or towards "U") position to
properly read the analog signal.
There are three jumper wires that
must remain installed for proper operation.
The VFD is mounted
behind the fan housing on the fan sled and the remote
mounted on the front of the fan housing for easy access.
is factory
keypad is
The VFD
set to the auto mode for unit operation.
_i2V]iii
i..........
C09146
Fig. 20 - Variable
Table
DISPLAY NAME
23 --
Frequency
Drive
(VFD)
VFD Connections
POINT DESCRIPTION
TYPE OF I/O
TERMINAL
NUMBER
TERMINAL
NAME
LOW VOLTAGE INPUTS
Shielded Cable Ground
ESPD
Shield
1
2-10vdc
2
All *
Analog Input 1 Common
Low Voltage Power (jumped to DI1 & DI4)
Ground
24v
3
10
AGND
24v
Low Voltage Common
Ground
11
GND
Ground
12
DCOM
Discrete Input 1 (jumped from 24v)
Switch Input
13
DI1
Discrete Input 4 (jumped from 24v)
Switch Input
16
DI4
Commanded
Fan Speed
(jumped to DCOM)
Discrete Inputs Common (jumped from GND)
SCR
HIGH VOLTAGE
Requires
the All
dip switch
Voltage Leg from IFC-21
Voltage Input
U1
MAINS
Voltage Leg from IFC-22
Voltage Input
V1
MAINS
Voltage Leg from IFC-23
Voltage Input
Wl
MAINS
Voltage Leg to IFM-3
Voltage Leg to IFM-2
Voltage Output
Voltage Output
U2
V2
MOTOR
MOTOR
Voltage Leg to IFM-1
Voltage Output
W2
MOTOR
to be in in the Off
(or towards
"U")
position.
53
Integrated
Gas Control
(IGC) Board
The IGC is equipped
with an LED (light-emitting
diode) for
diagnostics.
See the Troubleshooting
section for more information.
The IGC is provided on gas heat units. (See Fig. 21 and Table 24.)
The IGC controls the direct spark ignition system and monitors the
rollout switch, limit switch, and induced-draft
motor Hall Effect
switch.
RED LED-STATUS
LH33WPOO2A
II
1068-12
II
II
( 07028
Fig. 21 - Integrated
Table
TERMINAL
LABEL
POINT DESCRIPTION
Gas Control
24 --
(IGC)
Board
IGC Connections
SENSOR LOCATION
TYPE OF I/O
CONNECTION
PIN NUMBER
J1, 1-3
INPUTS
RT, C
SS
Input power from TRAN 1
Speed sensor
control box
gas section
24 VAC
analog input
FS, T1
Flame sensor
gas section
switch input
W
Heat stage 1
MBB
24 VAC
RS
Rollout switch
gas section
switch input
J2, 5-6
LS
CS
Limit switch
Centrifugal switch (not used)
gas section
switch input
switch input
J2, 7-8
J2, 9-10
L1, CM
Induced draft combustion
gas section
line VAC
IFO
Indoor fan request
control box
relay
J2, 1
GV (W1)
GV (W2)
Gas valve (heat stage 1)
Gas Valve (heat stage 2, from MBB)
gas section
gas section
relay
J2, 12
J2, 2
OUTPUTS
motor
54
Not on IGC
Low Voltage Terminal
Strip
Fig. 22 and Table 25.) The circuit breakers
for the low voltage
control transformers,
interface connection
for the Carrier Comfort
(TB1)
This circuit board
control boards
provides
a connection
and a majority
point between
of the field-installed
17
I
accessories.
(See
I4
J10
Network@ (CCN) communication,
Local Equipment
Network (LEN)
on the low voltage terminal strip.
the major
I
and interface connection
for the
communications
are also located
I
J11
RUN TEST
SEPARATION
OFCIRCUITSTO EACH24V TRANSFORMER
MUSTBEMAiNTAiNED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R Y1 Y2 W1 W2 G
C
X
(08660
Fig. 22 - Low-Voltage
Terminal
Table 25 -- Field Connection
TERMINAL
LABEL
DISPLAY
NAME
1
2
IAQ
3
POINT DESCRIPTION
24 VDC Sensor Loop power
Indoor air quality sensor
Board
(LVTB)
Terminal
Strip
SENSOR
LOCATION
TYPE OF I/O
return/space
24 VDC output
4-20 mA input
JlO, 17
J1O, 16
Ground
J1O, 15
Air quality & humidity sensor common
4
OAQ or
SP.RH
Outdoor air quality sensor or
Relative humidity sensor
field installed
5
RM.OC
Remote occupancy
field installed
6
switch
Switch power (ENTH, RM.OC, IAQ.S)
7
8*
ENTH or
IAQ.S
Outdoor enthalpy switch, or
Indoor air quality switch
EC.CP
Economizer commanded position
actuator (when in digital control)
9
Economizer
10"
EC.AP
Economizer position feedback
in analog control)
24 VAC power
NOT USED
Y2
NOT USED
Wl
NOT USED
HUM
C
X
FIRE
economizer
signal common
R
Y1
W2
G
economizer, or
return/space
(when
economizer
4-20
mA input
24 VAC input
CONNECTION
PIN NUMBER
J1O, 14
J1O, 16
24 VAC output
JlO, 11-12
24 VAC input
J1 O, 9-10
2-10
VDC output
J1O, 6-8
Ground
J1O, 3-5
communication
2-10 VDC output
JlO, 1-2
24 VAC output
J11, 11-14
J11,10
Jll,
Jll,
Space Humidity Switch
NOT USED
space
24 VAC input
9
7-8
J11,6
Jll, 5
24 VAC common
24 VAC output
ALRM
Alarm output (normally open)
24 VAC output
J11, 1
FDWN
Fire shutdown
switch 24 VAC output
supply/return
switch input
J12, 7
FDWN
Fire shutdown
switch input
supply/return
switch input
J12, 6
SPT
Space temperatu re (T55/56)
space
1Ok thermistor
J12, 4- 5
SPTO
Space temperatu re offset (T56)
space
1Ok thermistor
J12, 3- 4
SHUTDOWN
1
J11,2-4
FIRE
SHUTDOWN
2
T55
1-2
T55
2-3
FAN STATUS
1-2
NOT USED
LEN
CCN
Refer
to Third
J12, 1-2
Local Equipment Network (LEN)
Carrier Comfort Network (CCN)
Party
Control
section
for more
communication
communication
information
55
J13, 1-3, 4-5
J13, 6-8, 4-5
Scrolling
This
Marquee
device
is
the
IMPORTANT:
Display
keypad
interface
used
to
access
rooftop
information,
read sensor values, and test the unit. (See Fig. 23.)
The Scrolling Marquee display is a 4-key, 4-character,
16-segment
LED (light-emitting
diode) display.
on the display as well as an Alarm
Usage section
for further
Eleven mode LEDs are located
Status LED. See Basic Control
details.
Alarm
Conductors
and drain wire must be 20 AWG
(American Wire Gauge) minimum stranded, tinned copper.
Individual conductors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon,
vinyl, Teflon, or polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil
shield and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl, or
Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of -20°C to
60 °C is required. See Table below for acceptable wiring.
MANUFACTURER
PART NO.
Alpha
Belden
Carol
West Penn
2413 or 5463
8772
C2528
302
when connecting
to a CCN communication
St alus
It is important
80,;2°0 :2
a color-coding
the installation.
80:::,:
.......
(06320
Fig. 23 - Scrolling
bus that
scheme be used for the entire network to simplify
It is recommended
that red be used for the signal
positive,
black for the signal negative and white for the signal
ground.
Use a similar
scheme
for cables containing
different
colored wires.
Marquee
At
each
system
element,
the
shields
of its communication
bus
with
cables must be tied together. The shield screw on TBI can be used
to tie the cables together. If the communication
bus is entirely
within
one building,
the resulting
continuous
shield must be
48/50PD units. (See Fig. 24.) The Navigator
display operates the
same way as the Scrolling Marquee device. The Navigator
display
connected
to a ground at one point only. The shield screw on TBI
is not acceptable
for grounding.
If the communication
bus cable
plugs into the LEN port on either
exits from one building
and enters another, the shields must be
connected
to grounds at the lightning suppressor
in each building
Accessory
The
Navigator
accessory
hand-held
TM
Display
Navigator
display
can
be
used
TB or the ECB board.
where the cable enters or exits the building
only). To connect the unit to the network:
1. Turn off power
to the control
(one point per building
box.
2. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends
(ground),
and black (-) conductors.
colors for different colored cables.)
3. Connect
the red wire to (+) terminal
to COM
terminal,
4. The RJI4
of the red (+), white
(Substitute
on TBI,
5. Restore
CCN connector
power
routines
on TBI
can also be used,
but is
(for example,
software).
a
to unit.
A shorted
from
the white wire
and the black wire to the (-) terminal.
only intended
for temporary
connection
laptop computer running Carrier network
IMPORTANT:
appropriate
running
CCN
bus
cable
and may prevent
will
prevent
the unit from
some
starting.
If
abnormal
conditions
occur, unplug the connector.
If conditions
return to normal, check the CCN connector
and cable. Run new
C06321
Fig. 24 - Accessory
Navigator
TM
Display
cable
if necessary.
problems
Field-Installed
Carrier
Comfort
Network
(CCN)®
A short
with all system
in one section
elements
of the bus can
cause
on the bus.
Accessories
Interface
The units can be connected to the CCN if desired. The
communication bus wiring is a shielded, 3-conductor cable with
drain wire and is field supplied and installed. The system elements
are connected to the communication
bus in a daisy chain
arrangement. (See Fig. 25.) The positive pin of each system
element communication connector must be wired to the positive
pins of the system elements on either side of it. This is also
required for the negative and signal ground pins of each system
element. Wiring connections for CCN should be made at TB. (See
Fig. 25.) Consult the CCN Contractor's Manual for further
information.
Space
Temperature
Sensor
(T-55)
The T-55 space temperature
sensor (part no. 33ZCT55SPT)
is a
field-installed
accessory.
The sensor is installed
on a building
interior wall to measure room air temperature.
The T-55 sensor
also includes
an override
button on the front cover to permit
occupants
to override
the Unoccupied
Schedule
TBI-T55-1
........
Sensor Input
TBI-T55-2
........
Sensor Common
Space
Temperature
Sensor
(if programmed).
(T-56)
The T-56 space temperature
sensor (part no. 33ZCT56SPT)
is a
field-installed
accessory. This sensor includes a sliding scale on the
front cover that permits an occupant to adjust the space temperature
set point remotely. The T-56 sensor also includes
an override
button
on the front cover to allow occupants
to override
the
unoccupied
schedule
TB1-T55-1
........
Sensor Input
TB1-T55-2
........
Sensor Common
TB1-T55-3
........
Setpoint
56
(if programmed).
Offset Input
Space
Temperature
Sensor
Each T-58 sensor must have a unique address on the CCN. Each
T-58 sensor nmst also be configured with the address of the unit
control it is communicating to.
(T-58)
The T-58 space temperature sensor (part no. 33ZCT58SPT)
is a
field-installed
accessory. The T-58 sensor communicates
with the
ComfortLink
controller,
providing
space temperature,
heating
Space Temperature
TM
and cooling
Refer
set points,
to the
installing
T-58
and mode operation
installation
and configuring
instructions
the T-58
information.
for information
Sensor
Averaging
See Fig. 26 for space temperature averaging with T-55 sensors
only. If the use of one T-56 sensor is required, refer to Fig. 27.
on
sensor.
CCN BUS
RO& TTOP
ROO OP
BUILDING SUPERVISOR
NETWORK
OPTIONS
ROOFTOP
€ROOFTOP
_
L_
UNIT
_
UNIT
LEGEND
CCN-- CarrierComfort Network ®
CL -- ComfortLink'" Controls
HEATING/COOLING
CCN SITE
REMOTE __[
GATEWAY
AUTODIAL
UNITS
DAV-- DigitalAirVolume
HVAC-- Heating, Ventilation, and
Air Conditoning
TCU -- Terminal Control Unit
i-TO
ADDITIONAL
MINALS
DAV FAN
POWERED
MIXING
BOX
HVAC
NON
EQUIPMENT
CARRIER
I
COMFORT
CONTROLLER
AIR DISTRIBUTION-DIGITALAIR
VOLUME CONTROL (DAV)
(07030
Fig. 25 - CCN System
57
Architecture
1
I
I
T B 1 -T55
RED
RED
BLK
BLK
7
I
I
I
RED
]
RED
RED
0BLK
]
BLK
/
BLK
TO MAIN
BASE BOARD
SENSOR
L
1
SENSOR 2
SENSOR
3
SENSOR
SPACETEMPERATURE AVERAGING --4 T-55 SENSOR APPLICATION
TB1 -T55
RED
vt
D
BLK
,1_
RED
RED
BLK
BLK
tj
TO MAIN
BASE BOARD
I
LEGEND
TB
SENSOR
1
I
tj
SENSOR 3
SENSOR 2
I
-- Terminal
Block
RED
-- Factory Wiring
-- Field Wiring
RED
41
BLK
I
la
tw
SENSOR 4
SENSOR
I
L
BLK
RED
•
5
SENSOR
6
RED
®
BLK
I
BLK
SENSOR 7
I
SENSOR 8
SENSOR 9
SPACETEMPERATURE AVERAGING --9 T-55 SENSOR APPLICATION
C07032
Fig. 26 - Space
TB1-T55
]
]
RED
I
I
I
I
I
I
Temperature
Sensor
RED
RED
BLK
BLK
Averaging
7
I
RED
RED
0BLK
BLK
VVV-
L
T-55 SENSOR 1
T-55 SENSOR 2
BLK
TO MAIN
BASE
BOARD
I
F
T
T-55 SENSOR 3
TB1-T55
WHT
[]
TO MAIN
BASE
BOARD
C07033
Fig. 27 - Space
Temperature
Sensor Averaging
with 3 T-55
58
Sensors
and One T-56
Sensor
IMPORTANT:
Carrier Accessory Kits
There are specific accessory kits sold
accessories.
These kits vary based
manufacture
date, and duct orientation.
for various field installed
on model,
size, voltage,
Some of these kits include
Economizer,
Power Exhaust,
and Electric Heat.
Refer to the
Controls
Quick
Set-Up
section
for configuration
and more
information
on these accessories.
Two-Position
Damper
The two-position
outdoor
air damper
accessory
usage
depends
on
model
size and return duct orientation.
This accessory
wires
directly into the low voltage circuit for the indoor fan control. No
other control configuration
Indoor
Air
is needed.
Quality
The indoor air quality (IAQ) sensor (part no. 33ZCSENCO2)
is a
field-installed
accessory
which measures
CO2 levels in the air.
When installing
this sensor, an ECB board must be installed and
the unit
must
be
configured
for
IAQ
use
by
setting
Configuration-+AIR.Q-+IA.CF
to a value of 1, 2, or 3. See the
Indoor Air Quality section for more information.
TB1-2
.......
4-20
TB1-3
.......
Sensor
mA Input
......
24 VAC Output
TB1-C
......
Common
The outdoor air quality (OAQ) sensor is a field-installed
accessory
that measures ('02 levels in the air. When installing this sensor, an
ECB board must be installed and the unit must be configured for
OAQ use by setting Configuration-+AIR.Q-+OA.CF
to a value
of I or 2. See the Indoor Air Quality section for more information.
.......
4-20
TBI-3
.......
Sensor
......
24 VAC Output
......
Common
detectors
can
detect
smoke
CRSMKDET003A00)
are field-installed
in
either
or supply
accessories.
the
return
and return
CRSMKSUP002A00).
When installing
must
be
configured
for
fire
Configuration-+UNIT-+FS.SW
closed (2).
to normally
Shutdown-1
....
Dry Contact
TB1-Fire
Shutdown-2
....
Discrete
TB1-C
Filter
These
air
air
either detector,
shutdown
by
TB1-Fire
TB1-R
Sensors
enthalpy
accessories
(part
no.
CRENTSNG002A00
and
CRENTDIF002A00)
are field-installed
accessories.
The first
accessory (outdoor air only) detemfines
when the enthalpy is low
relative to a fixed reference. Adding the second accessory (return
air) compares
the enthalpy
between
the outdoor
and return
airstreams. In each case, the enthalpy
4 to 20 mA signals
are
converted to a switch output which is read by the ECB. When
installing
this
enthalpy-based
accessory,
the unit
control
must
be
by
configured
for
setting
Configuration-+ECON-+EN.SW
to normally
open (1). Normal
status is an active switch which tells the control that enthalpy is
LOW. The actual switch terminal LOW is normally
closed. Refer
to the Enthalpy
Kit Installation
on its installation.
Instructions
Return/Supply Air Temperature
for more information
Sensor
The temperature sensor (part no. 33ZCSENSAT)
is a field-installed
accessory which may be installed on the common return air duct
section. When installing
the supply duct SAT, the unit must be
configured
by setting Configuration--+UNIT--+SATJI
to ENBL.
A SAT sensor in the supply duct is the preferred configuration
for
systems with Carrier variable volume
and temperature
(VVT®)
accessory
controls.
Humidistat
levels. The humidistat
terminal
board.
The
(GND)
Smoke Detectors
The smoke
The
The Space Humidistat
(part no. --HL--38MG-029)
mounted
device with an adjustable
setpoint
to control
Common
TB1-C
Enthalpv
Space
mA Input
TB1-R
to be
is internal to the unit. A supply duct SAT measurement
is valid for
heating mode display while the factory-standard
internal SAT is
not valid for heating due to its location upstream of the heating
(GND)
Outdoor Air Quality
TBI-4
on TB1 are NOT
and/or the common supply air duct near the unit. The duct supply
air temperature (SAT) may be used to replace the SAT sensor that
Common
TB1-R
The Fan Status terminals
used.
detectors
(part
(part
no.
no.
the unit
setting
open (1) or normally
Source
Input
................
24 VAC Output
................
Common
to Board
(GND)
Status
The filter status accessory (part no. CRSTATUS002B00)
is a
field-installed accessory. This accessory detects plugged filters.
When installing this accessory, the unit must be configured for
filter status by setting Configuration-+UNIT-+FL.SW
to
normally open (1) or normally closed (2). Normally open (1) is the
preferred configuration. Filter status wires are pre-run in the unit
harness and located near the switch installation location. Refer to
the Filter Accessory Installation Instructions for more information.
Fan Status
input is provided
Space
Humidity
Configuration-_UNIT-_RH.SW,
identifies
normally closed status of this input at LOW
TB1-R
TB1-W2
Space
......
.....
Humidity
24 VAC Dry Contact
Discrete
is a wall
humidity
on the field connection
Switch
configuration,
the normally
humidity.
open
or
Source
Input to Board
Sensor
The space relative humidity
sensor (part no. 33ZCSENDRH-01
duct mount or 33ZCSENSRH-01
wall mount) is a field-installed
accessory. The space relative humidity
(RHS) may be selected for
use if the outdoor air quality sensor (OAQ) is not used
economizer
board
is installed.
When
installing
the
humidity
sensor,
the unit
must
be configured
by
Configuration
-_UNIT-_RH.S
to YES.
TBI-1
.......
24 VDC Loop
TB1-4
.......
4-20
mA Input
Power
Signal
SERVICE
ELECTRICALSHOCK
HAZARD
Failure to follow this warning could cause personal
iniury or death.
The fan status accessory (part no. CRSTATUS003B00)
is a
field-installed accessory. This accessory detects when the indoor
fan is blowing air. When installing this accessory, the unit must be
configured
for
fan
status
by
setting
Configuration-+UNIT-+FN.SW
to normally
open (1) or
normally closed (2). Normally open (1) is the preferred
configuration. Fan status wires are pre-run in the unit harness and
located near the switch installation location. Refer to the Fan
Accessory Installation Instructions for more information.
Before performing service or maintenance operations
on unit, turn off main power switch to unit and install
lockout tag. Ensure electrical service to rooftop unit
agrees with voltage and amperage listed on the unit
rating plate.
59
and an
relative
setting
Remove
Surface
Surface
UNITOPERATION
ANDSAFETY
HAZARD
Failure
to follow this warning
could cause personal
iniury,
death and/or
equipment
damage.
Puron ® (R-410A)
refrigerant systems operate at higher
pressures than standard R-22 systems. Do not use R-22
service equipment
or components
on Puron refrigerant
equipment.
loaded
Loaded
fibers
Fibers
or dirt should
protected
coil) if the tool is applied
IMPORTANT:
Use of a water
against
loaded
a surface
Clean
A periodic
Water
clean
HAZARD
result
in personal
1. Improper installation, adjustment,
alteration, service,
or maintenance
can cause property damage, personal
iniury, or loss of life. Refer to the User's Information
Manual provided with this unit for more details.
2. Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable
vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other
appliance.
What to do if you smell gas:
1. DO NOT try to light any appliance.
2. DO NOT touch any electrical switch, or use any
phone in your building.
3. IMMEDIATELY
call your gas supplier from a
neighbor's
phone. Follow the gas supplier's
instructions.
reach your gas supplier,
call the fire
Routine
rinse
fin edges.
of Round-Tube
the manual
round-tube
copper/copper
interior
result
in personal
of each
heating
season and as operating
conditions require. Remove
and/or side panels for access to unit interior.
Coil Maintenance
cleaning
as
environmentally
sound coil
life of coils. This cleaner is
pre-coated,
the Totaline
sound coil cleaner
as described
below.
Coil
be part of the unit's
regularly
scheduled
Avoid
the use of:
prior to painting
washers
water for cleaning
insulation.
discouraged
Totaline
agent that will
such as electrical
coil cleaner
and
a
is non-flammable,
USDA
accepted
not harm the coil or surrounding
wiring, painted metal surfaces, or
Use of non-recommended
coil cleaners
is strongly
since coil and unit durability could be affected.
Environmentally
Sound
Coil
Cleaner
Application
Equipment
• 21/2 gallon garden
sprayer
• water rinse with low velocity
spray nozzle
gas valve(s).
at beginning
are
maintenance
procedures
to ensure long life of the coil. Failure to
clean the coils may result in reduced durability in the environment.
biodegradable
components
HAZARD
could
Monthly
coils,
including
standard
aluminum,
or E-coated
coils be cleaned
with
environmentally
cleaning
should
DAMAGE
HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result in corrosion and
damage to the unit.
Cleaning
unit
for coils that
available from Carrier Replacement
parts division as part number
P902-0301
for a one
gallon
container,
and
part number
P902-0305
for a 5 gallon container.
It is recommended
that all
[]NIT
Inspect
loaded
low velocity
• coil brighteners
Disconnect
gas piping from unit when pressure testing at
pressure
greater
than 0.5 psig. Pressures
greater
than
0.5 psig will cause gas valve damage resulting in hazardous
condition.
If gas valve is subjected
to pressure greater than
0.5 psig, it must be replaced before use. When pressure
testing field-supplied
gas piping at pressures of 0.5 psig or
less, a unit connected
to such piping must be isolated by
closing
Surface
Coil Surfaces
Monthly
cleaning
with Totaline®
cleaner is essential
to extend the
• acid cleaning
this warning
to using
is very beneficial
Totaline
environmentally
sound
hypoallergenic,
non-bacterial,
Failure to follow
injury or death.
prior
hose,
and dirt into the
Rinse
water
Cleaning
• poor quality
EXPLOSION
as a garden
efforts more difficult.
removed
stream to avoid damaging
the
described below is recommended.
• high pressure
FIRE,
such
applied in coastal or industrial environments.
However,
it is very
important that the water rinse is made with very low velocity water
Failure to follow this warning could
injury, death and/or property damage.
4. If you cannot
department.
a vacuum
across the fins.
stream,
coil will drive the fibers
coil. This will make cleaning
Periodic
EXPLOSION
with
in the direction of the fins. Coil surfaces can be easily damaged (fin
edges can be easily bent over and damage to the coating of a
fibers must be completely
clean water rinse.
FIRE,
be removed
cleaner. If a vacuum cleaner is not available, a soft non-metallic
bristle brush may be used. In either case, the tool should be applied
and cooling
Harsh chemicals, household bleach or acid or basic cleaners
should not be used to clean outdoor or indoor coils of any
kind. These cleaners can be very difficult to rinse out of the
coil and can accelerate corrosion at the fin/tube interface
where dissimilar materials are in contact. If there is dirt
below the surface of the coil, use the Totaline
environmentally sound coil cleaner as described above.
unit top panel
and Cleaning Recommendation
Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain
proper
operation of the unit. Elimination
of contamination
and removal of
harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the coil and extend
the life of the unit. The following
maintenance
and cleaning
procedures
are recommended
as part of the routine maintenance
activities to extend the life of the coil.
60
UNITRELIABILITY
HAZARD
Failure
to follow this caution may result
in reduced
unit
performance.
High velocity water from a pressure washer, garden hose, or
compressed
air should never be used to clean a coil. The
force of the water or air jet will bend the fin edges and
increase airside pressure drop.
Totaline
Environmentally
Instructions
1. Proper
eye
recommended
2. Remove
cleaner
Sound
Coil
Cleaner
INDUCED
ROLLOUT
Application
MOTOR
protection
such
as safety
during nfixing and application.
all surface
as described
loaded
fibers
glasses
and dirt with
is
-COMBUSTION
FAN HOUSING
a vacuum
above.
3. Thoroughly
wet finned surfaces with clean water and a low
velocity garden hose, being careful not to bend fins.
4. Mix Totaline
environmentally
sound
21/2 gallon garden sprayer according
included
with
the
temperature
is 100 ° F.
IMPORTANT:
enzymatic
cleaner.
The
optimum
water
in excess
of 130°F,
as the
will be destroyed.
garden
cleaner
spraying
sprayer
nozzle
close to finned
with
a vertical,
up-and-down
in horizontal
pattern to nfininfize
sound coil
finned area,
areas and apply
motion.
potential
cleaner
8. Interior
cleaned.
and
thoroughly
exterior
9. Finned surfaces
for 10 nfinutes.
11. Thoroughly
penetrates
finned
should
10. Ensure
surfaces
are
Reapplying
cleaner
saturation is achieved.
areas
remain
not
as
must
wet with
allowed
needed
rinse all surfaces
deep
into
be
Drain
cleaning
Filters
Clean or replace at start of each heating and cooling season, or
more often if operating conditions require. Refer to unit Installation
Instructions for type and size.
Outdoor-Air
Inlet Screens
Main
Burner
(48PD)
At the beginning of each heating season, inspect for deterioration
or blockage due to corrosion or other causes. Observe the main
burner flames. Refer to Main Burners section.
to dry before rinsing.
to
ensure
10-nfinute
with low velocity
clean water
nozzle.
Flue
Gas Passageways
(48PD)
The flue collector box and heat exchanger cells may be inspected
by opening heat section access door, flue box cover, and main
burner assembly. (See Fig. 28.) Refer to Main Burners section for
burner removal sequence. If cleaning is required, clean tubes with a
wire brush. Use Caution with ceranfic heat exchanger baffles.
When installing retaining clip, be sure the center leg of the clip
extends inward toward baffle. (See Fig. 29.)
Pan
To clean the condensate
season.
In
CERAMIC
BAFFLE
pan:
1. Disconnect
condensate
drain connection.
drain
2. Remove
and clean trap.
3. Remove
4 screws securing
unit. Save screws
system
from
condensate
side
CLIP
or bottom
pan access
cover to
and panel.
pan out from unit and clean.
of non-corrosive
plastic. Use a nfild
heavy deposits of dirt and grime.
5. Replace
pan in unit.
6. Replace
condensate
cleaner
Pan is made
NOTE: One baffle
to remove
and clip will
8. Connect
pan access
and prime condensate
condensate
be in each
cover
drainage
trap.
system.
upper
tube
of the heat
exchanger.
C07260
Fig. 29 - Removing
with
4 screws
Baffles
saved
from Step 3.
7. Re-attach
Section
finned
solution
Check and clean each year at the start of the cooling
winter, keep drains and traps dry.
4. Slide condensate
(07037
Gas Heating
Clean screens with steam or hot water and a mild detergent. Do
not use throwaway filters in place of screens. See unit installation
instructions for quantity and size.
thoroughly
using downward
rinsing
motion
of water spray
Protect fins from damage from the spray nozzle.
Condensate
/
MAINBURNERSECTION
Avoid
for fin
damage.
7. Ensure
areas.
VALVE
solution
5. Thoroughly
apply Totaline®
environmentally
cleaner solution to all coil surfaces including
tube sheets and coil headers.
6. Hold
HEATEXCHANGER
SECTION
coil cleaner
in a
to the instructions
Fig. 28 - Typical
Do NOT USE
activity
MAtN GAS
t
Combustion-Air
Blower
Heat
Exchanger
Ceramic
and Clips
(48PD)
Clean periodically
to assure proper airflow and heating efficiency.
Inspect blower wheel every fall and periodically
during heating
season.
For the first heating
season,
inspect
blower
wheel
bi-monthly
61
to determine
proper cleaning
frequency.
Toinspect
blowerwheel,openheatsection
door.Usinga
flashlight,
lookintotheflueexhaust
ducttoinspect.
If cleaning
is
required,
remove
motorandwheelassembly
by removing
the
screws
holding
theflueboxcovertothefluebox.Remove
the
screws
holding
theinducer
housing
totheinletplate.
Thewheel
canthenberemoved
fromthemotorshaftandcleaned
witha
detergent
orsolvent.
Replace
thewheel
ontothemotor
shaft
inthe
correct
position
andreassemble
thefluecover
ontothefluebox.
4. Disconnect
fan
the electrical
deck
(supply
installed).
5. Fan
wires
connected
air thermistor
and
Wires may be damaged
deck
can
now
be
to the slide-out
fan status
switch
if
if not disconnected.
slid
out
to
access
serviceable
components.
Lubrication
Compressors
Each compressor is charged with the correct amount of oil at the
factory.
UNIT
DAMAGE
HAZARD
Failure
unit.
to follow
this caution
DO
NOT
SLIDE
FAN
may result
DECK
OUT
in damage
PAST
to the
THE
FAN
DECK STOP. If further access is required,
the fan deck
must be supported.
Make sure plugs and wiring are not
pinched between fan housing and unit sheet metal post.
UNIT
DAMAGE
HAZARD
Failure
to follow
this caution
may result in damage
to unit
6. To replace fan deck to operating
back into the unit. Secure with
components.
The compressor
is in a Puron
refrigerant
system
removed
and uses a
electrical
8. Close fan section
9. Restore
slide fan deck
no. 10 screws
in Step 3.
7. Re-attach
polyolester
(POE) oil. This oil is extremely
hygroscopic,
meaning it absorbs water readily.
POE oils can absorb 15
times as much water as other oils designed for HCFC and
CFC
refrigerants.
Avoid
exposure
of the oil to the
atmosphere.
position,
the two
power
wires.
access door.
to unit.
VFD
MOTOR
Polyolester
(POE) compressor
lubricants are known to cause long
term damage to some synthetic roofing materials. Exposure, even if
immediately
cleaned up, may cause roofing materials to become
MOUNTING
BASE,
brittle (leading to cracking)
within a year. When performing
any
service which may risk exposure of compressor
oil to the roof, take
appropriate
precautions
to protect roofing. Procedures
which risk
oil leakage include
leaks, and replacing
compressor
replacement,
repairing
refrigerant components.
To prepare
SCREW
(RIDDEN)
refrigerant
rooftop:
FAN
DECK
STOP
FAN
PULLEY
1. Cover extended roof work area with an impermeable
plastic
dropcloth
or tarp. Make sure a 10 x 10 ft area around the
work area is covered.
PULLEY
SCREW
2. Cover
area in front
of the unit service
panel with
SLIDE_OUT
FAN
DECK
a terry
cloth shop towel to absorb lubricant
spills and prevent
run-offs. Towel will also protect dropcloth from tears caused
C08661
by tools or components.
3. Place terry cloth
Fig. 30 - Evaporator-Fan
shop towel
inside
components
to be serviced
bottom of the unit.
4. Perform
the required
Fan
Shaft
of any oil contaminated
sealed
bearings.
Economizer
Air
or Manual
If blade
adjustment
installation instructions,
units
is
Outside
required,
a slide-out
motor, pulleys,
in this section,
To change
fan speeds:
No
Using
belt.
field
refer
permanently
unit
or
accessory
tighten
and Replacement
fan
deck
for easy
3. Remove
of the
6. Replace
belt, bearings
and VFD. To service
perform the following procedure:
access
two no. 10 screws
Save screws.
door.
at front
of slide-out
bolts
bolts
and plate,
movable-pulley
in the mounting
slide
flange setscrew.
flange
setscrew.
at nearest
(See Appendix
each full turn of pulley
servicing
in Appendix
D.
supply.
on the 4 carriage
adjusting
shown
motor
base.
and remove
(See Fig. 31.)
fan speed increases load on motor. Do not exceed
speed specified in Appendix
D.
See Appendix D for air quantity limits.
Damper
to
nuts
Adjustment
set for speed
4. Screw movable flange toward fixed flange to increase speed
and away from fixed flange to decrease speed. Increasing
1. Turn off unit power.
2. Open the fan section
are factory
5. Set movable
Fan Service
feature
pulleys
3. Loosen
motors have
is necessary.
indoor-fan
components
per
Fan Performance
Fan motor
Motor Bearings
The condenser-fan
and evaporator-fan
sealed bearings, so no field lubrication
The
material
Evaporator
1. Shut off unit power
and Evaporator-Fan
Evaporator
the
2. Loosen
permanently
Adjustment
under
through
Bearings
The indoor
fan has
lubrication
is necessary.
Condenser
directly
spills
service.
5. Remove
an dispose
local codes.
Indoor
the unit
to prevent
Motor
fan deck.
(See Fig. 30.)
62
belts.
flange.)
keyway
maximum
of pulley
D for speed
hub and
change
for
7.Realign
fanandmotor
pulleys:
a.Loosen
fanpulley
setscrews.
b.Slide
fanpulley
along
fanshaft.
c.Make
angular
alignment
byloosening
motor
from
mounting
plate.
8.Tighten
belts.
9.Restore
power
tounit.
(See Fig. 32.) Lift out the bracket
clear from the fan sled.
4. With all the wires stilled attached
assembly
so it is parallel
5. Pull the VFD assembly
in a secure flat surface.
the pulley
to the VFD,
wiring
Wires
turn the VFD
to the front of the fan sled and place
diagram
are marked
shows the wiring
with
VFD
terminal
wiring
to
labels and
connections.
7. Remove the 4 screws holding
and remove the VFD.
MOVABLE
FLANGE
side is
with the fan sled.
6. Disconnect
the power, ground, RJ45, and control
the VFD making sure to note their connections.
IMPORTANT:
STRAIGHTEDGE OR STRING
MUST BE PARALLEL
WITH BELT
when
the VFD
to the mount
bracket
8. Remove
the replacement
VFD cover and install jumper
wires provided with it as shown on the unit wiring diagram.
If jumpers
are not
remove them from
MOTOR AND FAN
SHAFTS MUST BE
PARALLEL
jumpers.
SETSCREWS_
9. Set AII and AI2 DIP switches to the U (oft) direction
indicated on the plastic housing near the DIP switch.
FIXED FLANGE
10. Replace
12. Connect
the wiring
the wiring
Evaporator
Alignment
Fan Belt Tension
and Adjustment
Adjustment
15. Make
fan
Evaporator
3. Loosen
4. Move motor
Motor
to
mounting
mounting
adjuster
service
and Replacement
motor
as
shown
section
above.
in
sure the bracket
plate to adjust to proper
18. Follow
6-9.
belt tension.
belts.
Adjust
if necessary.
plate bolts to lock motor
in proper
VFD,
refer to
to the back of the fan sled.
s pulley
and control
the Evaporator
19. Power up VFD
Appendix
B.
(See Fig.
belt.
mounting
17. Secure power
plate bolts.
for proper belt alignment.
6. Tighten
position
bolts may be used to tighten
30.) Do not overtighten
5. Check
assembly
side U bend
towards
16. Install the 2 screws in the bracket
deck
Fan Service
motor
as it was on the previous
fan sled and pull the assembly
1. Turn off unit power.
out
it to the mounting
14. Turn the VFD assembly lengthwise
with the fan housing,
making sure the screw side of the bracket lines up with the
screw holes on the fan sled.
To adjust belt tension:
2. Slide
to secure
diagram.
13. Move the VFD
C06041
as
the VFD with the new one.
11. Install the 4 screws in the VFD
bracket.
SINGLE-GROOVE
Fig. 31 - Evaporator-Fan
provided
with the replacement
VFD,
the defective
one or field supply the
of the
to secure
it to the fan sled.
wires with new wire ties.
fan service
and replacement
and set up its parameters
IMPORTANT:
reinstalled.
If fan deck
For VFD
and maintenance,
service
is clear
the screw side.
stops were
per Table
removed,
refer to Appendix
Steps
40 in
they must
be
B.
position.
7. Return
fan deck back into operating
8. Restore
power
Variable
'[*t/qff&'
position.
to unit.
Frequency
Drive (VFD) Replacement
The 48/50PD
units are equipped
with a VFD that is mounted
behind the blower housing
on the fan sled.
The VFD's remote
display is mounted on the front of the fan housing for easier access.
The VFD is mounted to a plate which is mounted
to the fan sled.
When accessing
the VFD or to remove
the VFD, follow the
Evaporator
fan
following steps:
service
and
replacement
IMPORTANT:
If fan deck stop
screws
access, the front of the fan deck MUST
Steps
1-5
are removed
and the
for further
Fig. 32 - VFD Mount
1. Remove the 2 screws holding the VFD's mount bracket to
the fan sled. The horizontal
cross section of the bottom half
of the mount
bracket
is shown
(08662
BE SUPPORTED.
on Fig. 32.
Condenser-Fan
the VFD
display/keypad
2. Remove
3. With the VFD still attached,
remove
the mount
bracket
3. Adjust
from
4. Tighten
the fan sled. To do this requires a slight lift on the screw
side then a push towards the pulley side of the fan sled.
condenser-fan
fan height as shown
setscrews
5. Turn on power
63
Section
supply.
cover, and fan) and loosen
at the top of the fan scroll.
Cross
Adjustment
1. Shut off unit power
2. Cut the wire ties holding the VFD power wires to the fan
housing and the two wire ties holding the control wires to
Bracket
assembly
(grille,
in Fig. 33.
and replace condenser-fan
to unit.
motor,
fan hub setscrews.
assembly.
motor
3. Connect
a nitrogen
open until system
4. Close
service
During
this
throughout
5. Repeat
(08570
Fig. 33 - Condenser-Fan
Verify Sensor
Verify
Performance
that thermistor,
correctly.
Marquee
These
display
transducer,
and switch
inputs
are reading
values can be accessed
through
the Scrolling
in the Temperatures,
Pressures, and Inputs menus.
Some values will depend on configuration
choices. Refer to the
Control
Set Up Checklist
completed
for the specific
unit
installation
and to the configuration
tables in Appendix A.
Economizer
Operation
During
Power
Failure
and regulator
the system,
to system
and
is 2 psig.
and allow
dry
system
nitrogen
to stand
will
absorbing
be
for 1 hr.
able
to diffuse
moisture.
System
of contanfinants
Refrigerant
Amount
valve
time,
this procedure.
amounts
Adjustment
cylinder
pressure
will
then contain
nfinimal
and water vapor.
Charge
of refrigerant
charge is listed on unit nameplate.
Refer to
Carrier GTAC II; Module 5; Charging,
Recovery, Recycling,
Reclamation
section for charging
methods and procedures.
panels nmst
procedure.
be in place
when
unit is operating
during
and
Unit
charging
Puron®
(R-410A)
refrigerant
systems
should be charged
with
liquid refrigerant.
Use a commercial
type metering device in the
manifold hose.
Dampers have a spring return. In event of power failure, dampers
will return to fully closed position until power is restored. Do not
manually
operate
damper
motor:
UNIT
Evacuation
Proper evacuation
of the system will remove noncondensables
ensure a tight, dry system before charging.
Evacuate from
high and low side ports. Never use the system compressor
vacuum
pump.
Refrigerant
evacuated
to 500 nficrons.
nitrogen. The two possible methods
and the triple evacuation
method.
Deep
Vacuum
are the deep vacuum
AND SAFETY
HAZARD
cause
personal
Puron (R-410A)
refrigerant
systems operate at higher
pressures than standard R-22 systems. Do not use R-22
service equipment
or components
on Puron refrigerant
equipment.
Gauge set, hoses, and recovery system nmst
be designed
to handle Puron refrigerant.
If unsure
about equipment,
consult the equipment manufacturer.
be
dry
method
Method
The deep vacuum
pulling a minimum
capable
vacuum
and
both
as a
tubes and indoor
coil should
Always
break a vacuum
with
OPERATION
Failure to follow this warning
could
injury, death and/or equipment damage.
method
vacuum
requires a vacuum
pump capable of
of 500 nficrons and a vacuum gauge
of accurately
measuring
this vacuum
depth. The deep
method is the most positive way of assuring a system is
tree of air and liquid water. (See Fig. 340
IMPORTANT:
contanfinants.
No
Charge
Use
standard
weigh
5OOO
in
in the
the
4000
Charge
LEAK IN
3500
refrigerant
specified
techniques.
After
amount
refrigerant
of
Verify charge using the charging
in the
IMPORTANT:
as it may contain
System
evacuating
nameplate).
the System."
4500
Do not use recycled
evacuating
system,
(refer
to
unit
chart via "Charge
in
System
The
circuit must
be running
in normal
cooling
69
mode
3000
rC
©
2500
2000
VACUUM TIGHT
TOO WET
1500
1000
TIGHT
DRY SYSTEM
5OO
2
3
4
5
Evacuation
6
system
does not contain
1. Pump
system
to continue
2. Close
Graph
should only be used when vacuum
down to 28-in. of mercury
and
any liquid water. Proceed
down
operating
service valves
to 28-in.
air quantity limits for cooling
fans must be on and running
Cooling
outdoor
Service
fans.
liquid
Method
The triple evacuation
method
pump is capable of pumping
at max
of mercury
for an additional
as follows:
and allow
15 nfinutes.
and shut off vacuum
Test Outdoor
pressure
gauge
and indoor
The VFD must be
airflow
must
be within
(See Appendix
at high speed.
Fan Override
function
D). All
Use the
to start all
and temperature-sensing
device
is
required. Charging is accomplished
by ensuring the proper amount
of liquid subcooling.
Connect pressure
gauge to the compressor
discharge service valve. Connect temperature
sensing device to the
(:06264
Fig. 34 - Deep Vacuum
speed
at 100%.
specified
outdoor
accurate
fan
capacity
running
An
MINUTES
Triple
with the compressor
pump.
pump
line
between
the
condenser
and
the
TXV
(thermostatic
expansion
valve), and insulate it so that ambient temperature
does
not affect reading.
Use the cooling charging chart (Fig. 35-36) to
deternfine if additional charge is needed or if some charge needs to
be removed from the system.
To Use
Use
the
the
Coolinu Charuinu
temperature
and
Chart
pressure
readings,
and
find
the
intersection
point on the cooling charging chart. If intersection
point on chart is above line, add refrigerant.
If intersection point on
chart is below line, carefully recover some of the charge.
suction pressure as charge is adjusted.
64
Recheck
TheTXVis setto
maintain
between
10
superheat at the compressors.
The valves
be adjusted. Do not use A TXV designed
R410A
OUTDOOR
and
15
degrees
of
Table
26 -- Altitude
are factory set and cannot
for use with R-22.
48PG03-07
REFRIGERANT
FAN M UST BE OPERA TING
ON HIGH
Compensation*
SPEED
ELEVATION
(It)
NATURAL GAS
ORIFICEt
PROPANE
ORIFICEt
0-1,999
45
52
2,000
47
52
3,000
47
53
4,000
47
53
5,000
48
53
6,000
48
53
7,000
48
53
8,000
49
54
9,000
49
54
10,000
50
54
11,000
51
54
12,000
51
55
13,000
52
55
14,000
52
160
140
120
lOO
80 ¸
60
*As the height
Therefore,
t
150
200
250
300
Compressor
350
400
Discharge
450
Pressure,
500
550
sea level
heat input
reduction
20
above
increases,
rate should
there
be reduced
56
is less oxygen
at higher
per cubic
altitudes.
foot of air.
Includes
a 4% input
per each 1000 ft.
Orifices
available
through
your Carrier
dealer.
6OO
[psig]
Gas Valve Adjustment
(07040
Fig. 35 - Charging
R410A
OUTDOOR
FAN
M UST
Chart--
48/50PD05
OPERA
opens
and closes
in response
When power is supplied to valve terminals
the main valve opens to its preset position.
REFRIGERANT
BE
The gas valve
limit control.
TING
ON
HIGH
to the thermostat
or
W2 (High Fire) and C1,
SPEED
The regular
160
To adjust
factory
setting is stamped
1. Set unit at setting
140
on the valve body.
regulator:
for no call for heat.
2. Turn main gas valve to OFF position.
3. Remove
120
1/8-in.
connection.
pipe
Install
plug
a suitable
from
manifold
pressure
pressure-measuring
tap
device.
4. Set main gas valve to ON position.
lOO
5. Set thermostat
6. Remove
80 ¸
at setting
screw
cap
to call for heat.
covering
regulator
adjustment
screw.
(See Fig. 37.)
7. Turn adjustment
counterclockwise
60
screw clockwise
to increase
to decrease pressure. The
in. wg on sizes 03-14
8. Once
desired
pressure
call
for
heat,
pressure-measuring
20
150
200
250
300
Compressor
350
400
Discharge
450
Pressure,
500
550
600
and 3.00 on size 16-28.
is established,
set unit setting
screw cap.
[psig]
HIGH
Puron®
i
Chart
for no
turn
off
main
gas
valve,
remove
device, and replace 1/8-in. pipe plug and
(07041
Fig. 36 - Charging
pressure
or
setting is 3.50
REGULATOR
ADJUSTMENT
48/50PD06
SCREW
LOW REGULATOR
ADJUSTMENTSCREW
Refrigerant
OUTLETPRESSURE
Puron refrigerant operates at 50 to 70 percent higher pressures than
R-22.
Be sure that servicing
equipment
and replacement
components are designed to operate with Puron refrigerant. Do not
mix with components that have been used with other refrigerants.
Puron refrigerant,
as with other HFCs, is only compatible with
POE oils.
Recovery
cylinder
systems
should
commercial-type
service
pressure
rating
HI (W2) MALE
must be 400 psig. Puron
INLET PRESSURE
TAP (PLUGGED)
be charged
with
liquid
refrigerant.
Use a
metering device in the manifold hose. Manifold
sets should be 750 psig high-side
psig low-side
retard. Use hoses
rating.
Leak
detectors
should
and 200 psig low-side with 520
with 750 psig service pressure
be designed
to detect
HFC
MAIN (Wl) MALE
SPADE TERMINAL
SPADE
TERMINAL
(08663
Fig. 37 - 48PD
refrigerant.
65
Gas Valve
9. Rotate
High Altitude
For high altitude applications greater than 2,000 ft the heat input
rate should be reduced. The higher the altitude is above sea level,
the less oxygen is in the air. See Table 8 for orifice sizing. A high
altitude
kit is available
Main
Burners
to convert
unit for altitudes
up to 7,000
Cleaning
ft.
2. Shut off power
away
assembly
Adjustment
order
to prevent
burner assembly.
the outer burners
main gas valve.
in Main Burner
gas flow
from
To prevent
are returned
exiting
the sides
of the
ignition problems,
make sure
to their original position when
done servicing.
3. Using
access door.
gas piping
to the right,
2. Inspect burners, and if dirty, remove burners from rack. The
two outer burners have the flame crossover closed off in
to unit.
3. Open gas section
4. Disconnect
manual
and
assembly
and lift burner/manifold
1. Remove burner rack from unit as described
Removal section above.
For all applications, main burners are factory set and should require
no adjustment.
Main Burner
Removal
1. Shut off (field-supplied)
the burner/manifold
from the flue extension
out of unit.
5. Remove
wires from gas valve.
6. Remove
wires from rollout
7. Remove
sensor
8. Remove
plate.
2 screws that hold the burner
brush,
clean
burners
and crossover
port
as
4. Adjust spark gap. (See Fig. 38.)
5. Reinstall burners on rack.
switch.
wire and ignitor
a soft
required.
from gas valve inlet.
6. Reinstall
cable from IGC board.
assembly
burner
rack as described
above.
to vestibule
MA×.(_P.
t
I
B
E-E
SECTION
SCALE
SPARK
2:1
GAP
D_
_C
0.120 TO 0.140"
SPARK GAP
[3.05 TO 3.56]
_
............
I
I
r
/
SECTION
O-O
SECTION
SCALE
A-A
SECTION
1:1
SCALE
B-B
SECTION
/
D-D
1:1
C06269
Fig. 38 - Spark
Gap Adjustment
Filter Drier
High-Pressure
Replace filter drier whenever
refrigerant
system is exposed
to
atmosphere.
Only use factory specified liquid-line
filter driers with
If the high-pressure
working
pressures
no less than 650 psig. Do not install
a
suction-line
filter drier in liquid line. A liquid-line
filter drier
designed for use with Puron® refrigerant is required on every unit.
Protective
Devices
Compressor
Overcurrent
Current
The
Sensor
purpose
switch
trips,
the compressor
will shut
sensor (3-phase units only) will not detect
Sensor section below for more information.
(CS) (3-Phase
Units
of the CS is to detect
down
current.
Only)
losses
in compressor
power.
a loss in compressor
power, unit control locks out
for 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, the alarm will
automatically
reset. If this alarm occurs 3 times consecutively,
the
compressor
will remain locked out until an alarm reset is initiated
Each compressor has internal line break motor protection.
Overtemperature
Each compressor has an internal protector
excessively high discharge gas temperatures.
and the current
See the Current
After detecting
the compressor
Rotation
Switch
to protect it against
via CCN or manually
via the Scrolling
Alarms and Alerts section for more details).
IMPORTANT:
48/50PD,
66
The
but reserved
current
sensor
for future
is not
Marquee
currently
implementation.
display
used
(see
in the
Evaporator Fan Motor Protection
]
Cut CompressorBase Sound /
Indoor-fan
motors
less than 5 hp are equipped
with internal
overcurrent
and overtemperature
protection.
Protection
devices
reset automatically.
Disconnect
and lock out power when servicing
motor. Indoor-fan
motors
manual
reset,
calibrated
5 hp
trip,
and larger
magnetic
resetting
Condenser-Fan
Each
or increase
the cause
the
and
Remove
the breaker.
motor
is
internally
protected
against
are located
in the control
box
and feed
power
condenser
fan motors.
Always replace blown
fuses
correct size fuse as indicated on the unit fuse label.
to the
with
the
(08664
Saturated Suction Pressure (SSP)
Fig. 39 - Base
If the SSP for a particular circuit is reading below the alarm set
point for an extended period of time, that circuit will be shut down.
After 15 minutes, the alarm will automatically reset. If this alarm
occurs 3 times consecutively,
the circuit will remain locked out
until an alarm reset is initiated
via CCN or manually
via the
Scrolling
Marquee
display
(see Alarms
and Alerts section
for more
Control
Relief Devices
units
have
relief
devices
to
protect
against
damage
excessive pressures (i.e., fire). These devices protect
low side and are located at the suction line service
joint during brazing operations
near joint.
Compressor
Sound
from
the high and
port. Protect
trouble before
annoyance
The compressor
jacket is held closed
Velcro tape. To remove the compressor
Diagnostic
The MBB,
loads and
Since the
ranges the
caused by the loading
around
jacket,
the compressor
by
separate the Velcro
along the side and top of the compressor.
Slide the jacket toward
the back of the compressor
to remove the jacket.
Make sure the
is reinstalled
The compressor
after servicing
base shield
or replacing
is accessible
when
the compressor.
the compressor
is
removed.
To remove
the base shield without
removing
the
compressor,
remove
one front compressor
mounting
bolt and
grommet.
At the three remaining
compressor
mounting grommets,
cut the sound shield so that the base shield can be slid in the
direction
of the compressor
mounting
bolt
and grommet
that was
removed.
(See Fig. 39.) Cut replacement
base shield along dotted
lines as shown in Fig. 39 and reinstall in reverse direction.
When
installing
the base
Reinstall compressor
shield, place the soft side
mounting grommet and bolt.
facing
/
24-V
1
resetting.
Parts
A complete list of replacement
Carrier distributor upon request.
shell of the compressor
and the base shield is installed between the
bottom of the compressor
and the unit base pan. The sound shield
sound shield reduces the speech
and unloading
of the compressor.
Shield
parts may be obtained
from
upward.
67
any
LEDs
ECB,
AUXI,
IGC and DSC control boards
have LED
lights for diagnostic
purposes.
The meanings and error codes
be found in the the troubleshooting
section of this manual.
Shield
reduces the difference
in noise levels as the compressor
unloads in the frequency
ranges of 200 to 2000 Hz.
human speech occurs in the 200 to 2000 Hz frequency
Sound
Each control circuit is protected against overcurrent
by a 3.2 amp
circuit breaker. Breaker can be reset. If it trips, determine cause of
The 48/50PD units are equipped with a compressor
sound shield.
The sound shield has two parts, the compressor jacket encloses the
jacket
Circuit,
Replacement
details).
All
this compressor
Slide Compressor
Base Sound
Shield in Ibis direction.
overtemperature.
Fuses
]
lines
mounting
bolt and grommet
at this location.
Motor Protection
condenser-fan
alom, doiled
are equipped
with a
circuit
breaker
and
overcurrent
protection.
Do not bypass connections
size of the breaker to correct trouble. Determine
correct it before
Shield
can
I
APPENDIX
A - LOCAL
Table
ITEM
DISPLAY
27 -- MODE
EXPANSION
RANGE
- RUN
UNITS
RUN STATUS
VIEW
STATUS
CON
View of Run Status
HVAC
Mode
Status
CCN
TABLE/SUB-TABLE
STATUS
Auto
HVAC
AND CCN TABLES
CON WRITE
STATUS
POINT
DISPLAY
(VIEW = Display
1 =Disabled
only)
HVACMODE
2=Fan Only
3=Cool
4=Heat
OCC
SAT
Yes/No
xxx..x
ALRM
Currently
Occupied
Supply Air Temperature
Current Alarms & Alerts
TIME
Time
xx.xx
MBB
Software Version Numbers
CESR 131459xx- xx
VERS
of Day
OCCUPIED
SAT DISP
ALRMALRT
dF
xx
hh.mm
TIMECOPY
VERSIONS
(xx- xx
in
MODEL
NUMBER
01
MODEL
MODEL
NUMBER
NUMBER
02
03
MODEL
NUMBER
04
table)
ECB
AUX
CESR 131249xx- xx
CESR131333-xx-xx
MARQ
CESR131171-xx-xx
MODE
Control
SYS
HVAC
Modes
MODEDISP
SYS
SYS
Unit operation
disabled
Unit operation
enabled
Service test enabled
HVAC
Operation
Ventilation
Cooling
only)
Unoccupied
Free Cooling
Heating
Remote HVAC Mode Disable
(table only)
HVACMODE
TEXT
Yes/No
(table only)
HVACDOWN
XXX.X
XXX.X
CSP EFF
HSP-EFF
Currently
Occupied
Timed Override
in Effect
Yes/No
OCCUPIED
Yes/No
D.LMT
Linkage
Demand
Yes/No
Yes/No
MODETOVR
MODELINK
C.LOC
H.LOC
Compressor
OAT Lockout
Heat OAT Lockout
E.LOC
Econo
HV.DN
EFEC
EFEH
Cool Setpoint
in Effect
Heat Setpoint
in Effect
OCC
T.OVR
LINK
COOL
Active
Limit In Effect
Cool OAT Lockout
Cooling
SASP
forcible
Yes/No
Yes/No
ECONLOCK
^F
dF
Cool Supply Air Setpoint
Cool Demand SASP Reset
XXX.X
dF
XXX.X
Dehumidifying
XXX.X
^F
^F
XXX
%
XXX.X
Point
SASP Reset
COOL
DMD
SA CqTLPT
SASP
CD RESET
RH RESET
FAINSPEED
F.SPD
Commanded
Fan Speed
CMRA
Compressor
Compressor
A Feedback
A Timeguard
On/Off
Capacity
xxx
sec
%
TIMGD
A
CAPACITY
MAX CAPC
MIN -CAPC
xxx
COMP
A
MAX.C
Max Compressor
xxx
%
MIN.C
LMT.C
Min Compressor
Capacity
Max Capacity
In Effect
xxx
xxx
%
%
CAP-LIMIT
SST.A
Sat. Suction Temp A
Suction Pressure A
xxx.x
dF
SST
xxx.x
xxx.x
SCRA
Sat. Condenser
Temp A
Condenser
Pressure A
psig
dF
xxx.x
psig
SSP A
SCT A
SCP-A
OFC.1
Outdoor
On/Off
SSRA
SCT.A
H EAT
Capacity
Fan 1 Relay
OFC-1
HEATDISP
Status
Demand
DMD.H
AVL.H
Available
REQ.H
MAX.H
Requested
Heating Stages
Max Allowed Heat Stages
X
X
REQHSTGS
MAXHSTGS
LMT.H
Max Heat Stage
X
HSTGLIMT
F.SPD
Commanded
Heat Stage
XXX.X
Heating
Heat Stage
Stages
In Effect
Fan Speed
1 Relay
XXX
1 Timequard
xxx
Heat Stage
2 Relay
TG.H2
Heat Stage
Economizer
2 Timequard
Status
xxx
%
FANSPEED
sec
HEAT
TIMED
forcible
1
ml
HEAT
TIMGD
sec
H2
ECOND!SP
EC.CP
Econo
xxx
%
ECONOCMD
EC.AP
Econo Actual Position
Min Position in Effect
xxx
%
ECONOPOS
xxx
%
IAQ Level
(switch)
High/Low
MIN POS
IAQI-N
(sensor)
XXXX
EC.MP
IAQ.S
IAQ
IAQ Level
OAT
ENTH
Outdoor
Outdoor
OAQ
OAQ Level
PE.1
PE.2
Power
Power
A1
CCH
Component
Compressor
Crankcase
IDF
OFC.1
HRS
Position
HEAT DMD
AVLHSTGS
On/Off
On/Off
Commanded
^F
X
HT.2
ECON
Air Temperature
Enthalpy
Switch
(sensor)
Exhaust
Exhaust
forcible
A
Heating
Heating
HT.1
TG.H1
forcible
COMPLOCK
HEATLOCK
XXX.X
Compressor
3
COOLD!SP
Cooling Demand
Supply Air Control
TG .A
CAPC
1
MODEDMDL
Yes/No
Status
DMD.C
SA.CP
SR.CD
SR.RH
TEXT1
TEXT2
(tab_
only) SYS MODE TEXT3
(tab_
only) HVACMODE
TEXT
HVACMODE-TEXT-2
Disabled
(fan-
MODE
MODE
1 Relay
2 Relay
Run Hours
A1 Run Hours
Htr Run Hours
XXX.X
IAQ
ppm
dF
OA TEMP
ENTHALPY
High/Low
XXXX
OAQ
ppm
PE 1
PE 2
On/Off
On/Off
STRTHOUR
XXXXX.XX
hours
HR A1
forcible
XXXXX.XX
hours
HR CCH
Indoor Fan Run Hours
Outdoor
Fan 1 Run Hours
XXXXX.XX
HR IDF
HR OFC
forcible
forcible
XXXXX.XX
hours
hours
1
forcible
HT.1
Heat Stage
XXXXX.XX
hours
HR HTR
1
HT.2
PEA
Heat Stage 2 Run Hours
Power Exhaust1 Run Hours
XXXXX.XX
HR HTR 2
HR RE 1-
forcible
forcible
XXXXX.XX
hours
hours
PE.2
Power
XXXXX.XX
hours
HR PE 2
ALRM
Alarm
XXXXX.XX
hours
HR ALM
1 Run Hours
Exhaust2
Relay
Run Hours
Run Hours
68
forcible
forcible
forcible
A - LOCAL
APPENDIX
DISPLAY
Table 27 -- MODE
ITEM
EXPANSION
STRT
Component
A1
RANGE
AND CCN TABLES
- RUN STATUS
UNITS
(CONT)
(cont)
CCN
CCN
TABLE/SUB-TABLE
Compressor
A1 Starts
Crankcase
Heater Starts
indoor Fan Starts
XXXXXX
ST A1
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
ST CCH
ST IDF
OFC.1
Outdoor
XXXXXX
ST OFC
HT.1
HT.2
Heat Stage 1 Starts
Heat Stage 2 Starts
Power Exhaust 1 Starts
XXXXXX
Power
PE.2
ALRM
(ALRMDISP)
Alarm
CCN WRITE
STATUS
Starts
CCH
IDF
PE.1
POINT
Fan 1 Starts
Exhaust
Relay
2 Starts
Starts
forcible
forcible
forcible
1
forcible
XXXXXX
ST
ST
HTR 1
HTR 2
forcible
forcible
XXXXXX
ST
PE 1
forcible
XXXXXX
ST PE 2
ST ALM
forcible
forcible
XXXXXX
ALRMDiSP
= CCN
only)
Active
Alarm
1 Code
XXX
Active
Alarm 2 Code
XXX
ALMCODE1
ALMCODE2
Active
Active
Alarm 3 Code
Alarm 4 Code
XXX
ALMCODE3
XXX
Active
Alarm 5 Code
XXX
ALMCODE4
ALMCODE5
Yes/No
ALRESET
forcible
Yes/No
ALHISCLR
forcible
Reset All Current
Reset Alarm
Alarms
History
(GENERIC = CCN
only)
GENERIC
(LON_DATA = CCN
only)
LON
up to 20 points
DATA
nviSpaceTemp
nviSetPoint
xxx.x
dF
NVI SPT
forcible
xxx.x
dF
forcible
nvoSpaceTemp
nvoUnitStatus.mode
xxx.x
dF
NVl SP
NVO SPT
NVO
MODE
nvoUnitStatus.heat_out_p
nvoUnitStatus.heat
out
xxx.x
%
NVO
HPRI
xxx.x
NVO
NVO
HSEC
COOL
ECON
nvoUnitStatus.cool
nvoUnitStatus.econ
nvoUnitStatus.fan
nvoUnitStatus.in
xxxx
s
out
xxx.x
%
%
out
out
xxx.x
%
NVO
xxx
%
NVO FAN
NVO ALRM
NVl SPTO
alarm
xxx
nviSetPtOffset
xxx.x
^F
nviOutsideTemp
nviOutsideRH
XXX.X
XXXX.X
dF
%
nvoEffectSetPt
XXX.X
dF
nvoOutsideTemp
nvoOutsideRH
XXXX.X
XXX.X
dF
%
nviSpaceRH
nviC02
XXX.X
%
nvoC02
XXXXX
nvoTEMP1
XXX.X
dF
NVO
nvoTEMP2
nviPCT1
XXX.X
XXX.X
dF
%
NVO RAT
NVl RHSP
nvoPCT1
XXX.X
%
NVO SPRH
nviDISCRETE1
nviDISCRETE2
Off/On
NVl FSD
No/Yes
NVl OCC
nviDiSCRETE3
Off/On
nvoDISCRETE1
Off/On
NVl IAQD
NV(_ FSD
nvoDISCRETE2
nvoDISCRETE3
No/Yes
NVO
Off/On
nciCO2Limit
xxxxx
NVO_IAQD
NCI C02
nciSetPnts.occupied_cool
nciSet Pnts.standby_cool
xxx.x
nciSetPnts.unoccupd_cool
NVl OAT
NVl OARH
NVO EFSP
NVO OAT
NVO OARH
NVl SPRH
NVl C02
NVO C02
XXXXX
forcible
forcible
forcible
SAT
forcible
forcible
forcible
forcible
OCC
xxx.x
dF
dF
NCI
NCI
OCSP
SCSP
xxx.x
dF
NCI
UCSP
nciSet Pnts.occupied_heat
nciSet Pnts.standby_heat
xxx.x
xxx.x
dF
dF
NCI
NCI
OHSP
SHSP
nciSetPnts.unoccupd_heat
xxx.x
dF
NCI
UHSP
69
forcible
forcible
forcible
forcible
forcible
forcible
forcible
forcible
forcible
A - LOCAL
APPENDIX
DISPLAY
AND CCN TABLES
(CONT)
Table 28 -- MODE - SERVICE TEST
ITEM
SERVICE
EXPANSION
RANGE
UNITS
DEFAULT
CON TABLE/SUB-TABLE
TEST
MAINTENANCE
TEST
Field Service
INDP
Test Independent
Test Mode
ECON
Economizer
E.CAL
Calibrate
PE.1
Power
Exhaust
PE.2
Power
Exhaust
ALRM
Alarm
CCH
Crankcase
FANS
On/Off
(TEST = display
Position
Test
0 to 100
DISPLAY
WRITE
STATUS
STATUS
DISPLAY
only)
MAN
CTRL
forcible
forcible
0
S ECONO
forcible
forcible
Off
S ECOCAL
forcible
forcible
1 Test
On/Off
Off
SPE1
forcible
forcible
2 Test
On/Off
Off
SPE2
forcible
forcible
On/Off
Off
S ALMOUT
forcible
forcible
On/Off
Off
S CCH
forcible
forcible
Off
S IDF
forcible
forcible
0
S VSPEED
forcible
forcible
Off
S OFC
1
forcible
forcible
Test
Heat Test
%
TESTFANS
IDF
Supply
VFD Power
F.SPD
Indoor
Fan Speed
OFC.1
Outdoor
Test
On/Off
Test
Fan Relay
0to
Test
100
%
On/Off
TESTCOOL
Test Cooling
CTLR
Dig Scroll
Ctrl Pwr Test
CAPC
Compressor
Capacity
F.SPD
Cool
H EAT
CON
WRITE
On/Off
Test Fans
COOL
POINT
TESTINDP
Outputs
Economizer
Relay
Off
CCN
Off
S CMPCTL
forcible
forcible
0 to 100
%
0
S VCAP
forcible
forcible
0 to 100
%
0
S VSPDCL
forcible
forcible
On/Off
Test
Test Fan Speed
Test Heating
TESTH EAT
HT.1
Heat Stage
1 Test
On/Off
Off
S HEAT
1
forcible
forcible
HT.2
Heat Stage
2 Test
On/Off
Off
S HEAT
2
forcible
forcible
POINT
CON
WRITE
DISPLAY
WRITE
STATUS
STATUS
Table
ITEM
EXPANSION
29 -- MODE
RANGE
- TEMPERATURES
UNITS
CON TABLE/SUB-TABLE
STATUS
TEMPERATURES
AIR.T
CCN
DISPLAY
UINPUT
Air Temperatures
SAT
Supply
OAT
Outdoor
SPT
Space
Temperature
SPTO
Space
Temperature
RAT
REET
xxx.x
dF
SAT
xxx.x
dF
OA TEMP
forcible
forcible
xxx.x
dF
SPACE
forcible
forcible
xxx.x
dF
SPTO
forcible
forcible
Return Air Temperature
xxx.x
dF
RETURN
forcible
forcible
Refrigerant
xxx.x
dF
xxx.x
dF
SST
A
xxx.x
dF
SCT
A
Air Temperature
Air Temperature
Offset
Temperatures
SSZA
Sat. Suction
SCZA
Sat. Condenser
Temp
A
Temp
A
Table
ITEM
EXPANSION
30 -- MODE
RANGE
D!SP
T
T
- PRESSURES
UNITS
CON TABLE/SUB-TABLE
CCN
POINT
CON
WRITE
STATUS
STATUS
PRESSURES
DISPLAY
UINPUT
SSRA
Suction
Pressure
SCRA
Condenser
A
Pressure
A
xxx.x
psig
SSP A
xxx.x
psig
SCP
7O
A
APPENDIX
A - LOCAL
Table
ITEM
EXPANSION
DISPLAY
31 -- MODE
RANGE
AND CCN TABLES
- SET POINTS
UNITS
DEFAULT
SETPOINTS
SET
Occupied
UCSP
Unoccupied
OHSP
Occupied
UHSP
Unoccupied
GAP
Heat-
STO. R
SPT Offset
SASP
Cool Supply
RH.SP
Space
RH Setpoint
RH.DB
Space
RH Deadband
C.LO
Compressor
HT.LO
Heating
EH.LO
Econo
Cool
Hi Temp
Limit
ELLO
Econo
Cool
Lo Temp
FC.LO
Free Cool
Low Temp
Cool
78
OCSP
75 to 95F
dF
85
UCSP
55 to 80F
dF
68
OHSP
40 to 80F
dF
6O
UHSP
2to
^F
5
HCSP
GAP
0 to 5F
^F
5
SPTO
RNG
45 to 75
dF
65
SASP
30 to 95
%
5O
SPRH
SP
2 to 20
%
5
SPRH
DB
0 to 100F
dF
0
OATLCOMP
40 to 125F
dF
75
OATLH EAT
40 to 100F
dF
65
OATLECLH
Limit
- 30 to 50F
dF
0
OATLECLL
Limit
0 to 70F
dF
5O
OATLUEFC
Heat Setpoint
Setpoint
Cool Setpoint
Range
Gap
(+/-)
Air Setpoint
Lockout
Lockout
Temp
Temp
10F
Table
ITEM
PNT
dF
Setpoint
Heat
CONFIGURATION
55 to 80F
Setpoint
Cool
CON POINT
CON TABLE/SUB-TABLE
SETPOINT
OCSP
(CONT)
EXPANSION
RANGE
32 --
MODE
- INPUTS
CCN
UNITS
CON TABLE/SUB-TABLE
STATUS
INPUTS
POINT
CON
WRITE
DISPLAY
WRITE
STATUS
STATUS
DISPLAY
UINPUTS
GEN.I
General
Inputs
FILS
Filter Status
FAN.S
Fan Status
FDWN
Fire Shutdown
ENTH
Outdoor
Enthalpy
RM.OC
Remote
Occupancy
HUM
Space
CMRA
Compressor
C.ALM
Scroll
CS.IN
Current
CS.A1
AIR.Q
Switch
Switch
Switch
Humidity
Switch
Switch
A Feedback
Compressor
Sensor
Compressor
Switch
Alarm
Dirty/Clean
FILTSTAT
forcible
On/Off
FAN
STAT
forcible
On/Off
FIREDOWN
forcible
High/Low
ENTHALPY
forcible
On/Off
REM
OCC
forcible
High/Low
HUM
STAT
forcible
On/Off
COMP
A
On/Off
COMP
ALM
On/Off
CS
Inputs
A1 Feedback
A1
Air Quality
Inputs
IAQ.S
IAQ Level
(switch)
High/Low
IAQIN
forcible
forcible
IAQ
IAQ Level
(sensor)
xxxx
ppm
IAQ
forcible
forcible
OAQ
OAQ Level
xxxx
OAQ
forcible
forcible
SRRH
Space
ppm
%
SPRH
forcible
forcible
(sensor)
Humidity
Sensor
xxx.x
71
A - LOCAL
APPENDIX
Table
DISPLAY
AND CCN TABLES
33 -- MODE
- OUTPUTS
(CONT)
CCN
ITEM
EXPANSION
RANGE
UNITS
CCN
TABLE/SUB-TABLE
STATUS
OUTPUTS
POINT
DISPLAY
WRITE
WRITE
STATUS
STATUS
DISPLAY
UOUTPUT
FANS
Fan Outputs
IDF
Indoor
F.SPD
Commanded
OFC.1
Outdoor
COOL
Fan VFD Pwr Relay
Fan Speed
Fan 1 Relay
IDF
On/Off
xxx
FANSPEED
%
OFC
On/Off
1
Cool Outputs
CTLR
Digital
CAPC
Compressor
CCH
Crankcase
H EAT
Scroll
Ctrl Pwr
On/Off
Capacity
xxx
Heat
Relay
COMPCTLR
CAPACITY
%
On/Off
CCH
Heat
Outputs
HT.1
Heat
Stage
1 Relay
On/Off
HEAT
1
HT.2
Heat
Stage 2 Relay
On/Off
HEAT
2
EC.CP
Economizer
Outputs
Econo Commanded
EC.AP
Econo
Actual
PE.1
Power
Exhaust
1 Relay
On/Off
PE.2
Power
Exhaust
2 Relay
On/Off
Alarm
Relay
On/Off
ECON
ALRM
CCN
Position
Position
0 to 100
%
ECONOCMD
0 to 1O0
%
ECONOPOS
72
forcible
forcible
PE 1
forcible
forcible
PE 2
forcible
forcible
ALMOUT
forcible
forcible
A - LOCAL
APPENDIX
Table
ITEM
DISPLAY
AND CCN TABLES
34 -- MODE
- CONFIGURATION
RANGE
UNITS
EXPANSION
CON
DEFAULT
TABLE/SUB-TABLE
CONFIGURATION
DISP
(CONT)
CCN
POINT
PAGE
NO.
SERVICE
CONFIGURATION
Display
DISPLAY
Configuration
METR
Metric
LANG
Language
Selection
PROT
Password
Enable
PSWD
Service
Password
TEST
Test Display
On/Off
Off
Display
On/Off
Off
DISPUNIT
0=English
1 =Spanish
2=French
0
LANGUAGE
Enable/Disable
Disable
PASS
EBL
12
0000 to 9999
1111
PASSWORD
12
DISPTEST
12
3=Portuguese
LEDs
(display
only,
not in
table)
UNIT
UNIT
Unit Configuration
0 to 600
30
STARTDLY
12
Yes
OCC
FAN
12
Yes
FATALFAN
12
Fan Maximum
Yes/No
Yes/No
80 to 100
%
100
SPEEDMAX
12
Fan Minimum
10to
%
2O
SPEEDMIN
12
^F
5O
SPEEDVNT
12
0: no FlOP
FANSTCFG
12
0: no FlOP
1: FlOP
FILSTCFG
12
0: no FlOP
SHTDNCFG
12
0
REMOCCFG
12
No
RH OAQ
13
0
HUMSTCFG
13
S.DLY
Startup
OC.FN
Fan On When
IDF.F
Shut Down
FS.MX
Supply
Delay
Occupied
on IDF Failure
Speed
FS.MN
Supply
40
Speed
FS.VM
Vent Mode
Fan Speed
40 to 100
FN.SW
Fan Status
Switch
0=No
Switch
1 =Normal
2=Normal
FL.SW
Filter Status
Switch
0=No
Switch
1 =Normal
2=Normal
FS.SW
Fire Shutdown
Switch
0=No
Remote
Switch
0=No
Occupancy
RH Sensor
RH.SW
Space
on OAQ Input
Humidity
Switch
1: FlOP
Open
Closed
Switch
1 =Normal
2=Normal
RH.S
Open
Closed
Switch
1 =Normal
2=Normal
RM.SW
1: FlOP
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Yes/No
0=No
Switch
1 =Normal
2=Normal
Open
Closed
TCS.C
Temp
Cmp
Strt Cool Factr
0 to 60
mins
TCSTCOOL
13
TCS.H
Temp
Cmp
Strt Heat Factr
0 to 60
mins
TCSTHEAT
13
COOL
Cooling
COOL
Configuration
MIN.C
Min Compressor
FS.CD
Fan Speed
Demand
%
7O
MIN CAPC
14
1 to 9.9
^F
3
SPEEDDMD
17
MRT.C
Compressor
MOT.C
Compressor
Min On Time
120 to 999
sec
18O
MIN ON
Min Off Time
300 to 999
sec
3OO
RST.C
Runtime
to Reset Strikes
MIN OFF
120 to 999
sec
3OO
FOD.C
Fan-off
MIN ON
Delay, Mech Cool
0 to 600
sec
6O
COOL
CS.A1
Current
Sensing
Enable/Disable
Capacity
Control
A1
15to
80
CFG
Disable:
future
reserved
for
S
24
FOD
A1 SENSE
25
use
DO NOT ENABLE
C.LO
Compressor
0 to 100F
Lockout
dF
0
OATLCOMP
Yes
ALM
Temp
ALM.N
Alert
SAT
Supply
Each Strike
Yes//No
NOW
24
Air Temperature
SASP
Cool Supply
45 to 75
dF
65
SASP
17
SA.MU
SASP Maximum
Reset Up
0 to 20
^F
10
SASPMAXU
18
SA.MD
SASP Maximum
Reset
-20
^F
-10
SASPMAXD
18
35.0 to 65.0
35.0 to 65.0
dF
6O
SATMIN
H
dF
45
SATMIN
L
Air Setpoint
to 0
Down
SAT.U
Minimum
SAT Upper
Level
SAT.L
Minimum
SAT Lower
Level
SST
Low Suction
Control
SSZO
Suction
10to
50
dF
18
SSTOK
26
SSZ1
Low Suction
-
Level
1
10to
50
dF
2O
SSTLEV1
26
SSZ2
Low Suction
-
Level
2
5 to 50
dF
15
SSTLEV2
26
SSZ3
Low Suction
-
Level
3
0 to 50
dF
10
SSTLEV3
PSI.D
Ckt A Minimum
0 to 500
psig
2O
DELTAP
OFC
Outdoor
OK Temperature
Pressure
26
A
26
Fan Control
1 .MXP
Fan Levl
Max Pressure
100 to 500
psig
450
LEV1MAXP
15
2.MNP
Fan Lev2
Min Pressure
100 to 500
psig
200
LEV2MINP
15
2.ON
Fan Lev2
On Temperature
0to
100
F
55
LEV2ON
15
2.OFF
Fan Lev2
Off Temperature
0to
100
F
45
LEV2OFF
15
73
A - LOCAL
APPENDIX
DISPLAY
Table 34 -- MODE
ITEM
H EAT
EXPANSION
Heating
HT.TY
RANGE
AND CCN TABLES
- CONFIGURATION
UNITS
(cont)
CCN
DEFAULT
TABLE/SUB-TABLE
HEAT
Configuration
Type of Heat
Installed
0=No
Heat
1 =Gas
0 (50 series with
electric heat)
2=Electric
1 (48 series)
2 (50 series with
electric
CCN
POINT
PAGE
NO.
CFG
no
HEATTYPE
2O
NUM
HEAT
22
heat)
N.HTR
Number
MRT.H
Heat
Minimum
On Time
60 to 999
sec
series
12O
HMIN
ON
22
MOT.H
Heat
Minimum
Off Time
60 to 999
sec
12O
HMIN
OFF
22
H.DEC
Heat Stage
Time
Decrease
120 to 999
sec
3OO
HSTAGDEC
22
H.INC
Heat Stage
Increase
120 to 999
sec
450
HSTAGINC
21
FOD.E
Fan-
10 to 600
sec
30
ELEC
22
FOD.G
Fan-off
Delay, Gas Heat
45 to 600
sec
45
GAS
FOD
20
HT.LO
Heating
Lockout
40 to 125F
dF
75
OATLHEAT
20
SAT
SUPPLY AIR
TEMPERATURE
SAT. H
SAM.L
of Heat Stages
Time
off Delay, Elect Heat
SAT Heat
Maximum
Temp
1 to2
(CONT)
1 (50 series <15kW)
2 (48 series, 50
Enable/Disable
> = 15kW)
FOD
Mode Sensing
SAT Lower
Disable
SAT
85 to 200
dF
140
SATMAX
HEAT
L
21
21
SAT Upper
85 to 200
dF
160
SATMAX
H
21
Level
SAM.U
SPT
Maximum
Level
SPACE
TEMPERATURE
HT, PD
SPT Heat
Level
Demand
(+)
0.5to
5
^F
1
HDEM
POS
21
HZND
SPT Heat
Level
Demand
(-)
-5to
-0.5
^F
-1
HDEM
NEG
21
H.LAG
Heat Thermal
min
1
ECON
Lag Factor
Economizer
Configuration
EC.EN
Economizer
Installed
E.CTL
Economizer
Control
MR25
Econ Min at 25%
Type
0 to 5
HEAT
ECON
LAG
Yes/No
No: no FlOP
Yes: FlOP
ECONO
1 =Dig/Position
2=Dig/Command
1
ECON
3=Analog
21
CFG
8
CTL
10
Ctrl
0to
100
%
0
MINP
25
19
0to
100
%
0
MINP
50
19
0to
100
%
0
MINP
75
19
0 to 100
%
30
MINP
MAX
19
0to
%
100
ECONOMAX
Fanspeed
MR50
Econ Min at 50%
Fanspeed
MR75
Econ Min at 75%
Fanspeed
MRMX
Econ Min at Max
Fanspeed
EC.MX
Econo
M.ANG
Min Actuator
Oool
Max Position
100
EH.LO
Econo
Cool
Hi Temp
Limit
40 to 100F
EL.LO
Econo
Oool
Lo Temp
Limit
- 30 to 50F
DF.DB
Diff Dry Bulb Control
UEFC
Unoccupied
75 to 90
Ctrl Angle
Free Cooling
88
MINANGLE
27
dF
65
OATLECLH
15
dF
0
OATLECLL
15
Disable/Enable
Enable
DIFFBULB
0=Disabled
2
UEFC
CFG
15
1 =Unoccupied
2= Preoccupancy
FC.TM
Free Cool PreOcc
FC.LO
Free Cool Low Temp
PE.EN
Power
Exhaust
installed
Yes/No
PE1 .C
Power
CFM
Exhaust
Stage1
100 to 15000
PE2.C
Power
CFM
Exhaust
Stage2
IDF.C
Indoor
CFM
Fan Max Speed
EN.SW
Enthalpy
Switch
Time
Limit
1 to 9999
min
120
UEFCTIME
16
-30
dF
50
OATLUEFC
16
No: no FlOP
Yes: FlOP
PE ENABL
16
cfm
600
PE1CFM
16
100 to 15000
cfm
0
PE2 CFM
16
500 to 15000
cfm
1600 (05)
2000 (06)
IDF CFM
16
0: no FlOP
ENTHLCFG
59
0=No
to 70F
Switch
1 =Normal
2=Normal
Open
Closed
1: FlOP
74
APPENDIX
A - LOCAL
DISPLAY
Table 34 -- MODE
ITEM
AIR.Q
EXPANSION
Air Quality
IA.CF
RANGE
AND CCN TABLES
- CONFIGURATION
UNITS
DEFAULT
(cont)
CON
TABLE/SUB-TABLE
IAQ
Config.
IAQ Analog
Input
Config
0=No
IAQ
1 = DCV
(CONT)
CCN
POINT
PAGE
NO.
CFG
0: no FlOP
1: FlOP
IAQANCFG
59
0
IAQANFAN
14
0
IAQINCFG
17
IAQINFAN
17
2=Override
IAQ
3=Ctrl
Min Pos
IA.FN
IAQ Analog
Fan Config
0 = Neve r
1 =Occupied
2=Always
II.CF
IAQ Switch
Input Config
0=No
IAQ
1 = DCV N/O
2 = DCV N/C
3=Override
4=Override
II.FN
IAQ Switch
Fan Config
N/O
N/C
0 = Neve r
1 =Occupied
AQ.MN
Econo
OVR.P
IAQ Override
OA.CF
OAQ Analog
2=Always
0to 100
%
10
IAQMINP
17
Position
0to
%
100
IAQOVPOS
17
Input Config
0=No
0
OAQANCFG
17
Min IAQ Position
100
OAQ
1 = DCV
2=Lockout
OAQ
OAQ.L
OAQ Lockout
Limit
0 to 5000
6OO
OAQLOCK
17
AQD.L
AQ Differential
Low
0 to 5000
100
DAQ
LOW
19
AQD.H
AQ Differential
High
0 to 5000
7OO
DAQ
HIGH
19
DF.ON
Fan On AQ Differential
0 to 5000
6OO
DAQFNON
17
DF.OF
Fan Off AQ Differential
0 to 5000
2OO
DAQFNOFF
17
1.4M
IAQ Sensor
Value
at 4mA
0 to 5000
0
IAQ 4MA
16
1.20M
IAQ Sensor
Value
at 20mA
0 to 5000
2000
IAQ_20MA
16
O.4M
OAQ Sensor
Value
at 4mA
0 to 5000
0
OAQ_4MA
17
O.20M
OAQ Sensor
20mA
Value
at
0 to 5000
2000
OAQ
17
H.4M
RH Sensor
Value
at 4mA
0 to 50
%
0
RH 4MA
H.20M
RH Sensor
Value
at 20mA
60 to 100
%
100
ALM.O
Alarm
Relay
A.SPC
SPT/SPRH
A.SRT
SAT/RAT
A.OAT
OAT Thermistor
A.CS
Current
A.CMP
Compressor
A.CKT
Refrig Circuit
A.SSP
SSP Transducer
A.SCT
SCT Thermistor
A.FAN
Indoor
A.FIL
Dirty Filter
A.ECO
Economizer
PID
Sensor
Failure
Sensor
Failure
Failure
Sensor
RH 20MA
ALM
Config.
Failure
Failure
Failure
Failure
Failure
Fan Failure
Failure
20MA
CFG
Yes/No
Yes
SPACE
Yes/No
Yes
SATRATAL
Yes/No
Yes
OAT
Yes/No
No
CS
Yes/No
Yes
COMP
Yes/No
Yes
CKT
AL
Yes/No
Yes
SSP
AL
Yes/No
Yes
SCT
AL
Yes/No
Yes
FAN
AL
Yes/No
Yes
FILT AL
Yes/No
Yes
AL
AL
AL
ECON
PID
PID Configurations
AL
AL
CFG
EC.P
Economizer
PID -
kP
0.0 to 99.9
2.5
ECONO
P
EC.I
Economizer
PID -
kl
0.0 to 99.9
0.1
ECONO
I
EC.D
Economizer
PID -
kD
0.0 to 99.9
1
ECONO
D
EC.DT
Economizer
PID -
rate
10.0 to 180.0
sec
15
ECONO
DT
E.DBD
Economizer
Deadband
PID
0 to 25
%
3
ECONBAND
CRP
Capacity
PID - kP
0 to 99.9
1.5
VCAP
P
CRI
Capacity
PID - kl
0 to 99.9
0.1
VCAP
I
CRD
Capacity
PID - kD
0 to 99.9
1
VCAP
D
CRDT
Capacity
PID - rate
1 to 30
5
VCAP
LK.P
Linkage
Staging
PID - kP
0.0 to 99.9
10
LINK
P
LK.I
Linkage
Staging
PID - kl
0.0 to 99.9
5
LINK
I
LK.D
Linkage
Staging
PID - kD
0.0 to 99.9
5
LINK
D
LK.DT
Linkage
rate
Staging
PID -
10.0 to 180.0
30
LINK
DT
secs
secs
75
DT
APPENDIX
A - LOCAL
DISPLAY
Table 34 -- MODE
ITEM
(GENERIC
= CCN
TRIM
EXPANSION
RANGE
AND CCN TABLES
- CONFIGURATION
UNITS
DEFAULT
(CONT)
(cont)
CCN
TABLE/SUB-TABLE
CCN
POINT
GENERICS
only)
POINT 01 Definition
8- char
ASCII
Point
01
POINT 02 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
02
POINT 03 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
03
POINT 04 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
04
POINT 05 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
05
POINT 06 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
06
POINT 07 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
07
POINT 08 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
08
POINT 09 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
09
POINT
10 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
10
POINT
11 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
11
POINT
12 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
12
POINT
13 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
13
POINT
14 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
14
POINT
15 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
15
POINT
16 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
16
POINT
17 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
17
POINT
18 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
18
POINT
19 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
19
POINT 20 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
20
Sensor
Calibration
PAGE
NO.
5
(CCN TRIM - see
Maintenance
Display)
SPT.C
SPT.T
SAT.C
Space
Space
Temp Calibration
Temp Trim
Supply
-30to
130
dF
38
^ F
dF
0
Air Temp Calib.
-30 to 30
-30to
130
38
38
Air Temp Trim
-30
^ F
0
38
dF
^ F
0
38
37
SAT.T
to 30
Supply
RAT.C
RAT.T
Return Air Temp Calib.
Return Air Temp Trim
CCN.A
CCN Configuration
CCN Element
Number
1to
239
1
CCNADD
8
CCN.B
CCN Bus Number
0to
239
0
CCNBUS
8
BAUD
CCN Baud
2400,4800,9600,
3
CCNBAUDD
8
No
No
CCNBC
OATBC
23
23
No
GSBC
23
No
CCNBCACK
23
SCHEDNUM
23
-30to
130
-30 to 30
CONFIGURATION
CCN
Rate
48
50
PD
19200,38400
BROD
B.TIM
B.OAT
CCN Broadcast
Config.
CCN Time/Date
Broadcast
CCN OAT Broadcast
B.GS
Global
B.ACK
CCN Broadcast
CCN Schedule
SCH.O
SCH.N
Schedule
Schedule
Broadcst
Ack'er
Overrides
Number
BRODEFS
Yes/No
Yes/No
Yes/No
Yes/No
SCHEDOVR
0 = Always
Occupied
1-64
Local
= Global
HOL.G
OV.TL
OV. EX
OV.SP
LDSH
=
Schedule
65-99
Schedule
Accept
Global Holidays
Override Time Limit
Timed Override
Hours
Yes/No
0to 4
No
HOLIDAYT
23
hours
4
OTL
23
0to
hours
SPT Override
Yes/No
0
Yes
OVR EXT
TIME-OVER
23
23
0
100
SHED NUM
MAXCREDL
24
24
100
MAXCSHED
2
2
MAXHREDL
MAXHSHED
CCN Schedule
Enabled
4
Overrides
S.GRP
R.MXC
Loadshed
Group Number
Redline Max Capacity
S.MXC
Loadshed
R.MXH
S.MXH
Redline Max Heat Stages
Loadshed
Max Heat
Max Capacity
LOADSHED
Oto
Oto
Oto
Oto
Oto
16
100
100
2
2
%
%
Stages
76
24
A - LOCAL
APPENDIX
Table
ITEM
TIME
DISPLAY
35 --
EXPANSION
MODE
AND CCN TABLES
- TIME
RANGE
(CONT)
CLOCK
UNITS
CCN
DEFAULT
CCN
TABLE/SUB-TABLE
CLOCK
POINT
CONFIGURATION
TIME
TIME
Time of Day
TIME
Hour
DATE
MNTH
and Minute
Current
Date
Month
of Year
xx.xx
hh.mm
January,
February,
December
[]
TIME
MOY
&,
DOM
Day of Month
1 to31
DOM
YEAR
Year
xxxx
YOCDISP
DAY
Day of Week
Monday,
Tuesday,
[]
DOWD!SP
&,
Sunday
DST
Daylight
Savings
BRODEFS
Config.
(continued)
STR.M
Start Month
January,
February,
December
STR.W
Start Week
1 to5
2
STARTW
STR.D
Start Day
1 to7
7
STARTD
M.ADD
Minutes
0 to 90
6O
MINADD
STRM
Stop Month
January,
February,
December
11
STOPM
STRW
Stop Week
1 to5
1
STO PW
STRD
Stop Day
1 to7
7
STOPD
M.SUB
Minutes
0 to 90
6O
SCH.L
to Add
to Subtract
Occupancy
[]
[]
STARTM
&,
&,
MINSUB
Schedule
(SCH.L
= Display
only)
PER.x
Occupancy
OCC.x
Occupied
From
OO.OO to 23.59
hh.mm
00.00
PERxOCC
UNC.x
Occupied
To
OO.OO to 23.60
hh.mm
00.00
PERxUNC
MON.x
Monday
in Period
Yes/No
No
PERxMON
TUE.x
Tuesday
in Period
Yes/No
No
PERxTUE
WED.x
Wednesday
Yes/No
No
PERxWED
THU.x
Thursday
Yes/No
No
PERxTHU
FRI.x
Friday
Yes/No
No
PERxFRI
SAT.x
Saturday
Yes/No
No
PERxSAT
SUN.x
Sunday
in Period
Yes/No
No
PERxSUN
HOL.x
Holiday
in Period
Yes/No
No
PERxHOL
(repeat
Period
x
in Period
in Period
in Period
in Period
up to x=8
Periods)
(OCCFECS
= CCN
OCCDEFCS
only)
Timed
Override
Period
x DOW
Hours
hours
x
OVR-
xxxxxxxx
EXT
00000000
DOWx
00.00
00.00
OCCTODx
(MTWTFSSH)
Occupied
From
00.00
to 24.00
hh.mm
Occupied
To
00.00
to 24.00
hh.mm
UNOCTODx
(repeat up to
x=8 Periods)
HOL.L
HOLIDAY
Holiday
Schedule
HOL.x
Holiday
x
MON.x
Holiday
Start Month
1 to 12 = January
December
DAY.x
Holiday
Start Day
1 to31
HOLDAYxx
LEN.x
Holiday
Duration
1 to 99
HOLLENxx
(repeat
HOLDYxxS
(days)
HOLMONxx
to
up to x=9
(repeat
xx=30
Holidays)
up to
Holidays)
Table
ITEM
(ALARMDEF
EXPANSION
= CCN
RANGE
TABLES
UNITS
DEFAULT
only)
Routing
Equipment
Comm
Control
Priority
Failure
Re-Alarm
Retry
00000000
Oto
Time
Time
Alarm System
= CCN
ONLY
CCN
TABLE/SUB-TABLE
CCN
POINT
ALARMDEF
Alarm
(CTLRID
36 -- CCN
Name
to 11111111
7
11000000
ALRM
4
EQP
1 to 240
min
10
RETRY
1 to 255
min
18O
RE-ALARM
48
up to 8 alphanum
50
PD
ALRM
CTLR-
only)
Device
Name:
Description:
Software
Model
Serial
48
50
PD
text string
Location:
text string
Part Number:
CESR 131459 - XX- XX
Number:
Number:
Reference
CNT
TYPE
Number:
77
ID
TM
NAM
APPENDIX
A - LOCAL
DISPLAY
AND CCN TABLES
Table 37 1 MODE - OPERATING
ITEM
OPERATING
EXPANSION
RANGE
UNITS
MODES
MODE
MODES
CCN
CCN
CCN
TABLE/SUB-TABLE
POINT
DISPLAY
WRITE
WRITE
STATUS
STATUS
MAINTENANCE
DISPLAY
Control
SYS
(CONT)
Modes
MODES
SYS
SYS
Unit operation
disabled
Unit operation
enabled
Service test enabled
MODE
MODE
TEXT1
TEXT2
(table only)
SYS MODE
TEXT3
(table only)
HVAC
HVAC Operation
Ventilation
(fanCooling
Unoccupied
HVACMODE
1
_4VACMODE
Disabled
only)
Free Cooling
3 (table
Remote
HVAC
Mode
TEXT
2 (table only)
_4VACMODE
TEXT
Heating
HV.DN
TEXT
only)
Yes/No
HVACDOWN
forcible
Disable
EFF.C
Cool Setpoint
in Effect
XXX.X
CSP
EFF
EFF.H
Heat Setpoint
in Effect
XXX.X
HSP
EFF
OCC
Currently
Yes/No
OCCUPIED
T.OVR
Timed
Yes/No
MODETOVR
LINK
Linkage
Active
D.LMT
Demand
Limit
C.LOC
Compressor
H.LOC
E.LOC
COOL
Occupied
Override
in Effect
forcible
Yes/No
MODELINK
In Effect
Yes/No
MODEDMDL
OAT Lockout
Yes/No
COMPLOCK
Heat OAT Lockout
Yes/No
HEATLOCK
Econo
Yes/No
Cool
OAT Lockout
Cool Mode
COOL
In Cooling
OK.CL
OKto
MS.TG
OK.EC
ECONLOCK
COOLDIAG
Diagnostic
Yes/No
IN
Yes/No
OKTOCOOL
Mode Select Timeguard
OK to Use Economizer?
xxx
COOLMSTG
Yes/No
ECONCOOL
OK.MC
OK to Use Compressor?
Yes/No
MECHCOOL
C.LOC
Compressor
OAT Lockout
Yes/No
C.LO
Compressor
Lockout
xxx
IDF
Indoor
F.SPD
Commanded
REQ.C
Requested
Mode?
Select
Cool Mode?
Temp
Fan State
Fan Speed
Cooling
COOL
COMPLOCK
dF
OATLCOMP
On/Off
IDFSTATE
xxx
FANSPEED
xxx
REQ
CAPC
Capacity
MIN.C
Min Compressor
MAX.C
Max Compressor
LMT.C
Max Capacity
CAPC
Compressor
CTLR
Digital
CMRA
Compressor
ST.A
Circuit
F.LEV
Outdoor
SAT
Supply
Air Temperature
SAT
Supply
Air Temperature
xxx.x
dF
SAT
DISP
SA.DM
Supply
Air Temp
xxx.x
^F
SAT
DMD
SAT. U
Minimum
Minimum
xx.x
dF
SATMIN
H
xx.x
dF
SATMIN
L
xxx.x
dF
SPACE
SAT. L
SPT
Scroll
xxx
%
MIN
xxx
%
MAX
xxx
%
CAPLIMIT
Capacity
xxx
%
CAPACITY
Ctrl Pwr
On/Off
COMPCTLR
A Feedback
On/Off
COMP
x
ASTRIKES
x
FANLEV
Capacity
Capacity
In Effect
A Strikes
Fan Level
Demand
SAT Upper
SAT Lower
Space
Temperature
SPT
Space
Temperature
TRND
Spacetemp
DMD.C
Cooling
Trend
Demand
Level
Level
(F/min)
CAPC
A
T
SPTTREND
xxx.x
xxx.x
CAPC
^F
COOL
78
DMD
forcible
forcible
A - LOCAL
APPENDIX
Table 37 -ITEM
EXPANSION
DISPLAY
MODE
RANGE
AND CCN TABLES
- OPERATING
MODES
(cont)
CCN
CCN
UNITS
(CONT)
CCN
POINT
TABLE/SUB-TABLE
H EAT
Heat
Mode
In Heating
OK.HT
OKto
Select
Heat
MS.TG
Mode
Select
Timeguard
H.LOC
Heat OAT Lockout
HT.LO
Heating
IDF
indoor
F.SPD
Commanded
AVL.H
Available
REQ.H
Requested
LMT.H
Max Heat Stage
ACT.H
Actual
HT.1
Heat Stage
HT.2
Heat Stage
SAT
Supply
Mode?
Mode?
IN
Yes/No
OKTOHEAT
xxx
Temp
secs
HEAT
HEATLOCK
OATLH EAT
On/Off
IDFSTATE
xxx
FANSPEED
x
AVLHSTGS
x
REQHSTGS
x
HSTGLIMT
x
ACTHSTGS
1 Relay
On/Off
HEAT
1
2 Relay
On/Off
HEAT
2
Fan Speed
Heating
Stages
Heating
Heating
Stages
In Effect
Stages
Air Temperature
SAT Heat
SAT
Supply
SAM.L
Maximum
SAT Lower
SAM.U
Maximum
SAT Upper
Mode
SAT
HEAT
xxx.x
dF
SAT
DISP
Level
xxx
dF
SATMAX
L
Level
xxx
dF
SATMAX
H
Sensing
Air Temperature
Enable/Disable
Space
Temperature
SPT
Space
Temperature
xxx.x
dF
SPACE
DMD.H
Heating
Demand
xxx.x
dF
HEAT
TRND
Spacetemp
(F/min)
xxx.x
HT.PD
SPT Heat
Level
Demand
(+)
xx.x
HZND
SPT Heat
Level
Demand
(-)
H.LAG
Heat Thermal
ECON
Trend
Economizer
EC.EN
Economizer
OCC
Currently
IDF
Indoor
HDEM
POS
^F
HDEM
NEG
min
HEAT
Fan State
In Cooling
E.LOC
Econo
Cool
EH.LO
Econo
EL.LO
Econo
LAG
ECONDiAG
Installed
Commanded
Yes/No
ECONO
Yes/No
OCCUPIED
On/Off
IDFSTATE
NNN
FANSPEED
Yes/No
IN
OAT Lockout
Yes/No
ECONLOCK
Cool
Hi Temp
Limit
xxx
dF
OATLECLH
Cool
Lo Temp
Limit
xx
dF
OATLECLL
FC.LO
Free Cool Low Temp
Limit
xx
dF
OATLUEFC
EN.LO
Econo
Cool
Enth Lockout
Yes/No
EC.MX
Econo
Cool
Max Position
xxx
AQ.DV
IAQ DCV Mode
Yes/No
AQ.MN
Econo
xxx
AQ.OV
IAQ Override
Mode
Yes/No
OVR.P
IAQ Override
Position
xxx
AQ.LO
OAQ Lockout
Mode
Yes/No
IN_OAQLO
OAQ.L
OAQ Lockout
Limit
xxxx
OAQLOCK
LROV
Lo Refrig
EC.CP
Econo Commanded
Position
xxx
%
ECONOCMD
EC.AP
Econo
xxx
%
ECONOPOS
EC.MP
Min Position
xxx
%
MIN
C.ANG
Actuator
E.CAL
Economizer
Fan Speed
Mode?
Min IAQ Position
Press Override
Actual
Position
in Effect
Control
Limiting
D.LMT
Demand
Limit
LMT.C
Max Capacity
LMT.H
Max Heat Stage
REDL
Redline
SHED
Loadshed
MAX.C
Max Compressor
MAX.H
Max Allowed
(Display
TRIM
Configuration)
-
see
Sensor
forcible
COOL
ECONOMAX
IN
%
iAQDV
IAQMINP
IN_iAQOV
%
IAQOVPOS
IN
Yes/No
LPOV
POS
forcible
forcible
CTLANGLE
Yes/No
ECOiNCAL
DMDL
In Effect
Yes/No
MODEDMDL
In Effect
xxx
CAPLIMIT
x
HSTGLIMT
Yes/No
MODEREDL
Yes/No
MODESHED
Capacity
x
MAX
Stages
x
MAXHSTGS
In Effect
Activated
Activated
Heat
Calibration
forcible
CAPC
forcible
TRIM
Space
Temp Calibration
-30to
dF
SPT
CAL
forcible
Space
Temp Trim
- 30 to 30
^F
SPT
OFF
forcible
Supply
Air Temp Calib.
-30to
dF
SAT
CAL
forcible
Supply
Air Temp Trim
- 30 to 30
^F
SAT
OFF
forcible
-30to
dF
RAT
CAL
forcible
^F
RAT
OFF
forcible
Return Air Temp
forcible
ENTHLOCK
%
Angle
Calibrating
Demand
forcible
SPTTREND
Lag Factor
Occupied
F.SPD
T
DMD
^F
Diagnostic
COOL
DMD.L
WRITE
STATUS
HEATMSTG
dF
xxx
Fan State
SAT. H
SPT
Yes/No
Yes/No
Lockout
DISPLAY
HEATDiAG
Diagnostic
HEAT
WRITE
STATUS
Calib.
Return Air Temp Trim
130
130
130
- 30 to 30
79
APPENDIX
A - LOCAL
Table 37 --
ITEM
EXPANSION
DISPLAY
MODE
AND CCN TABLES
- OPERATING
RANGE
MODES
(cont)
CCN
CCN
UNITS
(CONT)
CCN
POINT
WRITE
STATUS
TABLE/SUB-TABLE
(OCCDEFM
(LINKDATA
= CCN
= CCN
only)
only)
Occupancy
Mode
Current
Occup
(1 =Occup)
Period
#
0,1
0to
MODE
8
Time-Override
in Effect
Yes/No
Time-
Duration
0to
Override
Current
Occupied
Current
Unoccupied
Time
Time
PER
Day
Next Occupied
Time
hours
OVR
xx.xx
4
hh:mm
STRTTIME
xx.xx
hh:mm
ENDTIME
hh:mm
Day
Next Unoccupied
Time
NXTOCTIM
hh:mm
Previous
Unoccupied
Day
Previous
Unoccupied
Time
NXTUNTIM
PRVUNDAY
hh.mm
PRVUNTIM
LINKDATA
- Linkage
Supervisory
Element
Supervisory
Bus
Supervisory
Block
#
Number
xxx
SUPE-ADR
xxx
SUPE-BUS
xxx
BLOCKNUM
Average
Occup.
Heat
Stp.
xxxx.x
dF
AOHS
Average
Occup.
Cool Stp.
xxxx.x
dF
AOCS
Average
Unocc.
Heat Stp.
xxxx.x
dF
AUHS
Average
Unocc.
Cool Stp.
xxxx.x
dF
AUCS
Average
Zone
Temperature
xxxx.x
dF
AZT
Average
Occup.
Zone Temp
xxxx.x
dF
AOZT
Linkage
System
Occupied?
Yes/No
Next Occupied
HRS
NXTUNDAY
Next Unoccupied
Next Occupied
NO
OVERLAST
NXTOCDAY
Next Occupied
CCN
"Mon",
Day
Time
LOCC
"Tue",
3-cha
LNEXTOCD
&, "Sun"
r text
xx:xx
hh:mm
LNEXTOCC
3-cha
LNEXTUOD
Next Unoccupied
Day
"Mon",
&, "Sun"
r text
Next Unoccupied
Time
xx:xx
hh:mm
LNEXTUNC
Last Unoccupied
Day
"Mon", "Tue",
&, "Sun"
3-cha
r text
LLASTUOD
Last Unoccupied
Time
xx:xx
hh:mm
LLASTUNC
"Tue",
Table 38 --
ITEM
WRITE
STATUS
OCCDEFM
Supervisory
Current
DISPLAY
EXPANSION
RANGE
MODE
DEFAULT
forcible
forcible
forcible
- ALARMS
CCN
TABLE/SUB-TABLE
CCN
POINT
CCN
WRITE
STATUS
DISPLAY
WRITE
STATUS
MAINTENANCE
DISPLAY
ALARMS
ALARMS
R.CUR
Reset All Current
R.H!S
Reset Alarm
CURR
Currently
alarm#
(repeat
Alarms
History
Active
Yes/No
No
ALRESET
forcible
forcible
Yes/No
No
ALH!SCLR
forcible
forcible
Alarms
ALARM01C
ALARM25C
text string
up to 25
alarms)
HIST
Alarm
alarm#
(repeat
History
alarm#mm/dd/yy-text string
ALARM
hh.mm
up to 20
Alarms)
8O
HISTORY
-
APPENDIX
B - VFD INFORMATION
On 48/50PD units, the supply fan speed is controlled by a 3-phase
VFD. The VFD is located in the supply fan section behind an
The VFD
condensation
indoor fan scroll. The VFD speed is controlled
directly by the
ComfortLink
controls through
a 0-10Vdc
signal based on a
is stopped
is powered
during
normal
operation
to prevent
from forming on the boards during the off mode and
by driving
space temperature
sensor. The VFD has a display, which can be
used for service diagnostics,
but setup of the control is to be done
through the scrolling marquee display.
Configurations
Table
39 --
the speed
to 0 (by sending
a 0Vdc signal
to
the VFD). The units use ABB VFDs. The interface wiring for the
VFDs
is shown
in the figure below. The VFD connects
to
ComfortLink
through
a 0-10Vdc
output on the AUXI
board.
Terminal designations
are shown in the Terminal Designation
table.
TM
VFD TERMINAL
are shown
in the VFD Configurations
table.
DESIGNATIONS
TERMINAL
FUNCTION
U1
V1
W1
Three-Phase
main circuit input power supply
V2
Three-Phase
AC output to motor, 0V to maximum input
W2
voltage level
U2
X1-11
(GND)
Xl - 12 (COMMON)
Factory-supplied
jumper
Xl - 10 (24VDC)
Xl - 13 (DI- 1)
Run (factory-supplied
Xl -10
(24VDC)
Start Enable 1 (factory-supplied
Xl -16
(DI-4)
the drive goes to emergency stop
X1-2
(AI- 1)
X1-3
(AGND)
Factory wired for 0-10Vdc
TERMINAL
O
o0
'
Z
Co
<
_
jumper)
_
"_"
04
+
Z
CO
jumper).
When opened,
remote input
Xl
O
O
£3
....
_
_
E
5
ZS] ZZ
I
m
0-10Vdc signal
from
Comfort
Link
(08674
Fig. 40 - VFD Wiring
81
APPENDIX
B - VFD INFORMATION
Table
APPLICATION
Parameter Group
40 -- VFD
CRITICAL
(CONT)
CONFIGURATIONS
DRIVE PARAMETERS
FOR ABB ACH550
DRIVES
Value
Parameter
Number
UNITS
Description
H K30WA001 - 208/230V
I
H K30WA008-
NOTE
460V
9901
Language
9902
Application
9904
Motor Control Mode
9905
Motor Nominal Voltage
23O
46O
Volts
PD Product specific
setting
9906
Motor Nominal Current
7.0
3.5
Amps
PD Product specific
setting
9907
Motor Nominal Frequency
9908
Motor Nominal Speed
9909
Motor Nominal Power
1001
EXT1 Commands
(1) DI - 1 Start/Stop
ABB Drive default
1002
EXT2 Commands
(1) DI - 1 Start/Stop
1003
Direction
ABB Drive default
PD Product specific
setting
1301
Minimum AI -
1302
Maximum
1401
Relay Output 1
1402
Relay Output 2
1403
Relay Output 3
SYSTEM
1601
Run Enable
CONTROL
1608
START-UP
DATA
START/STOP/DIR
ANALOG
ABB Drive default
(0) English
Macro
PD Product specific
setting
(1) HVAC Default
ABB Drive default
(3) Scalar : Freq
60
Hz
1725
2.4
ABB Drive default
RPM
PD Product specific
setting
HP
PD Product specific
setting
(1) Forward
1
20
%
ABB Drive default
AI - 1
100
%
ABB Drive default
INPUTS
RELAY OUTPUTS
OVER RIDE
LIMITS
Carrier default settings
from PPS
(7) Started
(2) Run
ABB Drive default
(3) Fault (-1)
ABB Drive default
(0) Not Set
ABB Drive default
Start Enable 1
(4) DI - 4
ABB Drive default
1701
Override Set
(3) DI - 3
Carrier default settings
from PPS
1702
Override Freq
60
Hz
Carrier default settings
from PPS
1703
Override Speed
1750
RPM
Carrier default settings
from PPS
1704
Over Pass Code
0
Carrier default settings
from PPS
1705
Override
On
Carrier default settings
from PPS
2003
Maximum
Current
2007
Minimum
Frequency
0
Hz
PD Product specific
setting
ABB Drive default
60
Hz
ABB Drive default
8.0
4.0
Amps
2008
Maximum
2101
Start Function
2102
Stop Function
2202
Accelerate Time
30
Seconds
ABB Drive default
2203
Decelerate Time
30
Seconds
ABB Drive default
2601
Flux Optimization
(1) On
2605
Volt/Freq Ratio
2606
Switching
3006
Motor Thermal Time
Frequency
(6) Ramp
PD Product specific
setting
(2) Ramp
PD Product specific
setting
START/STOP
ACCEL/DECEL
MOTOR
FAULT
FUNCTIONS
PD Product specific
setting
Carrier default settings
from PPS
(2) Squared
Frequency
All Other Parameter Settings are ABB Drive Default Settings
82
8
kHz
Carrier default settings
from PPS
1050
Seconds
Carrier default settings
from PPS
APPENDIX
B - VFD INFORMATION
VFD Operation
The VFD keypad
is shown in Fig. 41. The function
of SOFT
KEYS 1 and 2 change depending
on what is displayed
on the
screen. The function of SOFT KEY 1 matches the word in the
lower
left-hand
box on the display
screen.
The function
of SOFT
KEY 2 matches
the word in the lower right-hand
box on the
display screen. If the box is empty, then the SOFT KEY does not
have a function on that specific screen. The UP and DOWN keys
are used to navigate through the menus. The OFF key is used to
turn off the VFD. The AUTO key is used to change control of the
drive
(CONT)
IMPORTANT:
to automatic
control.
The
HAND
control of the drive to local (hand
is used to access the help screens.
For the VFD to operate
key
is used
held) control.
to change
The HELP
button
highlight
The
parameter.
UP and DOWN
settings,
current parameter
value
To view the default
keys simultaneously.
select the application
appears above
parameter
the
value, press the
To restore the default
factory
macro "HVAC Default."
VFD Modes
The VFD has several different modes for configuring,
and diagnosing
the VFD. The modes are:
• Standard
Display
operates
mode -- shows
operating,
drive status information
and
the drive
• Parameters
• Start-up
mode -Assistant
edits parameter
mode--
guides
values
individually
the start up and
configuration
on the 48/50PD
units, the drive nmst be set
in AUTO mode.
The word "AUTO" will appear
hand corner of the VFD display. Press the AUTO
drive in AUTO mode.
in the upper left
button to set the
• Changed
Parameters
• Drive Parameter
mode --
Backup
shows
mode --
all changed
parameters
stores or uploads
the
parameters
• Clock Set mode -• I/O Settings
Standard
sets the time and date for the drive
mode -- checks
Display
and edits the I/O settings
Mode
Use the standard display mode to read information
on the drive
status and operate the drive. To reach the standard display mode,
press EXIT until the LCD display shows status information
as
described
below.
See Fig. 42.
The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information
of the drive. The HAND icon indicates that the drive control is
local
AUTO
{ALWAYS
AVAILABLE}
The
OFF
(08675
Fig. 41 - VFD Keypad
Start
Up
with
Initial start-up
has been performed
Start
Initial
configured
at the factory.
Use of the start
See below
table are
on the VFD.
start-up
is performed
at the factory.
individual
parameters,
(SOFT
KEY
2. Use the UP or DOWN
on the display
the
UP
parameter
4. Use
5. Use
screen
or
group
the
UP
parameter
To start up the VFD
perform
the following
Main
to highlight
and press ENTER
DOWN
keys
or
DOWN
or DOWN
keys
will
be
PARAMETERS
to highlight
KEY 2).
icon indicates
that the
and motor
rotation
status.
parameters
(CURRENT)
rooftop
units,
shows the frequency
the correct
A
that the
forward
drive is
that the
rotation
is
set point that the drive
34, the middle of the LCD display can be
3 parameter
values. The default display
0103
(OUTPUT
in amperes,
and 0120
FREQ)
in percentages,
0104
(AI1) in milliamperes.
The bottom
corners of the LCD display
show the functions
currently assigned to the two soft keys. The lower middle displays
time (if configured
to show the time).
The first time the drive is powered up, it is in the OFF mode. To
switch to local hand-held
control and control the drive using the
control
HAND
panel,
button
press and hold the HAND button. Pressing
switches the drive to hand control while keeping
the
the
desired
drive running. Press the AUTO button to switch to remote input
control. To start the drive press the HAND or AUTO buttons, to
the
desired
stop the drive press the OFF button.
KEY 2).
to change
7. Choose another parameter or press EXIT
return to the listing of parameter groups.
have been configured
KEY 1) to return
AUTO
such as the basic I/O (X1) or field
the drive
For Carrier
Using parameter group
configured
to display
the value
AUTO "_,
of the
to the mare
15.8Hz
[email protected]
3,7A
6. Press SAVE (SOFT KEY 2) to store the modified
value.
Press CANCEL (SOFT KEY 1) to keep the previous value.
Any modifications
that are not saved will not be changed.
(SOFT
icon indicates
The upper right corner
will maintain.
parameter.
the parameters
The
mode,
the
KEY 2).
to highlight
(SOFT
keys
menu
(SOFT
and press SEL (SOFT
and press EDIT
the UP
keys
2). The
panel.
control
rotating arrow (clockwise
or counterclockwise)
indicates
drive is running and at set point and the shaft direction is
or reverse. A rotating blinking
arrow indicates
that the
running but not at set point. A stationary
arrow indicates
the current
1. Select MENU
displayed.
3. Use
arrow
shows
Up by Changing Parameters Individually
with by changing
procedure:
the control
drive is stopped.
counterclockwise.
Assistant
up assistant will override factory VFD configurations.
to check that all parameters listed in VFD Configurations
correctly
from
drive is in remote
bus.
838 HA
I 00:00 I mEHU
(SOFT KEY 1) to
Continue until all
(08676
and then press EXIT
Fig. 42 - Standard
menu.
83
Display
Example
APPENDIX
To adjust
the speed
in HAND
mode,
press
buttons (the reference changes immediately).
modified
in the local control
(HAND)
parameterized
modification
(using
Group 11
in the remote control
Parameters
The
B - VFD INFORMATION
the UP
or DOWN
The reference can be
mode,
and can be
reference
mode.
select)
to also
allow
Mode
Parameters
is used
parameters,
1. Select MENU
displayed.
to change
perform
(SOFT
on the display
the
parameter
4. Use
the
screen
UP
or
group
UP
parameter
2). The
keys
to highlight
keys
DOWN
or DOWN
keys
will
be
(SOFT
KEY 2).
the
desired
the
desired
KEY 2).
KEY 2).
to change
the value
VFD to the removable control panel. The control
transferred to another drive and the parameters
Depending
Any modifications
highlight
of the
9909,
1605,
motor
parameters
Upload
value.
value.
The
parameter.
settings,
To view the default
Assistant
To use the Start-Up
(SOFT
the display
factory
(SOFT
KEY
2).
The
Main
menu
will
screen
keys to highlight
and press ENTER
3. Use the UP or DOWN
keys to highlight
and press SEL (SOFT
Assistant
to be configured.
(SOFT
will
1. Install the control
VFD.
that need
the display
(SOFT
screen
DRIVE
ALL
progress
indicator.
7. The display
Main
menu
will
Select EXIT
be
8. The control
2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight
CHANGED
PAR
on the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). A
list of the recently changed parameters will be displayed.
UP
or
DOWN
keys
4. Press EXIT
mode.
(SOFT
to highlight
(SOFT
menu.
from the drive.
the control
panel
to the VFD,
onto the
the
desired
KEY 2) to change
KEY 1) to exit the Changed
Parameters
84
2). The
Main
keys to highlight
the
will
be
PAR BACKUP
(SOFT
keys to highlight
Parameters"
menu
on
KEY 2).
DOWNLOAD
TO
KEY 2).
will
be displayed
process,
select
with
a
ABORT
KEY 1).
perform
procedure:
KEY
To stop
The ('hanged
Parameters
mode is used to view and edit recently
changed parameters on the drive. To view the changed parameters,
the
TO
upload
to the PAR BACKUP
and press SEL (SOFT
5. The text "Restoring
(SOFT
parameter group and press EDIT
the parameter if desired.
UPLOAD
the text "Parameter
and press ENTER
6. When the download
download successful"
3. Use
to highlight
KEY 2).
panel with the correct parameters
4. Use the UP or DOWN
Mode
2). The
on
KEY 2).
and press SAVE
Constant
Speeds,
PID Control,
Timed Functions,
and Outputs.
KEY
be
PAR BACKUP
(SOFT
panel can now be disconnected
To download
all parameters
from
perform the following procedure:
The assistant is divided into separate tasks. The user can activate
the tasks one after the other or independently.
The tasks are
typically
done in this order: Application,
References
1 and 2,
(SOFT
will
All Parameters
3. Use the UP or DOWN
the following
menu
KEY 1) to return to the main menu.
are in range.
1. Select MENU
displayed.
keys
then return
(SOFT
to make sure that entered
Parameters
keys to highlight
is complete,
2. Select MENU
displayed.
Changed
Main
will be displayed.
change.
The process
will
are set. The assistant checks
Start/Stop
Control,
Protections,
Low Noise Setup, Panel Display,
2). The
KEY 1).
(SOFT
KEY 2) after every
continue until all the parameters
values
and internal
KEY 2).
KEY 2).
values
to
Parameters"
will be displayed
with a
To stop the process,
select ABORT
the upload
Select EXIT
Download
Commission
will display the parameters
Select the desired
options
panel from the VFD,
and press ENTER
or DOWN
6. The display
be
ASSISTANTS
KEY
and press SEL (SOFT
successful"
procedure:
51 parameters
in the control
(SOFT
4. The text "Copying
progress
indicator.
press the
5. When
the following
are two
procedure:
screen
the UP
PANEL
the
macro.
perform
and group
and store parameters
7. The control
2. Use the UP or DOWN
4. The Start-Up
value,
To restore the default
application
Assistant,
on the display
parameter
above
5201,
the following
3. Use
appears
there
are not copied.
2. Use the UP or DOWN
menu.
value
1607,
1. Select MENU
displayed.
Mode
1. Select MENU
displayed.
Drive
parameter
keys sinmltaneously.
select the Carrier
Start-Up
to the main
current
and application,
All Parameters
perform
that are not saved will not be changed.
KEY 1) to return
UP and DOWN
on the motor
The second option downloads
only the application
parameters
to
the drive. This is recommended
when using the same application
for drives of different sizes. Parameters
9905, 9906, 9907, 9908,
7. Choose another parameter or press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) to
return to the listing of parameter groups. Continue until all
the parameters
have been configured
and then press EXIT
(SOFT
panel can then be
downloaded
into
available.
The first option is to download
all parameters.
This
copies both application
and motor parameters to the drive from the
control
panel.
This
is recommended
when
using
the same
To upload
6. Press SAVE (SOFT KEY 2) to store the modified
Press CANCEL (SOFT KEY 1) to keep the previous
IMPORTANT:
Mode
application
for drives of the same size. This can also be used
create a backup of the parameters group for the drive.
PARAMETERS
to highlight
(SOFT
keys
menu
to highlight
and press SEL (SOFT
or
on the
procedure:
Main
and press ENTER
DOWN
and press EDIT
5. Use the UP
parameter.
the parameters
the following
KEY
2. Use the UP or DOWN
3. Use
Backup
Parameter
The drive parameter back up mode is used to export the parameters
from one drive to another. The parameters can be uploaded from a
memory.
mode
drive. To change
Drive
(CONT)
will
is complete,
the
will be displayed.
then return
(SOFT
text
"Parameter
to the PAR BACKUP
menu.
KEY 1) to return to the main menu.
panel can now be disconnected
from the drive.
Download Application
Parameters
3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight the desired I/O
setting and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2).
4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to select the parameter to view.
Press OK (SOFT KEY 2).
5. Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the parameter setting.
Press SAVE (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration. Press
CANCEL (SOFT KEY 1) to keep the previous value. Any
modifications that are not saved will not be changed.
To download application parameters only to the control panel from
the VFD, perform the following procedure:
1. Install the control panel with the correct parameters onto the
VFD.
2. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be
displayed.
3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight PAR BACKUP on
the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2).
4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight DOWNLOAD
APPLICATION and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2).
5. The text "Downloading
Parameters (partial)" will be
displayed with a progress indicator. To stop the process,
select ABORT (SOFT KEY 1).
6. When the download is complete, the text "Parameter
download successful" will be displayed.
7. The display will then return to the PAR BACKUP menu.
Select EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) to return to the main menu.
8. The control panel can now be disconnected from the drive.
Clock Set Mode
The clock set mode is used for setting the date and time for the
internal clock of the VFD. In order to use the timer functions of the
VFD control, the internal clock must be set. The date is used to
determine weekdays and is visible in the fault logs.
To set the clock, perform the following procedure:
1. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be
displayed.
2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight CLOCK SET on
the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). The
clock set parameter list will be displayed.
3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight CLOCK
VISIBILITY
and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). This
parameter is used to display or hide the clock on the screen.
Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the parameter setting.
Press OK (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration and
return to the Clock Set menu.
4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight SET TIME and
press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys to
change the hours and minutes. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2) to
save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu.
5. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight TIME FORMAT
and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys
to change the parameter setting. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2)
to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu.
6. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight SET DATE and
press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys to
change the day, month, and year. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2)
to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu.
7. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight DATE FORMAT
and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys
to change the parameter setting. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2)
to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu.
8. Press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) twice to return to the main
menu.
I/O Settings
Mode
The I/O Settings mode is used for viewing and editing the I/O
settings.
To configure the I/O settings, perform the following procedure:
1. Select MENU (SOFT
displayed.
2. Use the UP or DOWN
the display screen and
I/O Settings parameter
KEY 2). The Main menu will be
keys to highlight I/O SETTINGS on
press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). The
list will be displayed.
6. Press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) twice to return to the main
menu.
VFD Diagnostics
The drive detects error situations and reports them using:
• Green and red LEDs on the body of the drive (located under the
keypad)
• Status LED on the control panel
• Control panel display
• The Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits (parameters
0305 to 0309)
The form of the display depends on the severity of the error. The
user can specify the severity for many errors by directing the drive
to ignore the error situation, report the situation as an alarm, or
report the situation as a fault.
Faults
(Red LED Lit)
The VFD signals that it has detected a severe error, or fault, by:
• Enabling the red LED on the drive (LED is either steady or
flashing)
• Setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter (0305 to
0307)
• Overriding the control panel display with the display of a fault
code
• Stopping the motor (if it was on)
• Sets an @propriate bit in Fault Word parameter 0305- 0307.
The fault code on the control panel display is temporary. Pressing
the MENU, ENTER, UP button or DOWN buttons removes the
fault message. The message reappears after a few seconds if the
control panel is not touched and the fault is still active.
Alarms
(Green
LED Flashing)
For less severe errors, called alarms, the diagnostic display is
advisory. For these situations, the drive is simply reporting that it
had detected something unusual. In these situations, the drive:
• Flashes the green LED on the drive (does not apply to alarms
that arise from control panel operation errors)
• Sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter (0308 or
0309)
• Overrides the control panel display with the display of an alarm
code and/or name
Alarm messages dis@pear from the control panel display after a
few seconds. The message returns periodically as long as the alarm
condition exists.
Correcting
Faults
The recommended corrective action for faults is shown in the Fault
Listing Table 41. The VFD can also be reset to remove the fault. If
an external source for a start command is selected and is active, the
VFD may start immediately after fault reset.
To reset a fault indicated by a flashing red LED, turn off the power
for 5 minutes. To reset a fault indicated by a red LED (not
flashing), press RESET from the control panel or turn off the
power for 5 minutes. Depending on the value of parameter 1604
(FAULT RESET SELECT), digital input or serial communication
could also be used to reset the drive. When the fault has been
corrected, the motor can be started.
85
VFD Maintenance
History
For reference,
0401, 0412,
the last three fault codes are stored into parameters
0413. For the most recent fault (identified
by
parameter
0401), the drive stores additional
data (in parameters
0402 through
0411) to aid in troubleshooting
a problem.
For
example, a parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the
fault.
To clear the fault
parameters),
history
(all of Group
04, Fault
History
follow these steps:
1. In the
0401.
control
panel,
Parameters
mode,
select
parameter
2. Press EDIT.
3. Press the UP and DOWN
buttons
To
Heat
alarms,
first
determine
If diagnostics
troubleshooting
defective during the warranty
if the
Alarm
has determined
period, contact
1-800-435-7365,
option
will review the problem
determination
by
Sink
The heat sink
dusty sink is
faults become
sink annually,
fins accumulate dust from the cooling air. Since a
less efficient at cooling the drive, overtemperature
more likely. In a normal environment check the heat
in a dusty environment check more often.
2. Remove the cooling fan.
corrective action (action is not always required).
find and address the root cause of the problem.
Inc., at
technician
Table 43 lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended
Carrier.
Alarms
correct
the VFD requires very
Check the heat sink as follows (when necessary):
1. Remove power from drive.
simultaneously.
4. Press SAVE.
Correcting
If installed in an appropriate environment,
little maintenance.
regarding
how
to
requires
any
Use Table
42 to
that the drive is
ABB Automation
4, option
3.
with the caller
proceed.
3. Blow clean compressed air (not hunfid) from bottom to top
and simultaneously use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to
trap the dust. If there a risk of the dust entering adjoining
equipment, perform the cleaning in another room.
4. Replace the cooling fan.
This
5. Restore power.
A qualified
and make a
may
involve
dispatching
a designated
service station (DSS) representative
from
an authorized station, dispatching
a replacement
unit, or advising
return for repair.
86
APPENDIX
B - VFD INFORMATION
Table
FAULT
CODE
1
FAULT NAME IN PANEL
OVERCURRENT
2
DC OVERVOLT
41 --
FAULT
DESCRIPTION
(CONT)
CODES
AND RECOMMENDED
CORRECTIVE
ACTION
Output current is excessive. Check for excessive motor load, insufficient acceleration
ACCELER TIME 1, default 30 seconds), or faulty motor, motor cables or connections.
time (parameters
2202
Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive. Check for static or transient over voltages in the input power supply,
insufficient deceleration time (parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1, default 30 seconds), or undersized brake chopper
(if present).
3
DEV OVERTEMP
4
SHORT CIRC
5
OVERLOAD
5
DC OVERVOLT
7
All LOSS
Analog input 1 loss. Analog input value is less than All FLT LIMIT (3021). Check source and connection
input and parameter settings for All FLT LIMIT (3021) and 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
for analog
8
AI2 LOSS
Analog input 2 loss. Analog input value is less than AI2 FLT LIMIT (3022). Check source and connection
input and parameter settings for AI2 FLT LIMIT (3022) and 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
for analog
9
MOT OVERTEMP
10
Drive heat sink is overheated. Temperature is at or above 115°C (239°F).
flow, dirt or dust coating on the heat sink, excessive ambient temperature,
Fault current. Check for short-circuit
Inverter overload condition.
Check for fan failure, obstructions
or excessive motor load.
in the air
in the motor cable(s) or motor or supply disturbances.
The drive output current exceeds the ratings.
Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient.
under voltage on main circuit.
Check for missing phase in the input power supply, blown fuse, or
Motor is too hot, as estimated by the drive. Check for overloaded motor. Adjust the parameters
(3005 through 3009). Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters.
used for the estimate
PANEL LOSS
Panel communication
is lost and either drive is in local control mode (the control panel displays LOC), or drive is in
remote control mode (REM) and is parameterized to accept start/stop, direction or reference from the control panel.
To correct check the communication
lines and connections. Check parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERROR,
parameters in Group 10: Command Inputs and Group 11 :Reference Select (if drive operation is REM).
11
ID RUN FAIL
The motor ID run was not completed
12
MOTOR STALL
successfully.
Motor or process stall. Motor is operating
Check parameters 3010 through 3012.
Check motor connections.
in the stall region. Check for excessive load or insufficient
13
RESERVED
14
EXT FAULT 1
Digital input defined to report first external fault is active. See parameter
15
EXT FAULT 2
Digital input defined to report second external fault is active. See parameter
15
EARTH FAULT
The load on the input power system is out of balance.
cable does not exceed maximum specified length.
17
UNDERLOAD
Motor load is lower than expected. Check for disconnected
through 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE.
18
THERM FAIL
Internal fault. The thermistor
19
OPEX LINK
Internal fault. A communication-related
Carrier.
20
OPEX PWR
Internal fault. Low voltage condition detected on the OINT board. Contact Carrier.
21
CURR MEAS
22
SUPPLY PHASE
23
RESERVED
24
OVERSPEED
motor power.
Not used.
measuring
Internal fault. Current measurement
FAULT 1.
3004 EXTERNAL
FAULT 2.
Check for faults in the motor or motor cable. Verify that motor
load. Check parameters
the internal temperature
problem
3003 EXTERNAL
3013 UNDERLOAD
of the drive is open or shorted.
FUNCTION
Contact Carrier.
has been detected between the OMIO and OINT boards. Contact
is out of range. Contact Carrier.
Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high. Check for missing main phase or blown fuse.
Not used.
Motor speed is greater than 120% of the larger (in magnitude) of 2001 MINIMUM SPEED or 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED
parameters. Check parameter settings for 2001 and 2002. Check adequacy of motor braking torque. Check
applicability of torque control. Check brake chopper and resistor.
25
RESERVED
26
DRIVE ID
27
CONFIG FILE
Internal configuration
SERIAL 1 ERR
Field bus communication
has timed out. Check fault setup (3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT
TIME). Check communication
settings (Group 51 or 53 as appropriate). Check for poor connections and/or noise on
line.
29
EFB CON FILE
Error in reading the configuration
30
FORCE TRIP
31
EFB 1
Fault code reserved for the EFB protocol application.
The meaning is protocol
dependent.
32
EFB 2
Fault code reserved for the EFB protocol application.
The meaning is protocol
dependent.
33
EFB 3
Fault code reserved for the EFB protocol application.
The meaning is protocol
dependent.
34
MOTOR PHASE
28
35
OUTP WIRING
Not used.
Internal fault. Configuration
block drive ID is not valid.
file has an error. Contact Carrier.
file for the field bus adapter.
Fault trip forced by the field bus. See the field bus reference
literature.
Fault in the motor circuit. One of the motor phases is lost. Check for motor fault, motor cable fault, thermal relay fault,
or internal fault.
Error in power wiring suspected.
Check that input power wired to drive output. Check for ground faults.
101-105
SYSTEM ERROR
Error internal to the drive. Contact Carrier and report the error number.
201-205
SYSTEM ERROR
Error internal to the drive. Contact Carrier and report the error number.
87
APPENDIX
B - VFD INFORMATION
Table
FAULT
CODE
FAULT NAME IN PANEL
1000
PAR HZRPM
1001
PAR PFA REFNG
1002
PAR PFA IOCNF
41 -- FAULT
DESCRIPTION
CODES
(CONT)
(cont)
AND RECOMMENDED
CORRECTIVE
Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for any of the following:
2001 MINIMUM SPEED > 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED
2007 MINIMUM FREQ > 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ
2001 MINIMUM SPEED / 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside of the range:
2002 MAXIMUM SPEED / 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside of the range:
2007 MINIMUM FREQ / 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside of the range: 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ / 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside of the range: Parameter values are inconsistent.
Check that 2007 MINIMUM
Parameter values are inconsistent.
The number of programmed
ACTION
-128/+ 128
-128/+ 128
128/+ 128
128/+ 128
FREQ is negative, when 8123 PFA ENABLE is active.
PFA relays does not match with Interlock
configuration, when 8123 PFA ENABLE is active. Check consistency of RELAY OUTPUT parameters 1401 through
1403, and 1410 through 1412. Check 8117 NR OF AUX MOTORS, 8118 AUTOCHANGE INTERV, and 8120
INTERLOCKS.
1003
PAR AI SCALE
Parameter values are inconsistent.
2MIN > 1305AI 2 MAX.
Check that parameter
1301 AI 1 MIN > 1302 AI 1 MAX and that parameter
1004
PAR AO SCALE
Parameter values are inconsistent.
AO2MIN
> 1511AO2MAX.
Check that parameter
1504 AO 1 MIN > 1505 AO 1 MAX and that parameter
1005
PAR PCU 2
1006
PAR EXT RO
1007
PAR FBUS
1008
PAR PFA MODE
1009
PAR PCU 1
1010
OVERRIDE/PFA
CONFLICT
Parameter values for
following parameters:
1.1 < (9906 MOTOR
Where: PN = 1000 *
• 9909 MOTOR NOM
power control are inconsistent:
Improper
1304 AI
1510
motor nominal kVA or motor nominal power. Check the
NOM CURR * 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT * 1.73 / PN) < 2.6
9909 MOTOR NOM POWER (if units are kW) or PN = 746
POWER (if units are HP, e.g., in US)
Parameter values are inconsistent. Check the extension
OUTPUTS 4 through 6 have non-zero
values.
relay module for connection
Parameter values are inconsistent. Check that a parameter
10 (COMM)), but 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 0.
Parameter values are inconsistent.
ENABLE activated.
is set for field bus control
and 1410 through
1412 RELAY
(e.g., 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS
The 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE must = 3 (SCALAR SPEED) when 8123 PFA
Parameter values for power control are inconsistent or improper motor nominal frequency or speed. Check for both
of the following:
1 < (60 * 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ/9908
MOTOR NOM SPEED < 16
0.8 < 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED / (120 * 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ / Motor poles) < 0.992
Override mode is enabled and PFA is activated at the same time. This cannot be done because PFA interlocks
be observed in the override mode.
88
cannot
=
APPENDIX
B - VFD INFORMATION
Table
42 -- ALARM
(CONT)
CODES
ALARM
CODE
ALARM NAME
IN PANEL
2001
-
Reserved
2002
-
Reserved
2003
-
Reserved
2004
DIR LOCK
The change in direction being attempted is not allowed. Do not attempt to change the direction
Change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change (if reverse operation is safe).
2005
I/O COMM
Field bus communication
has timed out. Check fault setup (3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT
TIME). Check communication
settings (Group 51 or 53 as appropriate). Check for poor connections and/or noise on
line.
2006
All LOSS
Analog input 1 is lost, or value is less than the minimum setting, Check input source and connections. Check the
parameter that sets the minimum (3021) and the parameter that sets the Alarm/Fault operation (3001).
2007
AI2 LOSS
Analog input 2 is lost, or value is less than the minimum setting, Check input source and connections. Check
parameter that sets the minimum (3022) and the parameter that sets the Alarm/Fault operation (3001).
2008
PANEL LOSS
2009
-
2010
MOT OVERTEMP
2011
UNDERLOAD
DESCRIPTION
AND RECOMMENDED
CORRECTIVE
ACTION
of motor rotation,
Panel communication
is lost and either the VFD is in local control mode (the control panel displays HAND), or the
VFD is in remote control mode (AUTO) and is parameterized to accept start/stop, direction or reference from the
control panel, To correct, check the communication
lines and connections, Parameter 3002 PANEL LOSS, and
parameters in groups 10 COMMAND INPUTS and 11 REFERENCE SELECT (if drive operation is REM).
Reserved
2012
MOTOR STALL
2013*
AUTORESET
2014
AUTOCHANGE
2015
PFA INTERLOCK
2016
-
2017"
OFF BUTTON
2018
PID SLEEP
Motor is hot, based on either the VFD estimate or on temperature feedback, This alarm warns that a Motor Overload
fault trip may be near, Check for overloaded motor. Adjust the parameters used for the estimate (3005 through 3009).
Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters.
Motor load is lower than expected. This alarm warns that a Motor Underload fault trip may be near. Check that the
motor and drive ratings match (motor is NOT undersized for the drive). Check the settings on parameters 3013 to
3015.
Motor is operating
in the stall region. This alarm warns that a Motor Stall fault trip may be near.
This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform an automatic fault reset, which may start the motor. To
control automatic reset, use parameter group 31 (AUTOMATIC RESET).
This alarm warns that the PFA autochange
Pump Alternation macro.
function
is active. To control PFA, use parameter
group 81 (PFA) and the
This alarm warns that the PFA interlocks are active, which means that the drive cannot start any motor (when
Autochange is used), or a speed regulated motor (when Autochange is not used).
Reserved
This alarm indicates that the OFF button has been pressed.
This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is active, which means that the motor could accelerate when the PID
sleep function ends. To control PID sleep, use parameters 4022 through 4026 or 4122 through 4126.
2019
ID RUN
2020
OVERRIDE
2021
START ENABLE 1
MISSING
This alarm warns that the Start Enable 1 signal is missing. To control Start Enable 1 function,
correct, check the digital input configuration and the communication
settings.
use parameter
2022
START ENABLE 2
MISSING
This alarm warns that the Start Enable 2 signal is missing. To control Start Enable 2 function,
correct, check the digital input configuration and the communication
settings.
use parameter1609.
2023
This
EMERGENCY
alarm
is not indicated
The VFD is performing
STOP
by a relay
an ID run.
Override mode is activated.
Emergency
output,
even
when
43 -- MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
Heat sink temperature
cleaning
check and
1608. To
To
stop is activated.
the relay
output
is configured
to indicate
FLT/ALARM).
Table
or
INTERVALS
INTERVAL
Every 6 to 12 months (depending
on the dustiness of the
environment)
Main cooling fan replacement
Every five years
HVAC Control panel battery change
Every ten years
89
alarm
conditions,
parameter
1401
RELAY
OUTPUT
= 5 (ALARM)
or 16
APPENDIX
B - VFD INFORMATION
(CONT)
Main Fan Replacement
The main cooling fan of the VFD has a life span of about 60,000
operating hours at maximum rated operating temperature and drive
load. The expected
life span doubles
temperature
(fan temperature
and drive loads).
Fan
failure
can
for each 18 F drop in the fan
is a function
be predicted
by
the
of ambient
increasing
temperatures
noise
from
fan
bearings and the gradual rise in the heat sink temperature
in spite of
heat sink cleaning.
If the drive is operated in a critical part of a
process, fan replacement
is recommended
once these symptoms
start appearing.
Replacement
fans are available
To replace
the main fan for frame sizes RI through
following
(see Main Fan Replacement
1. Remove
power
2. Remove
drive cover.
the
from drive.
the retaining
clips
the fan cable.
5. Install the new fan by reversing
6. Restore
R2, perform
figure):
3. For frame sizes RI and R2, press together
on the fan cover and lift.
4. Disconnect
2
from Carrier.
Steps 2 to 4.
power.
(08681
Fig. 43 - Main
(Frame
Control
Panel
Fan Replacement
Sizes R1-R2)
Cleaning
Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel.
cleaners which could scratch the display window.
Avoid
harsh
Battery Replacement
A battery
function
is only used in assistant control
available
and enabled.
The
panels that have the clock
battery
keeps the clock
operating in memory during power interruptions.
The expected
for the battery is greater than ten years. To remove the battery,
a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control
Replace the battery with type CR2032.
90
life
use
panel.
APPENDIX
Table
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
44 -- Fan Performance
- 48PDD05
DATA
Vertical
Units
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
0.4
0.6
0.2
Rpm
5O4
527
551
576
6OO
626
651
677
7O3
C - START-UP
Bhp
0.16
0.19
0.22
0.26
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.46
0.52
Rpm
613
632
652
673
694
716
739
762
785
Bhp
0.23
0.27
0.31
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.51
0.57
0.64
Rpm
710
725
741
759
777
797
817
838
859
Bhp
0.31
0.35
0.40
0.44
0.50
0.55
0.62
0.69
0.76
Rpm
798
810
823
838
854
871
889
9O8
927
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
1.4
1.6
1.2
(in. wg)
0.8
1.0
Bhp
0.40
0.44
0.49
0.54
0.60
0.66
0.73
0.80
0.88
Rpm
881
890
900
912
926
941
957
974
992
Bhp
0.49
0.54
0.59
0.65
0.71
0.78
0.85
0.93
1.01
(in. wg)
1.8
2.
Rpm
Bhp
Rpm
Bhp
Rpm
Bhp
Rpm
Bhp
957
0.59
1030
0.70
1098
0.80
1163
0.91
1225
1.03
964
973
983
0.64
0.70
0.76
1035
1042
1050
0.75
0.81
0.87
1102
1107
1114
0.86
0.92
0.99
1166
1170
1176
0.98
1.04
1.12
1227
1231
1235
1.10
1.17
1.24
994
1007
1021
0.82
0.89
0.97
1060
1071
1083
0.94
1.02
1.10
1122
1132
1143
1.06
1.14
1.23
1183
1191
1200
1.19
1.27
1.36
1241
1248
Rpm
1256
1.32
1.41
Bhp
1.50
1037
1053
1.05
1.14
1097
1111
1.18
1.27
1155
1168
1.32
1.41
1211
1223
1.45
1.55
1266
1276
1.60
1.70
Bhp
0.41
0.45
0.50
0.55
0.61
0.67
0.74
0.82
0.90
Rpm
884
894
905
917
931
947
963
981
999
Bhp
0.92
0.98
1.05
1.12
1.20
1.28
1.37
1.47
1.57
Rpm
1228
1230
1234
1239
1245
1253
1261
1271
1282
LEGEND
Bhp - Brake Horsepower
NOTES:
i. Maxinmm
2. See General
continuous
BHP is 2.0.
Fan Performance
Notes.
Table 45 -- Fan Performance - 48PDE05 Vertical Units
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
LEGEND
Bhp - Brake Horsepower
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
0.4
0.6
0.2
Rpm
509
533
557
582
608
634
660
686
713
Bhp
0.16
0.19
0.23
0.27
0.31
0.36
0.41
0.47
0.54
Rpm
618
637
658
679
701
723
747
770
795
Rpm
714
730
746
764
783
803
824
846
868
Bhp
0.32
0.36
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.56
0.63
0.70
0.78
Rpm
802
814
828
843
860
877
896
915
935
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
1.4
1.6
1.2
Rpm
961
968
977
987
999
1013
1027
1043
1060
Bhp
0.24
0.27
0.31
0.36
0.40
0.46
0.52
0.58
0.66
Bhp
0.60
0.65
0.70
0.77
0.83
0.90
0.98
1.06
1.16
Rpm
1033
1039
1046
1054
1065
1076
1089
1103
1118
Bhp
0.70
0.76
0.82
0.88
0.95
1.03
1.11
1.20
1.29
Rpm
1101
1106
1111
1118
1127
1137
1148
1161
1175
(in. wg)
0.8
Bhp
0.81
0.87
0.93
1.00
1.07
1.15
1.24
1.33
1.43
2. See General
91
continuous
1.8
Rpm
1166
1169
1174
1180
1187
1196
1206
1217
1229
BHP is 2.0.
Fan Performance
Bhp
0.50
0.55
0.60
0.66
0.72
0.79
0.86
0.94
1.02
(in. wg)
NOTES:
i. Maxinmm
1.0
Notes.
2.0
Bhp
1.03
1.10
1.17
1.25
1.33
1.42
1.51
1.61
1.72
Table
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
46 -- Fan
Bhp
0.17
0.20
0.24
0.28
0.32
0.37
0.43
0.50
0.57
Rpm
628
648
668
691
714
737
762
787
813
Vertical
Units
Bhp
0.24
0.28
0.32
0.37
0.42
0.48
0.54
0.61
0.68
Rpm
723
739
756
775
795
816
838
861
884
Bhp
0.33
0.37
0.41
0.46
0.52
0.58
0.65
0.72
0.80
Bhp
0.61
0.66
0.72
0.78
0.85
0.92
1.00
1.09
1.19
Rpm
1040
1046
1054
1063
1074
1087
1100
1116
1132
Bhp
0.71
0.77
0.83
0.90
0.97
1.05
1.13
1.22
1.32
LEGEND
Bhp - Brake Horsepower
Rpm
1108
1112
1119
1127
1136
1147
1159
1173
1188
(in. wg)
0.8
Rpm
811
823
837
853
870
889
909
929
951
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
1.4
1.6
1.2
Rpm
968
976
985
996
1009
1024
1039
1056
1074
- 48PDF05
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
0.4
0.6
0.2
Rpm
520
545
570
596
623
650
677
705
734
Performance
Bhp
0.82
0.88
0.95
1.02
1.09
1.17
1.26
1.36
1.46
1.0
Bhp
0.41
0.46
0.51
0.56
0.62
0.69
0.76
0.84
0.93
Rpm
892
902
913
927
942
958
976
994
1014
Bhp
0.93
1.00
1.07
1.14
1.22
1.31
1.40
1.50
1.61
Rpm
1233
1237
1241
1247
1254
1262
1272
1283
1295
Bhp
0.56
0.62
0.69
0.76
0.84
0.92
1.01
1.11
1.21
1.33
1.45
Rpm
925
939
955
972
990
1009
1029
1050
1071
1092
1115
Bhp
1.14
1.22
1.30
1.39
1.49
1.60
1.71
1.83
1.95
2.09
2.23
Rpm
1245
1252
1260
1269
1280
1291
1304
1318
1333
1349
1365
Bhp
0.51
0.56
0.61
0.67
0.73
0.80
0.88
0.97
1.06
(in. wg)
1.8
Rpm
1172
1176
1181
1188
1196
1205
1216
1229
1242
2.0
Bhp
1.04
1.11
1.19
1.27
1.35
1.44
1.54
1.64
1.75
NOTES:
i. Maxinnml
2. See General
continuous
BHP is 2.0.
Fan Performance
Notes.
Table 47 -- Fan Performance - 48PDD06 Vertical Units
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
LEGEND
Bhp - Brake Horsepower
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
0.4
0.6
0.2
Rpm
593
62O
646
673
7OO
728
755
783
811
84O
868
Bhp
0.27
0.32
0.37
0.43
0.49
0.56
0.63
0.71
0.80
0.90
1.00
Rpm
688
711
734
758
783
807
833
858
884
910
937
1.2
Rpm
995
1007
1021
1036
1053
1070
1088
1107
1127
1147
1168
Bhp
0.78
0.85
0.92
1.00
1.08
1.18
1.28
1.38
1.50
1.62
1.75
Rpm
1061
1072
1084
1098
1112
1128
1145
1162
1181
1200
1220
Bhp
0.37
0.42
0.47
0.53
0.60
0.68
0.76
0.84
0.94
1.04
1.15
Rpm
773
793
813
835
857
879
903
926
950
975
1000
Bhp
0.46
0.52
0.58
0.64
0.72
0.80
0.88
0.97
1.07
1.18
1.30
(in. wg)
0.8
Rpm
851
868
886
905
925
946
968
990
1012
1035
1059
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
1.4
1.6
Bhp
Rpm
Bhp
0.89
1125
1.01
0.96
1134
1.09
1.04
1145
1.17
1.13
1157
1.26
1.22
1170
1.35
1.31
1184
1.45
1.42
1199
1.56
1.53
1216
1.68
1.65
1233
1.80
1.77
1251
1.93
1.91
1270
2.07
2. See General
92
continuous
1.8
Rpm
1186
1194
1203
1214
1226
1238
1253
1268
1284
1300
1318
BHP is 2.0.
Fan Performance
Bhp
0.67
0.73
0.80
0.88
0.96
1.05
1.14
1.24
1.35
1.47
1.60
(in. wg)
NOTES:
i. Maxinnml
1.0
Notes.
2.0
Bhp
1.26
1.35
1.44
1.53
1.63
1.74
1.86
1.98
2.11
2.25
2.40
Table
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
48 -- Fan
AVAILABLE
0.4
0.2
Bhp
0.29
0.33
0.39
0.45
0.51
0.59
0.67
0.75
0.85
0.95
1.06
Rpm
607
634
662
690
719
748
777
807
837
867
897
Rpm
7OO
724
748
773
799
825
852
879
9O7
935
963
Bhp
0.79
0.86
0.94
1.02
1.11
1.21
1.31
1.43
1.55
1.68
1.82
Rpm
1070
1081
1094
1109
1125
1142
1160
1179
1198
1219
1240
- 48PDE06
Rpm
784
8O4
826
848
872
896
92O
946
971
998
1024
Bhp
0.91
0.98
1.06
1.15
1.24
1.35
1.45
1.57
1.70
1.83
1.97
Rpm
1133
1143
1155
1168
1182
1197
1214
1231
1250
1269
1290
i. Maxinnml
Table
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
LEGEND
Bhp - Brake Horsepower
Bhp
0.47
0.53
0.60
0.67
0.74
0.83
0.92
1.01
1.12
1.24
1.36
(in. wg)
0.8
Rpm
861
879
898
918
94O
962
985
1008
1032
1057
1082
Bhp
1.03
1.11
1.19
1.28
1.38
1.49
1.60
1.72
1.85
1.99
2.14
1.0
Bhp
0.57
0.64
0.71
0.78
0.86
0.95
1.05
1.15
1.26
1.38
1.51
Rpm
934
950
967
985
1004
1024
1045
1067
1090
1113
1137
Bhp
0.68
0.75
0.82
0.90
0.98
1.08
1.18
1.29
1.40
1.53
1.66
Bhp
1.15
1.24
1.32
1.42
1.52
1.63
1.75
1.87
2.01
2.15
2.30
Rpm
Bhp
1260
1269
1279
1291
1304
1318
1333
1253
1349
1366
1.37
1.46
1.56
1.66
1.78
1.90
2.03
1.28
2.17
2.31
Bhp
0.59
0.65
0.72
0.80
0.89
0.98
1.08
1.19
1.31
1.43
1.57
Rpm
944
960
978
997
1017
1039
1061
1084
1108
1133
1158
Bhp
1.17
1.25
1.35
1.44
1.55
1.67
1.79
1.92
2.06
2.21
2.37
Rpm
1260
1269
1278
1290
1302
1316
1331
1348
1365
1384
(in. wg)
1.8
Rpm
1194
1203
1213
1224
1237
1251
1267
1283
1300
1318
1337
2.
NOTES:
2. See General
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
Units
EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
1.6
LEGEND
Bhp - Brake Horsepower
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
Vertical
EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
0.6
Bhp
0.38
0.43
0.49
0.55
0.63
0.70
0.79
0.88
0.98
1.09
1.21
AVAILABLE
1.4
1.2
Rpm
1004
1017
1032
1048
1066
1084
1104
1124
1145
1167
1189
Performance
49 -- Fan Performance
0.2
Rpm
62O
648
677
7O7
737
767
798
829
861
893
925
Bhp
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.47
0.54
0.61
0.70
0.79
0.89
1.00
1.12
Rpm
711
736
762
788
815
843
871
9OO
929
959
989
1.2
Rpm
1013
1027
1043
1060
1078
1098
1119
1140
1163
1186
1210
Bhp
0.81
0.88
0.96
1.05
1.14
1.24
1.35
1.47
1.60
1.73
1.88
Rpm
1078
1091
1105
1120
1137
1155
1174
1195
1216
1238
1261
- 48PDF06
continuous
BHP is 2.0.
Fan Performance
Vertical Units
AVAILABLE
0.4
Bhp
0.39
0.45
0.51
0.58
0.65
0.73
0.82
0.92
1.03
1.15
1.27
EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
0.6
Rpm
Bhp
794
0.49
816
0.55
838
0.61
862
0.69
887
0.77
912
0.85
938
0.95
965
1.05
992
1.17
1020
1.29
1048
1.42
AVAILABLE
1.4
EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
1.6
Bhp
0.92
1.00
1.08
1.18
1.27
1.38
1.49
1.62
1.75
1.89
2.04
Rpm
1141
1152
1165
1179
1194
1210
1228
1247
1267
1288
1309
Notes.
Bhp
1.05
1.13
1.21
1.31
1.41
1.52
1.64
1.77
1.90
2.05
2.20
(in. wg)
0.8
Rpm
871
89O
910
931
954
977
1001
1026
1052
1078
1105
2. See General
93
continuous
2.0
1.8
Rpm
1202
1211
1222
1235
1249
1264
1280
1298
1317
1336
1357
BHP is 2.0.
Fan Performance
Bhp
0.70
0.76
0.84
0.92
1.01
1.11
1.21
1.33
1.45
1.58
1.72
(in. wg)
NOTES:
i. Maxinnml
1.0
Notes.
Bhp
1.30
1.39
1.48
1.59
1.70
1.81
1.94
2.08
2.22
2.37
Table
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
50 --
Fan Performance
AIRFLOW
Bhp
0.12
0.14
0.17
0.20
0.24
0.28
0.32
0.37
0.43
Rpm
559
574
592
611
631
652
674
697
720
Bhp
0.19
0.22
0.25
0.29
0.33
0.38
0.43
0.48
0.55
Units
Rpm
661
673
687
703
721
739
759
779
801
Bhp
0.27
0.30
0.34
0.38
0.43
0.48
0.54
0.60
0.67
(Cfm)
Rpm
Bhp
1200
918
0.54
1300
922
0.58
1400
929
0.63
1500
937
0.69
1600
947
0.74
1700
959
0.81
1800
973
0.88
1900
988
0.95
2000
1004
1.04
Rpm
993
995
1000
1006
1015
1025
1037
1050
1065
Bhp
0.64
0.69
0.74
0.80
0.86
0.93
1.00
1.08
1.17
Rpm
1063
1064
1067
1072
1079
1088
1098
1110
1123
(in. wg)
0.8
Rpm
753
762
774
787
801
818
835
854
873
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
1.4
1.6
1.2
Bhp
0.75
0.80
0.85
0.91
0.98
1.05
1.13
1.21
1.30
1.0
Bhp
Rpm
Bhp
0.35
839
0.45
0.39
845
0.49
0.43
853
0.53
0.48
864
0.58
0.53
877
0.63
0.58
891
0.69
0.64
906
0.76
0.71
923
0.83
0.79
941
0.91
Bhp
0.86
0.91
0.97
1.03
1.10
1.18
1.26
1.35
1.44
Rpm
1193
1193
1194
1196
1201
1207
1214
1223
1234
Bhp
Rpm
Bhp
0.36
842
0.45
0.40
849
0.49
0.44
858
0.54
0.48
869
0.59
0.54
882
0.64
0.59
896
0.70
0.66
912
0.77
0.72
930
0.84
0.80
948
0.92
Rpm
1196
1196
1197
1200
Bhp
0.97
1.03
1.10
1.17
(in. wg)
2.0
1.8
Rpm
1130
1130
1132
1136
1141
1148
1157
1168
1179
Bhp
0.97
1.03
1.09
1.16
1.23
1.31
1.39
1.48
1.58
NOTES:
LEGEND
Bhp
Horizontal
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
0.4
0.6
0.2
Rpm
436
456
477
500
523
548
573
600
627
- 48PDD05
i. Maxinmnl
- Brake Horsepower
2. See General
High
Range Motor/Drive
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
BHP is 2.0.
Fan Performance
Notes.
Required
Table
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
continuous
51 -- Fan Performance
Horizontal
Units
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
0.4
0.6
0.2
Rpm
443
463
485
508
532
558
584
611
639
- 48PDE05
Bhp
0.12
0.15
0.17
0.21
0.24
0.28
0.33
0.38
0.44
Rpm
564
580
598
617
638
660
682
706
731
1.2
Bhp
0.20
0.22
0.26
0.30
0.34
0.39
0.44
0.50
0.56
Rpm
666
678
693
709
727
746
766
788
810
Bhp
0.27
0.31
0.34
0.39
0.43
0.49
0.55
0.61
0.68
(in. wg)
0.8
Rpm
758
767
778
792
8O7
824
842
861
882
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
1.4
1.6
1.8
Bhp
Rpm
Bhp
Rpm
1.0
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
Rpm
Bhp
Rpm
1200
1300
1400
1500
922
926
933
942
0.55
0.59
0.64
0.69
996
999
1004
1011
0.65
0.69
0.75
0.80
1066
1068
1071
1077
0.75
0.80
0.86
0.92
1133
1133
1136
1140
Bhp
0.86
0.92
0.98
1.04
1600
1700
952
965
0.75
0.82
1020
1030
0.87
0.94
1084
1093
0.99
1.06
1146
1153
1.11
1.19
1205
1211
1.24
1.32
1800
1900
2000
979
995
1012
0.89
0.97
1.05
1043
1057
1072
1.01
1.09
1.18
1104
1116
1130
1.14
1.22
1.32
1163
1174
1186
1.27
1.36
1.46
1220
1229
1240
1.41
1.50
1.60
LEGEND
Bhp - Brake Horsepower
High
Range Motor/Drive
NOTES:
i. Maxinmnl continuous BHP is 2.0.
2. See General Fan Per_rmanee Notes.
Required
94
2.0
Table
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
52 -- Fan Performance
AIRFLOW
Bhp
0.13
0.16
0.18
0.22
0.26
0.30
0.35
0.41
0.47
Rpm
574
591
610
630
652
675
699
724
750
Bhp
0.20
0.23
0.27
0.31
0.35
0.40
0.46
0.52
0.59
1
(Cfm)
Rpm
Bhp
1200
929
0.56
1300
934
0.60
1400
941
0.65
1500
951
0.71
1600
963
0.77
1700
976
0.84
1800
991
0.91
1900
1008
0.99
2000
1026
1.08
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
LEGEND
Bhp - Brake Horsepower
Bhp
0.28
0.32
0.36
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.57
0.63
0.71
Rpm
766
776
788
8O2
819
836
856
876
898
1.0
Bhp
0.37
0.41
0.45
0.50
0.55
0.61
0.68
0.75
0.83
Rpm
850
857
867
879
893
908
925
944
964
(in. wg)
1.8
2.
Bhp
0.66
0.71
0.76
0.82
Rpm
1073
1075
1079
1085
Bhp
0.76
0.82
0.87
0.94
Rpm
1139
1140
1143
1148
Bhp
0.87
0.93
0.99
1.06
Rpm
1202
1202
Bhp
0.98
1.05
1208
1.18
1029
1041
1054
1070
1086
0.89
0.96
1.04
1.12
1.21
1093
1103
1115
1129
1144
1.01
1.08
1.16
1.25
1.35
1155
1163
1174
1186
1199
1.13
1.21
1.30
1.39
1.49
1214
1221
1230
1241
1253
1204
1.26
1.34
1.43
1.53
1.63
1.11
Bhp
0.49
0.55
0.61
0.67
0.74
0.82
0.91
1.00
1.10
1.21
1.32
Rpm
877
890
906
922
940
959
979
1001
1022
1045
1069
Bhp
1.05
1.13
1.21
1.29
1.38
1.48
1.59
1.70
1.82
1.96
2.10
Rpm
1207
1212
1219
1227
1238
1249
1262
1277
1292
1309
1326
i. Maxinmm
53 --
Fan Performance
AVAILABLE
0.4
Bhp
0.22
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.46
0.53
0.61
0.69
0.78
0.88
Rpm
628
649
671
695
719
745
771
797
824
852
88O
Bhp
0.31
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.51
0.58
0.66
0.74
0.83
0.92
1.03
AVAILABLE
1.4
1.2
Rpm
949
961
974
988
1004
1022
1040
1060
1081
1102
1124
continuous
2. See General
0.2
Rpm
521
546
572
599
627
655
684
714
744
775
8O6
Bhp
0.70
0.77
0.83
0.91
0.99
1.07
1.17
1.27
1.38
1.50
1.62
Bhp
0.46
0.50
0.55
0.60
0.66
0.72
0.79
0.87
0.95
Rpm
1003
1006
1012
1020
Required
Table
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
Rpm
675
688
703
720
739
759
781
804
828
(in. wg)
0.8
NOTES:
- Brake Horsepower
High Range Motor/Drive
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
Units
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
1.4
1.6
1.2
LEGEND
Bhp
Horizontal
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
0.4
0.6
0.2
Rpm
456
477
500
524
550
576
604
633
662
- 48PDF05
Rpm
1018
1027
1039
1052
1066
1082
1099
1117
1136
1156
1177
Bhp
0.82
0.88
0.95
1.03
1.11
1.20
1.30
1.41
1.52
1.65
1.78
- 48PDD06
BHP is 2.0.
Fan Performance
Horizontal
Notes.
Units
EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
0.6
Rpm
718
737
757
777
799
822
846
871
896
922
948
0.8
Bhp
Rpm
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.56
0.63
0.70
0.78
0.87
0.96
1.06
1.18
F]800
F]816
F]834
F]852
F]872
F]893
_915
_938
_961
_985
1010
EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
1.6
Rpm
1083
1091
1101
1112
1125
1139
1155
1172
1190
1209
1228
(in. wg)
Bhp
0.93
1.00
1.08
1.16
1.25
1.34
1.44
1.55
1.67
1.80
1.94
2. See General
95
continuous
1.8
Rpm
1146
1153
1161
1171
1182
1195
1209
1225
1242
1259
1278
BHP is 2.0.
Fan Performance
Bhp
0.60
0.65
0.72
0.79
0.86
0.94
1.03
1.13
1.24
1.35
1.47
(in. wg)
NOTES:
i. Maxinmm
1.0
Notes.
2.0
Bhp
1.18
1.26
1.34
1.43
1.52
1.62
1.73
1.85
1.98
2.12
2.26
Table
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
54 -- Fan Performance
- 48PDE06
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL
0.2
0.4
Bhp
0.23
0.27
0.31
0.37
0.43
0.49
0.56
0.65
0.73
0.83
0.94
Rpm
536
563
590
619
648
678
709
740
772
8O4
837
Rpm
Bhp
Rpm
640
0.32
729
663
0.36
749
686
0.42
770
711
0.47
792
737
0.54
816
764
0.61
840
792
0.69
865
820
0.78
891
849
0.87
918
879
0.97
946
909
1.09
974
Rpm
958
971
985
1001
1018
1036
1056
1077
1099
1122
1146
Bhp
0.72
0.78
0.85
0.93
1.01
1.10
1.20
1.31
1.43
1.55
1.69
Rpm
1027
1037
1049
1063
1079
1096
1114
1134
1154
1176
1198
Bhp
0.83
0.90
0.97
1.05
1.14
1.24
1.34
1.45
1.57
1.70
1.84
LEGEND
Bhp - Brake Horsepower
Units
STATIC PRESSURE
0.6
Bhp
0.41
0.46
0.52
0.58
0.65
0.73
0.81
0.91
1.01
1.12
1.24
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL
1.4
1.2
Horizontal
0.8
Rpm
811
828
846
866
887
9O9
933
957
982
1008
1034
STATIC PRESSURE
1.6
Rpm
1092
1101
1111
1124
1138
1153
1170
1188
1207
1228
1249
(in. wg)
Bhp
0.95
1.02
1.10
1.18
1.27
1.37
1.48
1.60
1.72
1.86
2.00
1.0
Bhp
0.51
0.56
0.62
0.69
0.77
0.85
0.94
1.04
1.14
1.26
1.38
Rpm
887
901
917
935
954
975
996
1019
1042
1066
1092
Bhp
1.07
1.15
1.23
1.32
1.41
1.51
1.63
1.75
1.88
2.02
2.16
Rpm
1214
1221
1228
1238
1249
1262
1276
1292
1309
1327
1346
Bhp
0.52
0.58
0.64
0.71
0.79
0.88
0.97
1.08
1.19
1.31
1.44
Rpm
896
912
929
948
968
990
1013
1037
1062
1087
1114
Bhp
1.09
1.16
1.25
1.34
1.44
1.55
1.67
1.79
1.93
2.07
2.23
Rpm
1222
1229
1238
1248
1261
1275
1290
1307
1325
1344
1365
Bhp
0.61
0.67
0.74
0.81
0.89
0.98
1.07
1.17
1.28
1.40
1.53
(in. wg)
2.0
1.8
Rpm
1154
1162
1171
1182
1194
1208
1224
1241
1259
1278
1298
Bhp
1.20
1.28
1.36
1.45
1.55
1.66
1.78
1.90
2.03
2.18
2.33
NOTES:
i. Maxinnml
continuous
2. See General
BHP is 2.0.
Fan Performance
Notes.
Table 55 -- Fan Performance - 48PDF06 Horizontal Units
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
LEGEND
Bhp - Brake Horsepower
0.2
Rpm
551
579
6O8
638
668
7OO
732
765
799
833
867
Bhp
0.24
0.28
0.33
0.39
0.45
0.52
0.60
0.68
0.78
0.88
1.00
Rpm
653
676
701
727
755
783
812
842
873
904
936
1.2
Rpm
968
981
996
1013
1031
1051
1072
1094
1118
1142
1168
Bhp
0.73
0.80
0.87
0.95
1.04
1.14
1.24
1.35
1.48
1.61
1.75
Rpm
1035
1047
1060
1075
1092
1110
1129
1150
1172
1195
1219
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL
0.4
Bhp
Rpm
0.33
741
0.38
761
0.43
783
0.49
807
0.56
831
0.64
857
0.72
884
0.81
912
0.92
940
1.03
969
1.15
999
STATIC PRESSURE
0.6
Bhp
0.42
0.48
0.54
0.60
0.68
0.76
0.85
0.95
1.05
1.17
1.30
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL
1.4
STATIC PRESSURE
1.6
Bhp
0.85
0.92
0.99
1.08
1.17
1.27
1.38
1.50
1.62
1.76
1.91
Rpm
1100
1110
1121
1135
1150
1166
1185
1204
1225
1246
1269
Bhp
0.97
1.04
1.12
1.21
1.30
1.41
1.52
1.64
1.77
1.92
2.07
(in. wg)
0.8
Rpm
821
839
858
879
9O2
925
95O
976
1002
1030
1058
2. See General
96
continuous
2.0
1.8
Rpm
1162
1171
1181
1193
1206
1221
1238
1256
1275
1296
1317
BHP is 2.0.
Fan Performance
Bhp
0.62
0.69
0.76
0.83
0.91
1.01
1.11
1.21
1.33
1.46
1.60
(in. wg)
NOTES:
i. Maxinnml
1.0
Notes.
Bhp
1.21
1.29
1.38
1.48
1.58
1.69
1.82
1.95
2.09
2.24
2.40
Table
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
56 --
AVAILABLE
0.4
0.2
Rpm
492
513
534
557
58O
6O3
627
651
675
Bhp
0.15
0.18
0.21
0.24
0.28
0.33
0.38
0.43
0.49
Rpm
604
620
638
657
677
697
718
739
761
Bhp
0.22
0.26
0.29
0.33
0.38
0.43
0.48
0.54
0.61
- 50PD05
Vertical
Units
EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
0.6
Rpm
701
714
729
745
762
779
798
817
837
Bhp
0.31
0.34
0.38
0.43
0.48
0.53
0.59
0.65
0.72
(in. wg)
0.8
Rpm
790
800
812
825
839
855
871
889
907
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
1.4
1.6
1.2
Rpm
95O
955
962
971
981
993
1005
1019
1034
Fan Performance
1.0
Bhp
0.39
0.43
0.48
0.53
0.58
0.64
0.70
0.77
0.85
Rpm
873
880
889
900
912
926
940
956
972
Bhp
0.49
0.53
0.58
0.63
0.69
0.75
0.82
0.89
0.97
(in. wg)
1.8
2.0
Bhp
0.58
0.63
Rpm
1023
1027
Bhp
0.69
0.74
Rpm
1092
1094
Bhp
0.79
0.85
Rpm
1157
1158
Bhp
0.90
0.96
Rpm
1219
1220
Bhp
1.02
1.08
0.68
0.74
0.80
0.87
0.94
1.02
1.10
1032
1039
1047
1057
1068
1080
1094
0.79
0.85
0.92
0.99
1.06
1.14
1.23
1098
1103
1110
1118
1128
1139
1151
0.91
0.97
1.04
1.11
1.19
1.28
1.37
1161
1165
1171
1178
1186
1196
1206
1.03
1.09
1.17
1.24
1.33
1.41
1.51
1222
1225
1229
1235
1242
1251
1260
1.15
1.22
1.30
1.38
1.46
1.56
1.65
Bhp
0.54
0.59
0.65
0.72
0.79
0.87
0.95
1.04
1.14
1.24
1.35
Rpm
Bhp
908
0.64
920
0.70
934
0.76
950
0.83
966
0.91
983
0.99
1001
1.08
1020
1.18
1039
1.28
1059
1.38
1079
1.50
Bhp
1.11
1.18
1.26
1.35
1.44
1.53
1.64
1.75
1.87
1.99
2.13
Rpm
1231
1236
1242
1250
1259
1269
1280
1293
1306
1320
1335
LEGEND
NOTES:
i. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0.
2. See General Fan Performance Notes.
Bhp - Brake Horsepower
Table 57 -- Fan Performance - 50PD06 Vertical Units
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
LEGEND
Bhp - Brake Horsepower
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL
0.4
0.2
Bhp
0.25
0.29
0.34
0.39
0.45
0.51
0.57
0.65
0.73
0.81
0.91
Rpm
568
592
616
641
665
690
716
742
768
794
820
Rpm
667
687
708
730
752
775
798
821
845
869
894
Rpm
753
771
789
809
829
850
871
892
915
937
960
Bhp
0.44
0.49
0.54
0.61
0.67
0.75
0.82
0.91
1.00
1.10
1.20
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL
1.4
1.2
Rpm
978
989
1001
1015
1029
1045
1061
1078
1096
1115
1134
Bhp
0.34
0.39
0.44
0.50
0.56
0.63
0.70
0.78
0.86
0.96
1.05
Bhp
0.75
0.81
0.88
0.96
1.04
1.12
1.21
1.31
1.42
1.53
1.65
Rpm
1046
1055
1065
1077
1090
1104
1119
1135
1151
1169
1187
Bhp
0.87
0.93
1.00
1.08
1.16
1.26
1.35
1.45
1.57
1.68
1.81
STATIC PRESSURE
0.6
0.8
Rpm
833
848
864
881
900
918
938
958
979
1000
1021
STATIC PRESSURE
1.6
Rpm
1110
1117
1126
1136
1148
1161
1174
1189
1204
1221
1238
(in. wg)
Bhp
0.98
1.05
1.13
1.21
1.30
1.39
1.49
1.60
1.71
1.84
1.97
(in. wg)
2. See General
97
continuous
BHP is 2.0.
Fan Performance
2.0
1.8
Rpm
1172
1178
1185
1194
1204
1216
1228
1241
1256
1271
1287
NOTES:
i. Maxinnml
1.0
Notes.
Bhp
1.23
1.31
1.39
1.48
1.58
1.68
1.79
1.90
2.02
2.15
2.29
1
Table
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
58 -- Fan Performance
Bhp
0.11
0.13
0.16
0.19
0.22
0.25
0.29
0.34
0.39
Bhp
0.26
0.29
0.33
0.37
0.41
0.46
0.51
0.57
Rpm
745
752
761
773
786
801
817
834
Bhp
0.35
0.38
0.42
0.46
0.51
0.56
0.62
0.68
Rpm
831
835
842
851
862
875
889
904
Bhp
0.44
0.47
0.51
0.56
0.61
0.67
0.73
0.80
694
0.51
777
0.63
852
0.75
921
0.87
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
1.4
1.6
1200
1300
911
913
0.53
0.57
_986
_986
1500
1600
1700
1800
925
934
944
956
0.67
0.72
0.78
0.85
_995
1002
1010
1021
1900
2000
1400
LEGEND
970
985
918
0.92
1.00
0.62
1033
1047
_989
1.2
Rpm
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
1.8
2.0
Rpm
1056
Bhp
0.74
Rpm
1123
Bhp
0.85
Rpm
1187
Bhp
0.96
0.68
0.72
0.78
0.84
1056
1058
1061
1067
0.78
0.84
0.89
0.95
1122
1123
1125
1129
0.90
0.95
1.01
1.08
1185
1185
1186
1189
1.01
1.07
1.14
1.21
0.90
0.97
1074
1083
1.02
1.09
1135
1143
1.15
1.23
1194
1200
1.28
1.36
1.04
1.13
1094
1106
1.17
1.26
1152
1162
1.31
1.40
1208
1217
1.45
1.54
NOTES:
i. Maxinmnl continuous BHP is 2.0.
2. See General Fan Perfornlanee Notes.
Required
Table
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
(in. wg)
Bhp
0.63
Bhp - Brake Horsepower
2500
1.0
Rpm
652
662
674
688
704
720
738
757
Bhp
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
(in. wg)
0.8
Bhp
0.19
0.21
0.24
0.27
0.31
0.35
0.40
0.45
Rpm
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
Units
Rpm
548
561
577
593
611
630
650
672
AIRFLOW
(Cfm)
High Range Motor/Drive
Horizontal
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
0.4
0.6
0.2
Rpm
422
439
457
477
498
521
545
569
595
- 50PD05
59 -- Fan Performance
Rpm
491
513
537
561
586
613
64O
667
Bhp
0.19
0.23
0.27
0.31
0.36
0.41
0.47
0.54
695
724
753
Bhp - Brake Horsepower
Low Range Motor/Drive Required
Units
(in. wg)
0.8
1.0
0.61
0.69
Rpm
604
623
643
664
686
709
732
757
782
807
Bhp
0.28
0.32
0.37
0.42
0.47
0.53
0.60
0.67
0.75
0.84
Rpm
697
714
731
750
770
790
812
834
857
881
Bhp
0.37
0.42
0.47
0.52
0.58
0.65
0.72
0.80
0.89
0.98
Rpm
781
795
810
827
845
864
884
904
926
948
Bhp
0.47
0.52
0.57
0.63
0.70
0.77
0.85
0.93
1.02
1.12
Rpm
859
871
884
899
915
932
950
969
989
1010
Bhp
0.57
0.62
0.68
0.75
0.82
0.89
0.97
1.06
1.16
1.26
0.78
833
0.93
905
1.08
971
1.23
1032
1.38
Bhp
1.03
1.09
1.17
1.24
1.33
1.42
1.52
1.63
1.74
1.86
1.99
Rpm
1192
1196
1201
1208
1217
1227
1238
1251
1265
1279
1295
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
1.4
1.6
1.2
LEGEND
Horizontal
AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
0.4
0.6
0.2
Rpm
932
942
953
966
98O
996
1012
1030
1049
1068
1089
- 50PD06
Bhp
0.68
0.73
0.80
0.86
0.94
1.02
1.11
1.20
1.30
1.41
1.53
Rpm
1002
1009
1019
1030
1043
1057
1072
1088
1106
1124
1143
Bhp
0.79
0.85
0.91
0.99
1.06
1.15
1.24
1.34
1.44
1.56
1.68
Rpm
1068
1074
1082
1092
1103
1115
1129
1144
1160
1178
1196
Bhp
0.91
0.97
1.04
1.11
1.19
1.28
1.38
1.48
1.59
1.71
1.84
(in. wg)
1.8
Rpm
1132
1136
1143
1151
1161
1172
1184
1198
1213
1229
1246
NOTES:
i. Maxinmnl
2. See General
98
continuous
BHP is 2.0.
Fan Perfornlanee
Notes.
2.0
Bhp
1.15
1.22
1.30
1.38
1.47
1.56
1.67
1.78
1.89
2.02
2.16
GENERAL
1, Static
pressure
losses
from
NOTES
accessories
and
FOR FAN PERFORMANCE
4. Extensive motor and drive testing on these units ensures
that the full horsepower range of the motor can be utilized
with confidence, Using the fan motors up to the bhp rating
shown will not result in nuisance tripping or premature
motor failure, Unit warranty will not be affected,
5. Use of a field-supplied motor may affect wire size.
Recalculate the unit power supply MCA and MOCP if
required. Contact your Carrier representative for details.
options
(economizer,
etc.) must be added to external static pressure
before
entering
Fan
Performance
table,
Refer
to
Accessory/FIOP
Static Pressure information,
2. Interpolation
is permissible,
DATA TABLES
Do not extrapolate.
3, Fan performance
tables are based on wet coils, clean filters,
and casing losses, Gas heat losses are included for 48 series
units,
6. Use the following formula to calculate input watts:
Input Watts = Bhp x (746/Motor Eft)
99
APPENDIX
Table
UNIT
50PD
05
06
60 -- Air Quantity
COOLING
(cfm)
1200
1500
2000
2500
Limits
D - ADDITIONAL
(50PD
Units)
HEATING (cfm)
OPTIONAL ELECTRIC
1200
1500
Table
DRIVE
05 & 06
2000
2500
bhp
motor
(746)
63 -- Fan Rpm
at Motor
UNIT
48/50PD
05
08
HEATING
Min
(cfm)
Max
2000
2000
600
940
1680
2810
05 (High
Heat)
1200
2000
1130
2820
08 (Low
08 (Med
Heat)
Heat)
1500
1500
2500
2500
940
1130
2810
2820
08 (High
Heat)
1500
2500
1510
2520
- 48/50PD
MAX
BHP
MAX AMPS
2.0
2.0
6.4
3.2
3. The EPAC_ (Energy Policy Act of 1992) regulates energy requirements for
specific types of indoor-fan motors. Motors regulated by EPAC_ include any
general purpose, T-frame (three-digit, 143 and larger),
single-speed, foot
mounted, polyphase, squirrel cage induction motors of NEMA (National Electrical
Manufacturers Association) design A and B, manufactured for use in the United
States. Ranging from 1 to 200 Hp, these continuous-duty
motors operate on 230
and 460 volt, 60 Hz power. If a motor does not fit into these specifications, the
motor does not have to be replaced by an EPAC_-compliant
energy-efficient motor.
Variable-speed motors are exempt from EPACW compliance requirements.
Therefore, the indoor-fan motors for Carrier 48/50PG03-14
units are exempt from
these requirements.
efficiency
Table
Units)
1200
1200
0.80
0.80
1. Extensive motor and electrical testing ensures that the motors can be utilized
with confidence up to the maximum applied bhp, watts, and amps. Using the fan
motor up to the maximum ratings shown will not result in nuisance tripping or
premature motor failure. Unit warranty will not be affected.
2. Convert bhp to watts using the following formula:
=
(48PD
Heat)
Heat)
EFFICIENCY
208/230-3ph
460-3ph
Limits
(cfm)
Max
Fan Motor Specifications
NOTES:
watts
61 -- Air Quantity
COOLING
Min
05 (Low
05 (Med
VOLTAGE/PHASE
Low & High
DATA
UNIT
48PD
HEAT
Table 62 -- Evaporator
48/50PD
START-UP
Pulley
MOTOR
Settings*
PULLEY
- 48/50PD
TURNS
OPEN
DRIVE
0
1/2
1
11/2
2
21/2
3
31/2
4
41/2
5
Low
910
878
847
815
784
753
721
690
659
627
596
High
Low
Hiclh
1173
978
1261
1139
949
1227
1104
920
1194
1070
891
1161
1035
863
1128
1001
834
1095
966
805
1062
932
776
1028
897
748
995
863
719
962
828
690
929
*Approximate fan rpm shown, based on 1725 rpm motor.
NOTE: Factory speed setting is at 5 turns open.
Table
AIRFLOW
64 --
Accessory/FlOP
Pressure
ELECTRIC
Drop
(in. wg)
- 48/50PD
ECONOMIZER
(Vertical)
ECONOMIZER
(CFM)
HEAT
800
800
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.03
0.05
1000
1200
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.03
0.07
O. 10
1400
0.03
0.04
O. 14
1600
1800
0.04
0.05
0.08
0.07
O. 17
0.22
2000
2200
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.11
0.28
0.31
2400
0.10
0.13
0.37
2600
2800
0.11
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.43
0.49
3000
0.15
0.21
0.56
100
(Horizontal)
CONTROL
SET POINT
AND
CONFIGURATION
Model
Number:
Serial
Number:
Date:
Technician:
MBB:
CESR131320--
ECB:
CESRI31249--
MAR@
INDICATE
Control
Type:
SetPoints:
Thermostat/T55
UNIT
Space Temp./T-56
Cooling
Space Temp./T-58
BELOW
Space Temp.
Unoccupied:
Occupied:
Unoccupied:
Table
ITEM
CESRI31171--
SETTINGS
Occupied:
Heating
65 -- MODE
EXPANSION
RANGE
- CONFIGURATION
UNITS
DEFAULT
CONFIGURATION
DISP
LOG
Software Versions:
Display
CCN
TABLE/SUB-TABLE
SERVICE
CONFIGURATION
CCN POINT
DISPLAY
Configuration
METR
Metric Display
On/Off
Off
DISPUNIT
LANG
Language
Selection
0=English
1=Spanish
2=French
0
LANGUAGE
PROT
Password
Enable
Enable/Disable
Disable
PASS EBL
PSWD
Service
Password
0000 to 9999
1111
TEST
Test Display
On/Off
Off
3 = Portuguese
UNIT
LEDs
Unit Configuration
DISPTEST
S.DLY
Startup Delay
0 to 600
30
STARTDLY
OC.FN
Fan On When Occupied
Yes/No
Yes
OCC
IDF.F
Shut Down on IDF Failure
Yes/No
Yes
FATALFAN
FS.MX
Supply
Speed
Fan Maximum
80 to 100
%
100
SPEEDMAX
FS.MN
Supply
Fan Minimum
10 to 40
%
2O
SPEEDMIN
FS.VM
Vent Mode Fan Speed
Fan Status Switch
40to
^F
5O
SPEEDVNT
0: no FlOP
1: FlOP
FANSTCFG
0: no FlOP
1: FlOP
FILSTCFG
0: no FlOP
1: FlOP
SHTDNCFG
O=No Switch
1=Normal Open
2=Normal
Closed
O
REMOCCFG
Yes/No
0=No Switch
No
0
RH OAQ
TCSTCOOL
FN.SW
Speed
100
O=No Switch
1=Normal
2=Normal
FL.SW
Filter Status Switch
Fire Shutdown
Open
Closed
O=No Switch
1=Normal
2=Normal
FS.SW
sec
PASSWORD
(display only, not in
table)
UNIT
Switch
Open
Closed
O=No Switch
1=Normal
2=Normal
RM.SW
Remote Occupancy
RH.S
RH Sensor on QAQ Input
RH.SW
Space Humidity
Switch
Switch
1=Normal
2=Normal
Open
Closed
Temp Cmp Strt Cool Factr
0 to 60
mins
0
TCS.H
Temp Crop Strt Heat Factr
0 to 60
mins
0
Cooling
Min Compressor
FS.CD
Fan Speed
MRT.C
Compressor
MOT.C
TCSTHEAT
COOL
Configuration
MIN.C
HUMSTCFG
Open
Closed
TCS.C
COOL
FAN
CFG
15 to 80
%
70
MIN CAPC
1 to 9,9
^ F
3
SPEEDDMD
Min On Time
120 to 999
sec
180
MIN ON
300 to 999
sec
300
MIN OFF
RST.C
Compressor
Min Off Time
Runtime to Reset Strikes
120 to 999
sec
300
MIN ON S
FOD.C
Fan-off
0 to 600
sec
60
COOL
CS.A1
Current Sensing
Disable: reserved for
future use
DO NOT ENABLE
A1 SENSE
C.LO
Compressor
Lockout
Alert Each Strike
0
OATLCOMP
ALM.N
Yes
ALM
SAT
Supply Air Temperature
Capacity
Control
Demand
Delay, Mech Cool
A1
Enable/Disable
Temp
0 to 100F
dF
Yes//No
FOD
NOW
SASP
Cool Supply
45 to 75
dF
65
SASP
SA.MU
SASP Maximum
Reset Up
0 to 20
^ F
10
SASPMAXU
SA.MD
SASP Maximum
Down
Reset
-20
^ F
-10
SASPMAXD
SAT.U
Minimum
SAT Upper Level
35.0 to 65.0
dF
60
SATMIN
H
SAT.L
Minimum
SAT Lower Level
35.0 to 65.0
dF
45
SATMIN
L
SST
SST.O
Low Suction
Air Setpoint
to 0
Control
Suction OK Temperature
Low Suction - Level 1
10 to 50
dF
18
SSTOK
SST.1
10 to 50
dF
20
SSTLEV1
SST.2
Low Suction
- Level 2
5 to 50
dF
15
SSTLEV2
SST.3
Low Suction
- Level 3
0 to 50
dF
10
SSTLEV3
PSI.D
Ckt A Minimum
0 to 500
psig
20
DELTAP A
OFC
Outdoor
Pressure
Fan Control
1.MXP
Fan Levl Max Pressure
100 to 500
psig
450
LEVlMAXP
2.MNP
Fan Lev2 Min Pressure
Fan Lev2 On Temperature
psig
F
200
55
LEV2MINP
2.ON
100 to 500
0 to t00
2.OFF
Fan Lev2 Off Temperature
0 to 100
F
45
LEV2OFF
101
LEV2ON
ENTRY
Table 65 -- MODE - CONFIGURATION
ITEM
H EAT
EXPANSION
Heating
HT.TY
RANGE
UNITS
(cont)
CCN
DEFAULT
TABLE/SUB-TABLE
HEAT
Configuration
Type of Heat
0=No
Installed
Heat
0 (50 series with
1 =Gas
2=Electric
CCN
POINT
CFG
HEATTYPE
no
electric heat)
1 (48 series)
2 (50 series with
electric heat)
N.HTR
Number
NUM
HEAT
MRT.H
Heat
Minimum
On Time
60 to 999
sec
12O
MOT.H
Heat
Minimum
Off Time
60 to 999
HMIN
ON
sec
12O
HMIN
H.DEC
Heat Stage
Time
Decrease
OFF
120 to 999
sec
3OO
HSTAGDEC
H.INC
Heat Stage
Increase
FOD.E
Fan-
120 to 999
sec
450
HSTAGINC
10 to 600
sec
30
FOD.G
Fan-off
ELEC
Delay, Gas Heat
45 to 600
sec
45
GAS
HT.LO
Heating
SAT
SUPPLY AIR
Lockout
40 to 125F
dF
75
OATLHEAT
of Heat Stages
1 to2
1 (50 series <15kW)
2 (48 series, 50
series
Time
off Delay, Elect Heat
Temp
> = 15kW)
FOD
FOD
TEMPERATURE
SAT. H
SAT Heat
Mode
Disable
SAT
SAM.L
Maximum
Level
SAT Lower
85 to 200
dF
140
SATMAX
L
SAM.U
Maximum
Level
SAT Upper
85 to 200
dF
160
SATMAX
H
SPT
SPACE
Sensing
Enable/Disable
HEAT
TEMPERATURE
HT, PD
SPT Heat
Level
Demand
(+)
0.5to
5
^F
1
HDEM
POS
HZND
SPT Heat
Level
Demand
(-)
-5to
-0.5
^F
-1
HDEM
NEG
H.LAG
Heat Thermal
min
1
ECON
Lag Factor
Economizer
Configuration
EC.EN
Economizer
Installed
E.CTL
Economizer
Control
Type
0 to 5
HEAT
ECON
LAG
CFG
Yes/No
No: no FlOP
Yes: FlOP
ECONO
1 =Dig/Position
1
ECON
CTL
2=Dig/Command
3=Analog
Ctrl
MR25
Econ Min at 25%
0to
100
%
0
MINP
25
0to
100
%
0
MINP
50
0to
100
%
0
MINP
75
0 to 100
%
30
MINP
MAX
0to
%
100
ECONOMAX
Fanspeed
MR50
Econ Min at 50%
Fanspeed
MR75
Econ Min at 75%
Fanspeed
MRMX
Econ Min at Max
Fanspeed
EC.MX
Econo
M.ANG
Min Actuator
Cool
Max Position
100
EH.LO
Econo
Cool
Hi Temp
Limit
40 to 100F
EL.LO
Econo
Cool
Lo Temp
Limit
- 30 to 50F
DF.DB
Diff Dry Bulb Control
Disable/Enable
UEFC
Unoccupied
0=Disabled
75 to 90
Ctrl Angle
Free Cooling
88
MINANGLE
dF
65
OATLECLH
dF
0
OATLECLL
Enable
DIFFBULB
2
UEFC
CFG
1 =Unoccupied
min
120
UEFCTIME
-30
dF
50
OATLUEFC
No: no FlOP
Yes: FlOP
PE ENABL
cfm
600
PE1 CFM
100 to 15000
cfm
0
PE2 CFM
500 to 15000
cfm
1600 (05)
2000 (06)
IDF CFM
0: no FlOP
ENTHLCFG
Free Cool PreOcc
FC.LO
Free Cool Low Temp
PE.EN
Power
Exhaust
installed
Yes/No
PE1 .C
Power
CFM
Exhaust
Stage1
100 to 15000
PE2.C
Power
CFM
Exhaust
Stage2
IDF.C
Indoor
CFM
Fan Max Speed
EN.SW
Enthalpy
Switch
Time
2= Preoccupancy
1 to 9999
FC.TM
Limit
0=No
to 70F
Switch
1 =Normal
2=Normal
Open
Closed
1: FlOP
102
ENTRY
Table 65 -- MODE - CONFIGURATION
ITEM
AIR.Q
EXPANSION
Air Quality
IA.CF
RANGE
DEFAULT
Input
Config
0=No
IAQ
3=Ctrl
IAQ Analog
CON
TABLE/SUB-TABLE
IAQ
Config.
IAQ Analog
Fan Config
CCN
POINT
CFG
0: no FlOP
1 = DCV
2=Override
IA.FN
UNITS
(cont)
IAQANCFG
1: FlOP
IAQ
Min Pos
0 = Neve r
0
IAQANFAN
0
IAQINCFG
1 =Occupied
2=Always
II.CF
IAQ Switch
Input Config
0=No
IAQ
1 = DCV N/O
2 = DCV N/C
3=Override
N/O
4=Override
N/C
II.FN
IAQ Switch
Fan Config
0 = Neve r
IAQINFAN
1 =Occupied
2=Always
0to 100
%
10
Position
0to
%
100
IAQOVPOS
Input Config
0=No OAQ
1 = DCV
0
OAQANCFG
0 to 5000
6OO
OAQLOCK
Low
0 to 5000
100
DAQ
LOW
High
0 to 5000
7OO
DAQ
HIGH
Fan On AQ Differential
0 to 5000
6OO
DAQFNON
DF.OF
Fan Off AQ Differential
0 to 5000
2OO
DAQFNOFF
1.4M
IAQ Sensor
Value
at 4mA
0 to 5000
0
IAQ 4MA
1.20M
IAQ Sensor
Value
at 20mA
0 to 5000
2000
IAQ_20MA
O.4M
OAQ Sensor
Value
at 4mA
0 to 5000
0
OAQ_4MA
O.20M
OAQ Sensor
20mA
Value
at
0 to 5000
2000
OAQ
H.4M
RH Sensor
Value
at 4mA
0 to 50
%
0
RH 4MA
H.20M
RH Sensor
Value
at 20mA
60 to 100
%
100
AQ.MN
Econo
Min IAQ Position
OVR.P
IAQ Override
OA.CF
OAQ Analog
OAQ.L
OAQ Lockout
Limit
AQD.L
AQ Differential
AQD.H
AQ Differential
DF.ON
100
2=Lockout
ALM.O
Alarm
Relay
SPT/SPRH
A.SRT
SAT/RAT
A.OAT
OAT Thermistor
A.CS
Current
A.CMP
Compressor
A.CKT
Refrig Circuit
A.SSP
SSP Transducer
A.SCT
SCT Thermistor
A.FAN
Indoor
A.FIL
Dirty Filter
A.ECO
Economizer
PID
OAQ
Sensor
Failure
Sensor
Failure
Failure
Sensor
Failure
Failure
Failure
Failure
Failure
Fan Failure
Failure
20MA
RH 20MA
ALM
Config.
A.SPC
IAQMINP
CFG
Yes/No
Yes
SPACE
Yes/No
Yes
SATRATAL
Yes/No
Yes
OAT
Yes/No
No
CS
Yes/No
Yes
COMP
Yes/No
Yes
CKT
AL
Yes/No
Yes
SSP
AL
Yes/No
Yes
SCT
AL
Yes/No
Yes
FAN
AL
Yes/No
Yes
FILT AL
Yes/No
Yes
PID Configurations
AL
AL
AL
AL
ECON
PID
AL
CFG
EC.P
Economizer
PID -
kP
0.0 to 99.9
2.5
ECONO
P
EC.I
Economizer
PID -
kl
0.0 to 99.9
0.1
ECONO
I
EC.D
Economizer
PID -
kD
0.0 to 99.9
1
ECONO
D
EC.DT
Economizer
PID -
rate
10.0 to 180.0
sec
15
ECONO
DT
E.DBD
Economizer
PID
0 to 25
%
3
ECONBAND
Deadband
CRP
Capacity
PID - kP
0 to 99.9
1.5
VCAP
P
CRI
Capacity
PID - kl
0 to 99.9
0.1
VCAP
I
CRD
Capacity
PID - kD
0 to 99.9
1
VCAP
D
CRDT
Capacity
PID - rate
1 to 30
5
VCAP
LK.P
Linkage
Staging
PID - kP
0.0 to 99.9
10
LINK
P
LK.I
Linkage
Staging
PID - kl
0.0 to 99.9
5
LINK
I
LK.D
Linkage
Staging
PID - kD
0.0 to 99.9
5
LINK
D
LK.DT
Linkage
rate
Staging
PID -
10.0 to 180.0
30
LINK
DT
secs
secs
103
DT
ENTRY
Table 65 -- MODE - CONFIGURATION
ITEM
(GENERIC
= CCN
TRIM
EXPANSION
RANGE
UNITS
DEFAULT
only)
(cont)
CCN
TABLE/SUB-TABLE
GENERICS
CCN
POINT
POINT 01 Definition
8-char
ASCII
Point
01
POINT 02 Definition
8- char
ASCII
Point
02
03
POINT 03 Definition
8- char
ASCII
Point
POINT 04 Definition
8- char
ASCII
Point
04
POINT 05 Definition
8- char
ASCII
Point
05
POINT 06 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
06
POINT 07 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
07
POINT 08 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
08
POINT 09 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
09
POINT
10 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
10
POINT
11 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
11
POINT
12 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
12
POINT
13 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
13
POINT
14 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
14
POINT
15 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
15
POINT
16 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
16
POINT
17 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
17
POINT
18 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
18
POINT
19 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
19
POINT 20 Definition
8- char
ASCii
Point
20
Sensor
Calibration
(CCN TRIM - see
Maintenance
Display)
SPT.C
Space
SPT.T
Space Temp Trim
Supply Air Temp Calib.
SAT.C
SAT.T
Supply
Temp Calibration
Air Temp Trim
-30to
130
dF
- 30 to 30
^F
0
-30to
130
- 30 to 30
dF
^F
0
dF
RAT.C
Return Air Temp Calib.
-30to
130
RAT.T
Return Air Temp Trim
- 30 to 30
CCN.A
CCN.B
CCN Configuration
CCN Element
Number
CCN Bus Number
BAUD
CCN Baud
^F
0
CONFIGURATION
CCN
BROD
Rate
PD
CCNADD
CCNBUS
2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400
3
CCNBAUDD
Yes/No
No
CCNBC
OATBC
GSBC
BRODEFS
CCN Broadcast
CCN Time/Date
B.OAT
B.GS
CCN OAT Broadcast
Global Schedule
Broadcst
Yes/No
Yes/No
No
No
B.ACK
CCN Broadcast
Yes/No
No
SCH.N
CCN Schedule
Overrides
Schedule
Number
Ack'er
50
1
0
B.TIM
SCH.O
Config.
Broadcast
48
1 to 239
0 to 239
CCNBCACK
SCHEDOVR
SCHEDNUM
O = Always
Occupied
1-64
=
Schedule
65-99
Local
= Global
Schedule
HOL.G
OV.TL
Accept
Global Holidays
Override Time Limit
Yes/No
Oto 4
hours
No
4
HOLIDAYT
OTL
OV. EX
Timed Override
Hours
SPT Override
Enabled
Oto 4
hours
O
OVR EXT
TIME-OVER
OV.SP
LDSH
CCN Schedule
Yes/No
Yes
Oto
16
0
100
100
Overrides
LOADSHED
S.GRP
Loadshed
R.MXC
S.MXC
Redline Max Capacity
Loadshed
Max Capacity
Oto
Oto
R.MXH
Redline Max Heat Stages
Loadshed
Max Heat
Oto 2
2
MAXHREDL
Oto 2
2
MAXHSHED
S.MXH
Group
Number
%
%
1O0
1O0
Stages
104
SHED NUM
MAXCREDL
MAXCSHED
ENTRY
UNIT
MODEL
START-UP
CHECKLIST
NO.:
SERIAL
DATE:
NO:
TECHNICIAN:
I.
PRE-START-UP:
[]
VERIFY
THAT ALL PACKAGING
[]
VERIFY
INSTALLATION
OF OUTDOOR
[]
VERIFY
INSTALLATION
OF FLUE
[]
VERIFY
THAT CONDENSATE
[]
VERIFY
THAT ALL ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
[]
VERIFY
GAS PRESSURE
GAS
VALVE
[]
CHECK
GAS PIPING
(48PD
ONLY)
[]
CHECK
THAT INDOOR-AIR
[]
CHECK
THAT
[]
VERIFY
THAT UNIT
[]
CHECK
FAN WHEELS
[]
VERIFY
THAT FAN SHEAVES
[]
VERIFY
THAT SCROLL
[]
VERIFY
INSTALLATION
[]
VERIFY
CONFIGURATION
[]
VERIFY
THAT CRANKCASE
[]
VERIFY
THAT THE VFD
MATERIALS
EXHAUST
TO UNIT
FILTERS
OUTDOOR
BEEN
AND INLET
CONNECTION
FOR LEAKS
HAVE
REMOVED
FROM
UNIT
AIR HOOD
ARE
AIR INLET
HOOD
IS INSTALLED
AND TERMINALS
IS WITHIN
CLEAN
SCREENS
(48PD
ONLY)
PER INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS
ARE TIGHT
SPECIFIED
RANGE
(48PD
ONLY)
AND IN PLACE
ARE
IN PLACE
IS LEVEL
AND PROPELLER
ARE
FOR LOCATION
ALIGNED
COMPRESSORS
OF SPACE
ARE
IN HOUSING/ORIFICE
AND BELTS
ROTATING
ARE
PROPERLY
IN THE CORRECT
AND VERIFY
SETSCREW
IS TIGHT
TENSIONED
DIRECTION
SENSOR
VALUES
FOR ELECTRONIC
HEATERS
IS IN AUTO
HAVE BEEN
CONTROLS
ENERGIZED
(REFER
TO CONTROL
FOR AT LEAST
SET UP CHECKLIST)
24 HOURS
MODE
II. START-UP
ELECTRICAL
SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
L1-L2
COMPRESSOR AMP_-COMPRESSOR
A1
L2-L3
L3-L1
L1
L2
L3
--COMPRESSOR
B1
L1
L2
L3
--COMPRESSOR
C1
L1
L2
L3
ELECTRIC HEAT AMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
L1
L2
L3
SUPPLY FAN AMPS
L1
L2
L3
TEMPERATURES
OUTDOOR-AIR
RETURN-AIR
COOLING
TEMPERATURE
F DB (Dry Bulb)
TEMPERATURE
FDB
SUPPLY AIR
F
WB (Wet Bulb)
F
GAS HEAT SUPPLY AIR (48PG)
F
ELECTRIC HEAT SUPPLY AIR (50PG)
F
PRESSURES
GAS INLET PRESSURE
GAS MANIFOLD
REFRIGERANT
REFRIGERANT
[]
VERIFY
PRESSURE
SUCTION
DISCHARGE
REFRIGERANT
IN. WG
STAGE NO. 1
IN. WG
CIRCUIT A
PSIG
CIRCUIT B
PSIG
CIRCUIT C
PSIG
CIRCUIT A
PSIG
CIRCUIT B
PSIG
CIRCUIT C
PSIG
CHARGE
USING
CHARGING
STAGE NO. 2
CHARTS
GENERAL
[]
ECONOMIZER
MINIMUM
VENT
AND
CHANGEOVER
SETTINGS
105
TO JOB REQUIREMENTS
IN. WG
Copyright
2009 Carrier Corp. * 73 i0 W. Morris St. * hldianapolis.
Manufacturer
reserves
IN 46231
the right to change_ at any time_ specifications
and designs
Printed in U.S.A.
without
Edition
notice and without
Date: 3/09
obligations.
106
Catalog
No:48-50PD-01T
Replaces: NEW